JL** 


T 


ATT 


Ik- 


A  HANDBOOK  FOR 
MILITARY  TRAINING 


MAJOR  O.O.ELLIS 
MA  JOI*  E 


A 


LIBRARY 

University  of 

California 

Irvine 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

A  HANDBOOK  FOR 
MILITARY  TRAINING 


THE 
PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

A  HANDBOOK  FOR 
MILITARY    TRAINING 


,       t  BY 

O.  O   ELLIS 

MAJOR,   UNITED  "STATES   INFANTRT 

AND 

E.  B.  GAREY 

MAJOR,    UNITED    STATES    INFANTRY" 

(rNSTRTTCTORS,    PLATTSBURG    TRAININO    CAMP,    1916) 
(INSTRUCTORS,   OFFICERS'   TRAINING    CAMP,  FT.    MCPHERSON,  GA.,    1917) 
(INSTRUCTORS,  OFFICERS'  TRAINING  CAMP,  FT.  OGLETHORPE,  GA.,   1917) 


WITH  MORE  THAN 
MO  ILLUSTRATIONS 


£m%^&*^h 


NEW  YORK 

THE  CENTURY  CO. 

1918 


aid.*- 


Copyright,  1917,  by 
The  Century  Co. 


Published,  March,  1917 

Second  Edition,  March,  1917 

Third   Edition,   April,    1917 

Fourth  Edition,  April,  1917 

Fifth    Edition,    May,    1917 

Sixth  Edition,  May,  1917 

Seventh  Edition,  August,  1917 

Eighth  Edition,  September,  1917 

Ninth  Edition,  January.  1918 

Tenth  Edition,  May,  1918 

.Eleventh  Edition,  August,  1918 


TO 

THOSE  FAR-SEEING  MEN 

WHO  INAUGURATED  AND  ATTENDED  THE 

FIRST   FEDERAL    TRAINING   CAMP 

THIS  TEXT  IS  RESPECTFULLY 

DEDICATED 


FOREWORD 

The  Plattsburg  Manual,  written  by  Majors  Ellis 
and  Garey,  will  prove  very  useful  to  men  who  are  con- 
templating military  training.  It  will  also  be  of  great 
value  to  those  who  are  undergoing  training. 

It  is  full  of  practical  information  presented  in  a  simple 
and  direct  manner  and  gives  in  detail  much  data  not 
easily  found  elsewhere.  It  is  a  useful  book,  easily 
understandable  by  those  who  have  had  little  or  no  mili- 
tary experience. 

It  will  be  useful  not  only  at  training  camps  but  it 
will  be  of  very  great  value  at  schools  and  colleges  where 
military  instruction  is  being  given. 

The  authors  of  this  book  have  performed  a  valuable 
service,  one  which  will  tend  to  facilitate  and  aid  very 
much  the  development  of  military  training  in  this  coun- 
try. In  addition  to  the  purely  mechanical  details  of 
training  the  book  presents  in  a  very  effective  and  simple 
manner  the  tactical  use  of  troops  under  various  condi- 
tions. 

In  a  word  it  is  a  useful  and  sound  work  and  one  which 
can  be  commended  to  those  who  contemplate  a  course  in 
military  training. 

(Signed)     Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General  U.  S.  A. 

February  27,  1917. 


PREFACE 

This  book  is  intended  to  serve  as  a  foundation  upon 
which  the  military  beginner  may  build  so  that  he  may  in 
time  be  able  to  study  the  technical  service  manuals  intel- 
ligently. It  has  been  written  as  an  elementary  text- 
book for  those  who  desire  to  become  Reserve  Officers,  for 
schools  and  colleges,  and  for  those  who  may  be  called  to 
the  colors. 

The  authors  have  commanded  companies  at  Platts- 
burg,  New  York,  and,  noting  the  need  of  such  a  text, 
compiled  their  observations  while  there. 

The  average  man  undergoing  military  training  wants 
to  know  as  much  as  possible  about  the  art  and  science  of 
war.  He  wants  to  acquire  a  good  knowledge  of  the 
principles  involved.  He  is  interested  in  the  technique 
of  movements.  He  is  willing  to  work  for  these  things, 
but  he  often  becomes  lost  in  confusion  when  he  attempts 
to  study  the  technical  service  manuals.  He  does  not 
know  how  to  select  the  most  important  and  omit  the  less 
important.  The  authors  have  selected  from  the  stand- 
ard texts  some  of  the  vitally  important  subjects  and 
principles  and  have  presented  them  to  the  civilian  in  a 
simple  and  plain  way. 

The  first  part  of  the  text  is  for  the  beginner.  It  tells 
him  how  to  prepare  physically  for  strenuous  military 


PREFACE 

work.  After  assisting  him  through  the  elementary  part 
of  his  instruction,  it  presents  for  his  consideration  and 
study  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

The  second  part,  or  supplement,  is  a  more  technical 
discussion  of  those  subjects  introduced  in  the  first.  It 
is  intended  principally  for  those  who  have  made  excel- 
lent progress. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I     General   Advice 3 

II     Physical  Exercise 21 

III  School,  of  the  Soldier 28 

IV     School  of  the  Squad 63 

V  School  of  the  Company 86 

VI     Fire  Superiority 130 

VII     The  Service  of  Security 136 

VIII      Attack  and  Defense 144; 

IX     General  Principles  of  Target  Practice     .      .  153 

X     Practice  March  or  "Hike" 159 

XI     Officers'  Reserve  Corps     .            169 

SUPPLEMENT 

I     The  Theory  of  Security 221 

II     Attack  and  Defense 242 

III     Patrolling 254 

IV  Target  Practice 260 

V  Tent  Pitching 292 

VI     Signals  and  Codes 297 

VII     First  Aid  to  the  Injured 309 

Appendixes 321 

Index 331 


THE 
PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

CHAPTER  I 

GENERAL  ADVICE 

The  United  States  is  divided  geographically  into  mil- 
itary departments  with  a  general  officer  commanding 
each  department.  The  departments  and  their  head- 
quarters are  as  follows : 

(1)  The  Northeastern  Department,  with  headquar- 

ters at  Boston,  Massachusetts. 

(2)  The  Eastern  Department,  with  headquarters  at 

Governors  Island,  New  York. 

(3)  The  Southeastern  Department,  with  Headquar- 

ters at  Charleston,  South  Carolina. 

(4)  The  Central  Department,  with  Headquarters  at 

Chicago,  Illinois. 

(5)  The  Southern  Department,  with  Headquarters 

at  Fort  Sam  Houston,  Texas. 

(6)  The  Western  Department,  with  Headquarters  at 

San  Francisco,  California. 

^  t  f(7)   The  Philippine  Department, 

t^  ,    \  with  Headquarters  at  Ma- 

Departments  .,  ^ 

r  [  nila. 

9 


10  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

n  f(8)   The  Hawaiian  Department, 

Overseas         I         with  Headquarters  at  Hono- 

Departments  -.  n     TTnTir  ■; 

r  [         lulu,  Jrlawan. 

( For  States  comprising  each  department,  see  Appendix) 
If  you  are  a  civilian  and  desire  any  information  in 
regard  to  the  army,  any  training  camps,  the  officers' 
reserve  corps,  or  any  military  legislation  or  orders  affect- 
ing you,  write  to  the  "Commanding  General"  of  the  De- 
partment in  which  you  live.  Address  your  letter  to  him 
at  his  headquarters. 

MAIL 

Mail  is  most  often  delayed  because  there  is  not  suffi- 
cient information  for  the  Postmaster  on  the  envelope. 
The  delivery  of  your  mail  will  be  delayed  unless  your  let- 
ters are  sent  to  the  company  and  the  regiment  to  which 
you  belong.  Therefore,  prepare,  before  you  reach  camp, 
several  stamped  postal  cards,  addressed  to  your  family 
and  business  associates,  containing  directions  to  address 

all    communications    to    you    care    of    Company , 

Regiment .  As  soon  as  you  are  assigned  to  a  com- 
pany and  regiment,  fill  in  these  data  and  mail  these 
postal  cards  at  once.  This  should  be  done  by  wire  in 
case  important  mail  is  expected  during  the  first  week 
of  camp.  Mail  is  delivered  to  each  company  as  soon 
as  a  complete  roll  of  the  organizations  can  be  made  out 
and  sent  to  the  post-office. 

INOCULATIONS   AND   VACCINATION 

As   soon   as  you   become   a  member  of  the   army, 


GENERAL  ADVICE  11 

whether  as  a  private  or  as  an  officer,  you  will  receive  the 
typhoid  prophylaxis  inoculation  and  be  vaccinated 
against  smallpox. 

WHAT   TO   BRING 

1.  Travel  light.  Bring  only  the  bare  necessities  of 
life  with  you.  Don't  bring  a  trunk.  Enlisted  men 
(not  officers)  will  be  supplied  with  all  necessary  uni- 
forms and  underwear.     This  includes  shoes. 

2.  Bring  a  pair  of  sneakers,  or  slippers.  They  will 
add  greatly  to  your  comfort  after  a  long  march  or  hard 
day's  work.  A  complete  bathing  suit  often  comes  in 
handy. 

3.  Report  in  uniform  if  you  have  one. 

4.  The  Government  will  provide  you  with  the  neces- 
sary shoes.  However,  if  you  can  afford  it,  buy  before 
you  report  for  duty,  a  pair  of  regulation  tan  shoes,  larger 
than  you  ordinarily  wear,  and  break  them  in  well  before 
arrival.     Rubber  heels  are  recommended. 

5.  Bring  your  toilet  articles  (comb,  brush,  mirror 
shaving  equipment,  etc.),  and  a  good  supply  of  hand- 
kerchiefs, and  towels. 

WHAT   TO   DO   ON    YOUR   ARRIVAL 

There  is  a  general  rule  of  procedure  to  follow  in  re- 
porting for  duty  at  any  post  or  training  camp. 

1.  If  you  receive  an  order  directing  you  to  report  for 
duty  at  a  camp  or  post  at  a  certain  specified  time,  read 
it  carefully,  put  it  in  a  secure  place,  and,  on  the  day  that 
you  are  to  report  for  duty  at  the  camp  or  post,  present 


12  THE  PLATTSEURG  MANUAL 

yourself  in  uniform,  if  you  have  one,  with  your  order. 
Be  careful  not  to  lose  your  order  or  leave  it  at  home. 
Have  it  in  your  pocket  book. 

2.  Upon  being  assigned  to  a  company,  unless  you  re- 
ceive orders  to  the  contrary,  report  at  once  with  your 
baggage  to  your  company  commander  (captain) ,  whom 
you  can  easily  find  when  you  reach  your  barracks  or 
company  street.  If  you  cannot  locate  your  company 
commander,  report  to  the  first  sergeant. 

3.  It  is  a  custom  of  the  service  to  have  an  experienced 
soldier  explain  to  a  new  man  exactly  where  he  is  to  go 
and  what  he  is  to  do.  Feel  no  embarrassment  at  being 
ignorant  of  your  new  duties  and  surroundings.  The 
Government  does  not  expect  anything  of  you  except 
eagerness  to  learn  and  willingness  to  obey. 

4.  After  reporting  to  your  company  commander  or 
first  sergeant,  you  will  have  a  bed  assigned  to  you  and 
you  will  be  issued  the  property  and  uniforms  necessary 
to  your  comfort  and  duties.  Check  your  property  care- 
fully as  it  is  issued  to  you.  You  will  have  to  sign  for 
all  of  it.     Look  after  your  property  at  all  times. 

5.  After  checking  your  property,  make  up  your  bed 
and  arrange  neatly  your  personal  and  issued  property 
on  or  under  your  bed  or  cot. 

6.  Spend  all  your  spare  time  cleaning  your  rifle  and 
bayonet  until  they  satisfy  your  company  commander. 
Then  keep  them  clean. 

7.  Don't  leave  the  company  street  or  barracks  on  the 
first  day,  except  with  the  permission  of  your  company 


GENERAL  ADVICE  13 

commander.     Don't  ask  for  this  permission  unless  you 
have  a  valid  reason. 

RULES    OF    CONDUCT    FOR    CAMP    LIFE 

The  first  few  days  will  be  easy  and  profitable  if  you 
will  read  carefully  and  adhere  to  the  following  plan  of 
procedure : 

1.  Get  up  at  the  first  note  of  reveille  and  get  quickly 
into  proper  uniform. 

2.  Get  within  two  or  three  feet  of  your  place  in  ranks 
and  await  the  sounding  of  assembly  for  reveille  and  then 
step  into  ranks. 

3.  Stand  at  attention  after  the  first  sergeant  com- 
mands "Fall  In."  Remember  that  this  command  is 
equivalent  to  "Company,  Attention." 

4.  After  reveille,  make  up  your  bed,  arrange  neatly 
your  equipment,  and  clean  up  the  ground  under  and 
around  your  cot.  The  company  commander  will  re- 
quire the  beds  made  up  and  the  equipment  arranged  in 
a  prescribed  way. 

5.  Wash  for  breakfast. 

6.  Upon  returning  from  breakfast,  go  at  once  to  the 
toilet.  Next,  prepare  the  equipment  prescribed  to  be 
worn  to  drill.  This  is  especially  important  when  the 
full  pack  is  prescribed.  Assist  your  tent  mates  in  polic- 
ing the  ground  in  and  around  your  tent. 

7.  If  you  need  medical  attention  give  your  name  to 
the  first  sergeant  at  reveille  and  report  to  him  at  his  tent 
upon  your  return  from  breakfast.     Don't  wait  until 


14  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

you  are  sick  to  report  to  the  hospital,  but  go  as  soon  as 
you  feel  in  the  least  unwell. 

8.  When  the  first  call  for  drill  is  blown,  put  on  your 
equipment,  inspect  your  bed  and  property  to  see  that 
everything  is  in  order,  and  then  go  to  your  place  in  ranks. 

9.  After  the  morning  drill,  get  ready  for  dinner.  Get 
a  little  rest  at  this  time  if  possible. 

10.  After  dinner  a  short  rest  is  usually  allowed  before 
the  afternoon  drill.  Take  advantage  of  this  opportun- 
ity; get  off  your  feet  and  rest.  Be  quiet  so  that  your 
tent  mates  may  rest. 

11.  Following  the  afternoon  drill  there  is  a  short  in- 
termission before  the  ceremony  of  retreat.  During  this 
time  take  a  quick  bath,  shave,  get  into  the  proper  uni- 
form for  retreat,  shine  your  shoes  and  brush  your  clothes 
and  hat.     Be  the  neatest  man  in  the  company. 

12.  Supper  usually  follows  retreat. 

13.  After  supper,  you  usually  have  some  spare  time 
until  taps.  The  Y.  M.  C.  A.  generally  provides  a  place 
supplied  with  Bibles,  newspapers,  good  magazines,  and 
writing  material.  Don't  be  ashamed  to  read  the  Bible. 
Don't  forget  to  write  to  the  folks  back  home. 

14.  Be  in  bed  with  lights  out  at  taps.  After  taps  and 
before  reveille,  remain  silent,  thus  showing  considera- 
tion for  those  who  are  sleeping  or  trying  to  sleep. 

15.  Consult  the  company  bulletin  board  at  least  twice 
daily.  On  this  bulletin  board  is  usually  found  the  fol- 
lowing information : 

(a)   A  list  of  calls. 


GENERAL  ADVICE  15 

(b)  The  proper  uniform  for  each  formation. 

(c)  Schedule  of  drills. 

(d)  Special  orders  and  instructions. 

16.  Get  all  your  orders  from  (a)  the  bulletin  board, 
(b)  the  first  sergeant,  (c)  the  acting  noncommissioned 
officers,  (d)  the  company  commander.  Don't  put  much 
faith  in  rumors. 

ADVICE   REGARDING   HABITS 

Your  life  in  camp  in  regard  to  food,  exercise,  hours  of 
sleep,  surroundings,  and  comforts,  will  differ  greatly 
from  that  you  lead  as  a  civilian.  You  will  submit  your 
body  to  a  sudden,  severe,  physical  test.  In  order  to 
prepare  your  body  for  this  change  in  manner  of  living 
and  work,  we  recommend  that  for  a  short  time  prior  to 
your  arrival  in  camp,  and  thereafter,  you  observe  the 
following  suggestions: 

1.  Use  no  alcohol  of  any  kind. 

2.  Stop  smoking,  or  at  least  be  temperate  in  the  use 
of  tobacco. 

3.  Eat  and  drink  moderately.  Chew  your  food  well. 
It  is  advisable,  however,  to  drink  a  great  deal  of  cool 
(not  cold)  water  between  meals. 

4.  Don't  eat  between  meals. 

5.  Accustom  yourself  to  regular  hours  as  to  sleeping, 
eating,  and  the  morning  functions. 

6.  Keep  away  from  all  soda  fountains  and  soft  drink 
stands. 

7.  For  at  least  two  weeks  prior  to  your  arrival  at 


16  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

camp,  take  regularly  the  exercises  described  in  this  book. 
Most  men  are  troubled  with  their  feet  during  the  first 
week  of  each  camp,  usually  because  they  do  not  observe 
the  following  precautions : 

1.  If  you  have  ever  had  trouble  with  the  arches  of 
your  feet,  wear  braces  for  them. 

2.  Lace  your  shoe  as  tightly  as  comfort  will  permit. 

3.  Wash  the  feet  daily. 

4.  Every  morning  shake  a  little  talcum  powder  or 
"Foot  Ease"  in  each  shoe. 

5.  Each  morning  put  on  a  fresh  pair  of  socks.  Your 
socks  should  fit  the  feet  so  neatly  that  no  wrinkles  re- 
main in  them  and  yet  not  be  so  tight  that  they  bind  the 
foot.  Do  not  wear  a  sock  with  a  hole  in  it  or  one  that 
has  been  darned. 

6.  Some  men  cannot  wear  light  wool  socks  with  com- 
fort. Do  not  wear  silk  or  cotton  socks  until  you  have 
given  light  wool  socks  a  fair  trial. 

7.  In  case  of  a  blister,  treat  it  as  directed  in  Chap- 
ter X. 

8.  Most  of  the  foot  troubles  are  caused  by  wearing 
shoes  that  do  not  fit  properly.  If  the  shoe  is  too  large 
it  rubs  blisters,  if  too  small  it  cramps  the  foot  and  causes 
severe  pain.  Marching  several  hours  while  carrying 
about  thirty  pounds  of  equipment  causes  each  foot  to 
expand  at  least  one  half  a  size  in  length  and  correspond- 
ingly in  breadth ;  hence  the  size  of  the  shoe  you  wear  in 
the  office  will  be  too  small  for  training  camp  use.  If 
you  have  been  living  a  sedentary  life,  ask  for  a  pair  of 
shoes  larger  than  you  ordinarily  wear. 


GENERAL  ADVICE  17 

9.  In  case  the  tendon  in  your  heel  becomes  tender, 
report  at  once  to  the  hospital  tent  and  get  it  strapped. 

A    DISCIPLINED    SOLDIER 

You  will  be  expected  to  become  quickly  amenable 
both  mentally  and  physically  to  discipline.  A  clear  con- 
ception on  your  part  of  what  drills  are  disciplinary  in 
character  and  what  discipline  really  is,  will  help  you  to 
become  a  disciplined  soldier.  Drills  executed  at  atten- 
tion are  disciplinary  exercises  and  are  designed  to  teach 
precise  and  soldierly  movements  and  to  inculcate  that 
prompt  and  subconscious  obedience  which  is  essential 
to  proper  military  control.  Hence,  all  corrections 
should  be  given  and  received  in  an  impersonal  manner. 
Never  forget  that  you  lose  your  identity  as  an  individ- 
ual when  you  step  into  ranks;  you  then  become  merely 
a  unit  of  a  mass.  As  soon  as  you  obey  properly, 
promptly,  and,  at  times,  unconsciously,  .the  commands  of 
your  officers,  as  soon  as  you  can  cheerfully  give  up  pleas- 
ures and  personal  privileges  that  conflict  with  the  new 
order  of  life  to  which  you  have  submitted,  you  will  then 
have  become  a  disciplined  man. 

DRESS 

The  uniform  you  will  wear  stands  for  Duty,  Honor, 
and  Country.  You  should  not  disgrace  it  by  the  way 
you  wear  it  or  by  your  conduct  any  more  than  you  would 
trample  the  flag  of  the  United  States  of  America  under 
foot.  You  must  constantly  bear  in  mind  that  in  our 
country  a  military  organization  is  too  often  judged  by 


18  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

the  acts  of  a  few  of  its  members.  When  one  or  two 
soldiers  in  uniform  conduct  themselves  in  an  ungentle- 
manly  or  unmilitary  manner  to  the  disgrace  of  the  uni- 
form, the  layman  shakes  his  head  and  condemns  all  men 
wearing  that  uniform.  Hence,  show  by  the  way  in 
which  you  wear  your  uniform  that  you  are  proud  of  it; 
this  can  be  best  accomplished  by  observing  the  following 
rules : 

1.  Carry  yourself  at  all  times  as  though  you  were 
proud  of  yourself,  your  uniform,  and  your  country. 

2.  Wear  your  hat  so  that  the  brim  is  parallel  to  the 
ground. 

3.  Have  all  buttons  fastened. 

4.  Never  have  sleeves  rolled  up. 

5.  Never  wear  sleeve  holders. 

6.  Never  leave  shirt  or  coat  unbuttoned  at  the  throat. 

7.  Have  leggins  and  trousers  properly  laced. 

8.  Keep  shoes  shined. 

9.  Always  be  clean  shaved. 

10.  Keep  head  up  and  shoulders  square. 

11.  Camp  life  has  a  tendency  to  make  one  careless  as 
to  personal  cleanliness.     Bear  this  in  mind. 

SALUTING 

The  military  salute  is  universal.  It  is  at  foundation 
but  a  courteous  recognition  between  two  individuals  of 
their  common  fellowship  in  the  same  honorable  profes- 
sion, the  profession  of  arms.  Regulations  require  that 
it  be  rendered  by  both  the  senior  and  the  junior,  as  bare 
courtesy  requires  between  gentlemen  in  civil  life.     It  is 


GENERAL  ADVICE  19 

the  military  equivalent  of  the  laymen's  expressions 
"Good  Morning,"  or  "How  do  you  do?"  Therefore  be 
punctilious  about  saluting;  be  proud  of  the  manner  in 
which  you  execute  your  salute,  and  make  it  indicative  of 
discipline  and  good  breeding.  Always  look  at  the  officer 
you  are  saluting.  The  junior  salutes  first.  It  is  very 
unmilitary  to  salute  with  the  left  hand  in  a  pocket,  or 
with  a  cigarette,  cigar,  or  pipe  in  the  mouth.  Observe 
the  following  general  rules : 

1.  Never  salute  an  officer  when  you  are  in  ranks. 

2.  Indoors  (in  your  tent)  unarmed,  do  not  salute  but 
stand  at  attention,  uncovered,  on  the  entrance  of  an 
officer.     If  he  speaks  to  you,  then  salute. 

3.  Indoors,  armed,  render  the  prescribed  salute,  i.e., 
the  rifle  salute  at  order  arms  or  at  trail. 

4.  Outdoors,  armed,  render  the  prescribed  salute,  i.e., 
the  rifle  salute  at  right  shoulder  arms. 

5.  Outdoors,  unarmed,  or  armed  with  side  arms,  salute 
with  the  right  hand. 

ARMY    SLANG 

The  following  army  slang  is  universally  employed: 

"Bunkie" — the  soldier  who  shares  the  shelter  half  or 
tent  of  a  comrade  in  the  field.  A  bunkie  looks  after  his 
comrade's  property  in  the  event  the  latter  is  absent. 

"Doughboy" — the  infantryman. 

"French  leave" — unauthorized  absence. 

"Holy  Joe" — the  chaplain. 

"K.O." — the  commanding  officer. 

"On  the  carpet" — a  call  before  the  commanding  offi- 
cer for  admonition. 


20  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

"Q.M." — quartermaster. 
"Rookie" — a  new  recruit. 

"Sand  rat" — a  soldier  on  duty  in  the  rifle  pit  during 
target  practice. 

"Top  sergeant" — the  first  sergeant. 

"Come  and  get  it" — the  meal  is  ready  to  be  served. 

HOW   TO    CLEAN   A  RIFLE   AND   BAYONET 

Get  a  rag  and  rub  the  heavy  grease  off ;  then  get  a  soft 
pine  stick,  pointed  at  one  end,  and  with  this  point  re- 
move the  grease  from  the  cracks,  crevices  and  corners. 
Clean  the  bore  from  the  breech.  When  the  heavy  grease 
has  been  removed,  the  metal  part  of  the  gun,  bore  in- 
cluded, should  be  covered  with  a  light  coating  of  "3-in-l" 
oil.  Heavy  grease  can  be  removed  from  the  rifle  by  rub- 
bing it  with  a  rag  which  has  been  saturated  with  gaso- 
line or  coal  oil. 

FRIENDS 

There  are  a  few  men  in  all  companies  who  play,  loaf, 
and  who  are  constantly  in  trouble.  As  the  good  men  in 
each  company  will  not  become  friendly  with  them,  they 
seek  their  acquaintances  among  the  new  men  on  whom 
they  have  a  baneful  influence.  We  wish  to  warn  you 
about  making  friends  too  quickly. 

FINAL    SUGGESTIONS 

Don't  be  profane  or  tell  questionable  stories  to  your 
bunkies  or  around  the  company.  There  is  a  much 
greater  number  of  silent  and  unprotesting  men  in  camp 
than  is  generally  supposed,  to  whom  this  is  offensive. 
Keep  everything  on  a  high  plane. 


CHAPTER  II  * 

Read  this  chapter  as  soon  as  you  decide  to  attend  a 

Camp. 

PHYSICAL  EXERCISE 

The  greatest  problem  you  will  have  to  solve  will  be 
that  of  making  your  body  do  the  work  required.  Every 
one  else  will  be  doing  exactly  what  you  are  doing,  and 
you  have  too  much  pride  to  want  to  take  even  a  shorter 
step  than  the  man  by  your  side.  Some  men  have  to 
leave  the  training  camps  because  they  are  not  in  the 
proper  physical  condition  to  go  on  with  the  work.  If 
this  chapter  is  taken  as  seriously  as  it  should  be,  it  will  be 
of  great  help  to  you. 

If  you  have  not  a  pair  of  sensible  marching  shoes 
(tan,  high-tops,  no  hooks  on  them)  get  a  pair.  These 
shoes  should  be  considerably  larger  than  a  pair  of  office 
shoes. 

Walk  to  and  from  your  business.  Take  every  op- 
portunity to  get  out  in  the  country  where  the  air  is 
pure.  Fill  your  lungs  full.  Get  into  the  habit  of 
taking  deep  breaths  now  and  then.  Don't  make  this  a 
task,  but  surround  it  with  pleasantries.  Get  some  de- 
lightful companion  to  walk  with  you.     Walk  vigorously. 

i  These    exercises    are    selected    from    those   commonly    given    by    Major 
H.  J.  Koehler,  United  States  Army. 

21 


22  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Let  down  on  your  smoking.  Better  to  leave  it  alone 
for  a  while.  You  will  enjoy  the  air.  Deep  breathing 
seems  to  be  more  natural. 

Make  it  a  work  for  your  country.  View  it  in  that 
light.  If  you  are  not  going  to  be  called  upon  to  un- 
dergo the  cruel  hardships  and  physical  strain  of  some 
campaigns,  your  son  will  be,  and  you  can  be  of  great 
help  to  him  by  being  fit  yourself.  You  and  your  sons 
will  form  the  backbone  of  America's  strength  in  her 
next  peril. 

You  will  have  a  great  deal  of  walking  after  you  arrive 
in  camp,  possibly  a  great  deal  more  than  you  have  ever 
had,  and  probably  a  great  deal  more  than  you  expect, 
even  with  this  word  of  warning.  If  you  have  failed 
to  provide  yourself  with  proper  shoes  and  socks,  great 
will  be  the  price  of  your  lack  of  forethought.  You  will 
wince  at  your  own  blisters.  You  will  get  no  sympathy 
from  any  one  else.  It  is  the  spirit  of  the  camp  for  each 
man  to  bear  his  own  burdens.  So  arrive  at  camp  with 
hardened  legs  and  broken  in  shoes.  Don't  buy  shoes 
with  pointed  or  narrow  toes.  They  should  be  broad 
and  airy. 

Immediately  after  you  arise  in  the  morning  and  just 
before  you  retire  at  night,  go  through  the  following 
exercises  for  two  or  three  minutes.  In  a  short  time  you 
may  want  to  make  it  more.  No  objection.  Give  it  a 
fair  trial.  Be  brisk  and  energetic.  Forget,  for  the 
time  being,  what  you  are  going  to  get  out  of  it.  Give 
and  then  give  more.     The  result  will  take  care  of  itself. 


PHYSICAL  EXERCISE 


23 


1st  Exercise 

Involving  practically  every  important  muscle  in  the 
body. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


From  first  position  spring  to  second  position ;  instantly  return 
to  first  position  and  continue. 

Be  light  on  your  feet.  Alight  on  your  toes.  Begin  with  a 
limited  number  of  times.  Day  by  day  increase  it  a  little  until  you 
reach  a  fair  number.  Be  most  moderate  at  first.  Never  allow 
yourself  in  any  exercise  to  become  greatly  fatigued. 


24 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


2d  Exercise 

To  reduce  waist,  strengthen  back  muscles,  and  be- 
come limber. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


Assume  position  No.  1. 

Swing  to  position  (No.  2),  return  at  once  to  No.  1,  and  continue. 
Shoot  your  head   and  arms   as   far  through   your  legs   as   your 
conformation  permits. 


PHYSICAL  EXERCISE 


25 


3rd  Exercise 
To  harden  leg  muscles  and  exercise  joints. 


h 


No.  1 


N>v  2 


From  position  No.  1  come  to  position  No.  2.  Return  at  once  to 
No.  1  and  continue. 

Toes  turned  well  out.  Body  and  head  erect.  Up  with  a  slight 
spring.  After  a  little  practice,  you  will  have  no  difficulty  with  this 
exercise  in  balancing  yourself. 


26 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


4th  Exercise 
To  exercise  arms  and  shoulders  and  organs  of  chest 
and  shoulder  muscles. 


Vary  by  thrusting 
arras  downward,  side- 
ward and  upward. 
Be  moderate  at  first. 
Grow  more  vigorous 
with  practice. 


From  position  No.  1  thrust 
arms  forward  to  position  No. 
2,  and  return  at  once  to  posi- 
tion No.  1. 


J* 


No.  2 


PHYSICAL  EXERCISE 

5th  Exercise 


27 


No.  1 


Go  up  on  your  toes  as  high 
as  you  can. 


To  strengthen  ankles  and 
insteps. 


From  position  No.  1  rise  on 
the  toes  to  position  No.  2,  re- 
turn at  once  to  position  No.  1, 
and  continue. 


t\ 


No.  2 


CHAPTER  III 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 

Based  on  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations 

Success  in  battle  is  the  ultimate  object  of  all  military 
training;  hence  the  excellence  of  an  organization  is 
judged  by  its  field  efficiency.  Your  instruction  will  be 
progressive  in  character,  and  will  have  as  its  ultimate 
purpose  the  creation  of  a  company  measuring  up  to  a 
high  standard  of  field  efficiency. 

The  Preparatory  Command,  such  as  Forward,  in- 
dicates the  movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  Command  of  Execution,  such  as  MARCH, 
HALT,  or  ARMS,  commences  the  execution  of  the 
movement. 

Preparatory  Commands  are  distinguished  by  bold 
face,  those  of  execution  by  capitals.  As,  1.  Forward, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  average  man  understands  better  and  learns  faster 
when  you  show  him  how  a  thing  is  done.  Don't  be 
content  with  telling  him  how.  Bear  this  in  mind  when 
you  become  an  instructor. 

On  account  of  the  absence  of  the  Regular  Army  on 
the  border,  it  was  not  practical  to  obtain  photographs 
of  regular  troops  with  which  to  illustrate  this  book. 
The  photographs  used  were  taken  under  the  direct 
supervision  of  the  authors. 

28 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


29 


POSITION  OF  A  SOLDIER  AT  ATTENTION 


No.  1  No.  2 

CORRECT  POSITION 


gaze 

play- 

Don't    turn 

making    an 


NO.       1.       Don't 
about.     That's     not 
ing  the  game, 
your    feet    out 
angle  of  100° 

No.  2.  Don't  slouch. 
Hold  yourself  up.  Keep 
your  eyes  off  the  ground. 


These  are  the  common 
errors  of  beginners. 


No.  1.  Eyes  to  the  front. 
Hands  hang  naturally.  Rest 
weight  of  body  equally  on 
feet.  Feet  turned  out  making 
angles  of  45°. 

No.  2.  Head  erect.  Shoul- 
ders down  and  back.  Chest 
out.  Stomach  up.  Thumb 
along  seams  of  trousers. 
Knees  straight,  not  stiff. 
Heels  on  line  and  together.  Do 
not  stiffen  the  fingers :  The 
mind  ought  also  to  be  at  atten- 
tion. 


No.  1  No.  2 

INCORRECT  POSITIONS 


30 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


No.  1  No.  2 

CORRECT  POSITION 


No.  1.  Not  looking  straight 
to  the  front.  Right  foot  not 
carried   straight   to    the    rear. 

No.  2.  Leaning  back  too 
far.  Right  foot  carried  back 
too  far. 


1.  Parade,     2.  REST. 

No.  1.  Clasp  hands  with- 
out constraint  in  front  of 
center  of  body.  Left  hand 
uppermost.  Fingers  joined. 
Thumb  and  fore  finger  right 
hand    clasps    the    left   thumb. 

No.  2.  Bend  left  knee 
slightly.  Right  foot  is  car- 
ried 6  inches  straight  to  the 
rear. 


No.  1  No.  2 

INCORRECT  POSITIONS 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


31 


1.  Hand,    2.  SALUTE. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


CORRECT  POSITION 

No.  1.     Look  toward  the  person  saluted. 

No.  2.  Tip  of  forefinger  right  hand  touches  cap  or  hat  above 
right  eye.  Thumb  and  forefingers  extended  and  joined.  Hand  and 
wrist  straight.     Palm  to  the  left. 


32 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


1.  Hand,     2.  SALUTE. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


No.  3 


INCORRECT  POSITIONS  OR  COMMON  ERRORS 

No.   1.     Palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front  and  fingers  not  joined. 

No.  2.     Arm  held  too  high.      Fingers  not  perfectly  joined. 

No.  3.  Fingers  not  extended  and  joined.  Left  hand  not  by 
side  while  salute  is  being  made. 

Some  beginners  forget,  while  saluting,  to  remove  their  pipes, 
cigarettes,  or  cigars  from  their  mouths.  This  proves  clearly  that 
they  are  beginners,  for  trained  and  experienced  men  are  careful 
about  military  honors  and  salutes. 


THE  RESTS 

Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands   are:     FALL  OUT;   REST;   AT 
EASE;  and,  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but  are 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


33 


required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume  their 
former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but  is 
not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place  and 
is  required  to  preserve  silence,  but  not  immobility. 

1.  Parade,  2.  REST.     Previously  explained. 

To  resume  the  attention:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION.  The 
men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

EYES  RIGHT  OR  LEFT 
1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT),  3.  FRONT. 


At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique,  eyes 
fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the 
same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the 
front.     Notice  the  right  tile  does  not  turn  the  eyes  to  the  right. 


34 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


FACINGS 
To  the  flank:     1.  Eight  (left),  2.  FACE. 


Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and 
right  toe;  face  to  the  right,  turning 
on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight 
pressure  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot; 
place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the 
right.  Left  face  is  executed  on  the 
left  heel  in  the  corresponding  man- 


ner. 


Right  (left)  Half  Face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45°. 

To  the  rear:     1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot-length  to  the 
rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  without  changing  the 
position  of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the  right 
on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  place  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of 
the  left.     There  is  no  left  about  face. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  35 

STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS 

All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the 
rate  of  120  steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches ; 
the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence 
of  the  step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left, 
right,  the  instant  the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively, 
should  be  planted. 

All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving 
march  are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be 
marching  in  double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the 
command;  in  the  latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the 
preparatory  command.  Example:  1.  Squad  right, 
double  time,  2.  MARCH  (School  of  the  Squad). 

QUICK  TIME 

Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time:  1. 
Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly 
straight  forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the 
ground,  and  plant  it  without  shock;  next,  in  like  man- 
ner, advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above;  con- 
tinue the  march.     The  arms  swing  naturally. 


36  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march 
in  double  time:     1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of 
the  body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march, 
raise  the  forearms,  fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion along  the  waist  line;  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the 
step  and  cadence  of  double  time,  allowing  a  natural 
swinging  motion  to  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march, 
given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in 
quick  time,  and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2. 
MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double 
time;  resume  the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by 
the  sides. 

TO  MARK  TIME 

Being  in  march:     1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up 
the  foot  in  rear  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately 
raising  each  foot  about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line 
with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and 
plant  the  feet  as  prescribed  above.  Common  errors 
are  to  raise  the  feet  several  inches  and  to  run  up  the 
cadence,  i.e.,  go  too  fast. 

1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  37 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in 
double  time. 

Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be 
executed  one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 
Any  step  less  than  the  full  step  (i.e.,  half  step,  right 
step,  or  backward)  is  apt  to  be  too  fast,  i.e.,  greater 
than  120  steps  a  minute. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time : 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

SIDE  STEP 

Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time :     1.  Right  (left)  step, 

2.  MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right: 
bring  the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement 
in  the  cadence  of  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is 
not  executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail 
without  command. 

BACK  STEP 

Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Backward,  2. 
MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is 
not  executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail 
without  command. 


38 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


TO  HALT 

To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1. 
Squad,  2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and 
place  the  first  foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double 
time,  drop  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO  MARCH  BY  THE  FLANK 
Being  in  march:     1.  By  the  right   (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 


The  command  march  must 
be  given  when  the  right 
foot  is  on  the  ground  as 
shown  in  No.  1.  Then  ad- 
vance and  plant  the  left  foot 
and  turn  on  the  toes  to  right 
as  shown  in  No.  2,  and  step 
off  with  the  right  foot. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  39 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR 
Being  in  march:     1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  inarch,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  turn  to  the  right  about 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 


The  turn  is  made  on  the  toes  as  shown. 

The  command  inarch  must  be  given  when 
the  right  foot  is  on  Lhe  ground.  The  left  foot 
is  then  advanced  to  the  position  shown. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right 
about,  taking  four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the 
cadence,  and  then  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 


CHANGE  STEP 

Being  in  march:     1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the 
toe  of  the  right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step 
off  with  the  left  foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed, 
the  command  march  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes 
the  ground. 


40 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


MANUAL  OF  ARMS 


To  acquire  proficiency  in  the  Manual  of  Arms,  you 
should  practice,  practice,  and  practice. 

Position  of  order  arms  standing,  i.e.,  the  position  of 
attention  under  arms. 


No.  1.  Arm  and  hands  hang 
naturally.  Right  hand  holding 
piece  between  thumb  and  fingers. 
Eutt  rests  evenly  on  ground.  Bar- 
rel to  the  rear. 

No.  2.  Toe  of  the  butt  on  a 
line  with  toe  of  and  touching  the 
right  shoe. 


No.  1  No.  2 

CORRECT  POSITION 


To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cautions: 
"By  the  Numbers";  all  movements,  divided  into  motions,  are  then 
executed  singly.  That  is  to  say,  make  one  motion  and  then  wait 
until  a  further  command  for  another.  This  is  for  the  purpose  of 
correcting  erroneous  positions  and  giving  detailed  instructions. 
We  are  explaining  the  manual  by  the  numbers. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


41 


Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Present, 
2.  ARMS.     It  takes  two  counts. 


At  command  arms,  with  the  right 
hand  carry  the  piece  in  front 
of  the  center  of  the  body.  Barrel 
to  the  rear  and  vertical.  Grasp  it 
with  left  hand  at  the  balance.  Left 
forearm  is  horizontal  and  rests 
against  body.  The  balance  of  the 
piece  is  approximately  the  position  of 
the  rear  sight. 


FIRST  POSITION  OF  PRESENT  ARMS  FROM  ORDER  ARMS 


At  command  two,  grasp  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand. 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  PRESENT  ARMS 


42 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


No.  1 


No.  2 


No.  3 


INCORRECT  POSITION  OF  PRESENT  ARMS 
These  are  the  common  errors  made  by  beginners. 


No.  1.     Thumb  along  barrel. 

No.  2.     Piece  held  too  low.     The  front  sight  will  be  a  little  above 
the  eyes  when  the  left  fore  arm  is  horizontal. 
No.  3.     Piece  not  vertical;  too  close  to  body. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


43 


Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Port,  2.  ARMS.     It  takes  one  count. 


' 

^C 

Ra 

W\ 

IF 

Wl 

M 

If 

v     * 

Ik 

1 

MB    i 

CORRECT  POSITION  OF  PORT  ARMS 


At  the  command  ARMS,  with  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the 
piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands; 
the  right,  palm  down,  at  the  small  of  stock ;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the 
balance;  barrel  up,  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 
junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder;  right  forearm  horizontal; 
left  forearm  resting  against  the  body.  The  rifle  is  held  in  a  verti- 
cal plane  parallel  to  the  front. 


44 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


In  executing  this  movement,  it  is  a  common  error  with  beginners 
to  raise  the  piece  as  though  it  weighed  much  more  than  it  does. 
No  part  of  the  body  should  move  except  the  arms,  in  coming  to 
"port  arms"  from  "order  arms." 


No.  1 


No.  2 


No.  3 


INCORRECT  POSITIONS  OF  PORT  ARMS 


No.   1.     Arms  held  away  from  side. 
No.  2.     Piece  held  too  low  and  too  close  to  body. 
No.  3.     Piece  held  too  high  and  not  in  a  vertical  plane  parallel 
to  the  body. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


45 


Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS.  It  is  executed  in 
one  count.  At  the  command  arms,  carry  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body  and  take  the  position  of  "port  arms." 

Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS.  It  is  executed  in 
one  count.  At  the  command  arms,  carry  the  piece  to  a  vertical 
position  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body  and  take  the  position 
of  present  arms. 

Being  at  present  or  port  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS.  It  is 
executed  in  two  counts. 


At  the  command  arms,  let 
go  with  the  right  hand;  lower 
and  carry  the  piece  to  the  right 
with  the  left  hand;  regrasp  it 
with  the  right  hand  just  above 
the  lower  band;  let  go  with  the 
left  hand  and  take  the  position 
shown  here,  which  is  the  next 
to  the  last  position  in  coming 
to  the  order.  The  left  hand 
should  be  above  and  near  the 
right,  steadying  the  gun,  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  forearm 
and  wrist  straight  and  inclined 
downward.  Barrel  to  the  rear. 
All  the  fingers  of  the  right 
hand  grasp  the  gun.  Butt 
about  3  inches  from  the  ground. 


NEXT  TO  THE  LAST  POSITION  OF  ORDER  ARMS 

Being  in  the  above  position,  at  the  command  Two,  lower  the 
piece  gently  to  the  ground  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  hand 
quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the  position  of  order  arms. 

The  common  errors  are  to  slam  the  gun  down  on  the  ground  and 
to  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side  in  a  slow  and  indifferent  manner. 


46 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


No.  1  No.  2  No.  3 

INCORRECT  POSITIONS 
Common  errors  in  the  next  to  the  last  position  of  order  arms. 


No.   1 .     Thumb  is  up.     Gun  too  far  from  the  ground. 

No.  2.  Gun  too  near  to  ground.  Thumb  is  up.  Butt  of  gun 
too  far  to  the  right. 

No.   3.     Gun  held  too  high  and  too  far  away  from  body. 

Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS.  It  is  exe- 
cuted in  three  counts. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


47 


At  the  command  arms,  with 
the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the 
piece  diagonally  across  the  body; 
carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to 
the  butt,  and  at  the  same  time  grasp 
the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers 
as  shown.  Note  the  position  of  the 
first  two  fingers  of  right  hand. 

THE  FIRST  POSITION  OF  RIGHT 

SHOULDER    ARMS    FROM 

THE  ORDER 


At  the  command  two,  with- 
out changing  the  grasp  of  the 
right  hand,  place  the  piece  on 
the  right  shoulder,  right  elbow 
near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a 
vertical  plane  perpendicular  to 
the  front;  carry  the  left  hand, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the 
stock,  wrist  straight  and  elbow 
down.  Barrel  up,  and  inclined 
at  an  angle  of  about  45°  from 
the  horizontal.  Trigger  guard 
in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder, 
tip  of  forefinger  touching  the 
cocking  piece.  Right  fore  arm 
horizontal. 

NEXT  TO  THE  LAST  POSITION  OF  RIGHT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


48 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


No.  1 


No.  2 


No.  3 


COMMON  ERRORS  IN  THE  NEXT  TO  THE  LAST  POSITION 
OF  RIGHT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


No.  1.  Right  arm  not  by  side.  Left  arm  too  high.  Remember 
that  the  left  arm  rests  on  the  chest.  This  is  very  commonly  con- 
fused with  rifle  salute. 

No.  2.     Thumb  is  up.     Butt  of  rifle  carried  to  the  right. 

No.  3.  Trigger  guard  not  against  shoulder.  Butt  held  too  low. 
Hand  not  straight. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


49 


At  the  command  three, 
drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  RIGHT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


No.  1.  Right  arm 
not  by  side.  Right 
forearm  not  horizon- 
tal. 

No.  2.  Heel  of  gun 
too  far  to  left. 

No  3.   Trigger  guaid 

not    against    shoulder. 
Butt  held  too  low. 


..—  *r 


M       /*«* 


No.  1  No.  2  No.  3 

INCORRECT  POSITION  OF  RIGHT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


50 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Being  at  right  shoulder 
Arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS.  It 
is  executed  in  3  counts. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly 
and  throw  the  gun  diagonally 
across  the  body,  to  the  position 
shown  here. 

At  the  command  two, 
lower  the  gun  and  assume  the 
next  to  the  last  position  of 
order  arms.  At  the  command 
three,  come  to  the  order  arms. 

The  common  errors  in  this 
movement  are  to  move  the  head 
to  the  left  and  to  throw  the  gun 
too  far  to  the  front. 


Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
It  is  executed  in  three  counts. 

At  the  command  arms,  change  the  right  hand  to  the 
butt. 

At  the  command  two  and  three,  come  to  the  right 
shoulder  as  from  order  arms. 

Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 
It  is  executed  in  two  counts. 

At  the  command  arms,  press  the  butt  down  quickly 
and  throw  the  piece  to  the  diagonal  position  across  the 
body  with  the  left  hand  grasping  it  at  the  balance;  the 
right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 

At  the  command  two,  change  the  right  hand  to  the 
small  of  the  stock. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


51 


Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Present,  2. 
ARMS.      It  is  executed  in  three  counts. 

At  the  command  arms,  execute  port  arms.  (This 
requires  two  counts.)  At  the  command  three,  execute 
present  arms. 

Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2. 
ARMS.     It  is  executed  in  four  counts. 

At  the  command  arms,  execute  port  arms.  At  the 
command  two,  three,  four,  execute  right  shoulder  arms 
as  from  port  arms. 

Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS.  It  is  exe- 
cuted in  two  counts. 


THE  NEXT  TO  THE  LAST  POSITION  OF  THE  LEFT 
SHOULDER  ARMS 


52 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


At  the  command  ABMS,  carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and 
place  it  on  the  left  shoulder ;  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with 
the  left  hand,  heel  between  first  and  second  fingers.  Thumb  and 
fingers  of  right  hand  closed  on  the  stock.  Barrel  up,  trigger  guard 
in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder. 


No.  1 


No.  3 


COMMON  ERRORS  IN  THE  NEXT  TO  THE  LAST  POSITION 
OF  LEFT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


No.  1.     Right  arm  too  high.     Butt  too  high. 
No.  2.     Butt  too  close  to  center  of  body.     Not  grasping  gun 
correctly  with  fingers  of  left  hand. 

No.  3.     Right  arm  too  high.     Butt  too  high. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


53 


At  the  command  two, 
drop  the  right  hand  by 
the  side. 


THE  CORRECT  POSITION  OF  LEFT  SHOULDER  ARMS 


The  incorrect  positions  are 
usually  the  same  as  are  found  in 
the  right  shoulder  arms,  and  as 
illustrated  here. 


54 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 
It  is  executed  in  two  counts. 

At  the  command  arms,  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

At  the  command  two,  carry  the  piece,  with  the  right 
hand  to  the  position  of  port  arms,  regrasp  it  with  the 
left. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  com- 
mand arms,  execute  port  arms  and  continue  to  the 
position  ordered. 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Parade,   2.  REST.      It  is  executed  in 
one  count. 


At  the  command  rest, 
carry  muzzle  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  body,  barrel 
to  the  left.  Grasp  piece 
with  the  left  hand  just  be- 
low the  stacking  swivel,  and 
with  the  right  hand  below 
and  against  the  left.  Left 
knee  slightly  bent.  Carry 
the  right  foot  6  inches 
straight  to  the   rear. 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  PARADE  REST 

Being  at  parade  rest:     1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 
Executed  in  one  count. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


55 


At  the  command  attention  (it  is  a  custom  of  the 
service  to  execute  the  movement  at  the  last  syllable  of 
the  command),  resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting 
the  piece  opposite  the  right  hip. 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Trail,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  command  arms,  raise  the  piece,  right  arm  slightly  bent, 
and  incline  the  muzzle  forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  an  angle 
of  about  30°  with  the  vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience  to  others, 
the  piece  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle  lowered 
until  the  piece  is  horizontal;  a  similar  position  in  the  left  hand 
may  be  used. 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  TRAIL  ARMS 


Being  at  trail  arms:     1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 
At  the  command  arms,  lower  the  gun  with  the  right 
hand  and  resume  the  order. 

Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:     1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE.     It  is  exe- 
cuted in  two  counts. 


56 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


At  the  command 
salute,  carry  the  left 
hand  smartly  to  the 
small  of  the  stock,  fore- 
arm horizontal,  palm  of 
hand  down,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  • 
joined,  forefinger  touch- 
ing end  of  cocking  piece. 
Look  toward  the  person 
saluted,  At  the  com- 
mand two,  drop  the  hand 
by  the  side ;  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the 
front. 


-         r""~ 


THE  CORRECT  POSITION  OF 
RIFLE  SALUTE,  BEING  AT 
RIGHT    SHOULDER    ARMS. 


No.  1.  Left  elbow  too  low. 
Forearm  should  be  horizontal. 

No.  2.  Left  elbow  too  high. 
Fingers  not  extended  and  joined. 


COMMON  ERRORS  IN  RIFLE 
SALUTE  AT  RIGHT  SHOUL- 
DER ARMS. 


No.  1 


No.  2 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


57 


Being  at  order  or  trail 
arms:     1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 

At  the  command  salute, 
carry  the  left  hand  smartly 
to  the  right  side,  palm  of 
the  hand  down,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined, 
forefinger  against  piece  near 
the  muzzle;  look  toward  the 
person  saluted.  At  the  com- 
mand two,  drop  the  left 
hand  by  the  side;  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 


RIFLE  SALUTE  BEING  AT  ORDER  ARMS 


No.  1.     Fingers    not    extended 
and  joined. 

No.  2.     Fingers      not     joined 
Gun  held  too  high. 


COMMON  ERRORS  IN  RIFLE  SA- 
LUTE AT  ORDER  OR  TRAIL 
ARMS 


58  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Fix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  execute 
parade  rest;  grasp  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand, 
back  of  hand  toward  the  body;  draw  the  bayonet  from 
the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the 
muzzle ;  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  is  carried  on  the  haversack:  draw  the 
bayonet  with  the  left  hand  and  fix  it  in  the  most  con- 
venient manner. 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Unfix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Ex- 
ecute parade  rest ;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly 
with  the  right  hand,  pressing  the  spring  with  the  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand;  raise  the  bayonet  until  the 
handle  is  about  12  inches  above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece; 
drop  the  point  to  the  left,  back  of  the  hand  toward  the 
body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return  the  bayonet, 
the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body;  re- 
grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack: 
Take  the  bayonet  from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and 
return  it  to  the  scabbard  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and 
unfixed  in  the  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner 
and  the  piece  returned  to  the  original  position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness 
and  regularity  but  not  in  cadence. 

Exercises  for  instruction  in  bayonet  combat  are  pre- 
scribed in  the  Manual  for  Bayonet  Exercise. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  59 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 


At  the  command  arms, 
take  the  position  of  port 
arms;  at  the  command 
two,  seize  the  bolt  handle 
with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand, 
turn  the  handle  up,  draw 
the  bolt  back,  and  glance  at 
the  chamber.  Having  found 
the  chamber  empty,  or  hav- 
ing emptied  it,  raise  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 
Keep  your  right  hand  on  the 
bolt. 


INSPECTION  ARMS 


It  is  a  very  common  error  to  change  the  position  of  the  piece 
while  drawing  the  bolt  back.     Guard  against  this. 

Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order  (or  right 
shoulder,  or  port) ,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command  (i.e.,  at  the  command 
order),  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the  handle  down, 
pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At  the  com- 
mand arms,  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO  DISMISS  THE  SQUAD 

Being  at  a  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port, 
4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 


60  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Make  a  point  of  becoming  sufficiently  familiar  with 
the  different  parts  of  the  rifle  to  obey  the  following 
general  rules  governing  the  manual. 

The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece : 

First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in 
either  the  chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  spe- 
cifically ordered.  When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be 
loaded,  it  is  habitually  carried  locked;  that  is,  with  the 
safety  loch  turned  to  the  "safe."  At  all  other  times  it 
is  carried  unlocked  with  the  trigger  pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms, 
pieces  are  immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  1. 
Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Order  (right  shoulder, 
port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dis- 
missal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine 
they  are  removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "off"  except  when 
cartridges  are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet 
exercise,  on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order 
arms.  Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  with- 
out arms.  On  resuming  attention  the  position  of  order 
arms  is  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed, 
the  piece  is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  com- 
mand march,  the  three  motions  corresponding  with  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER  61 

first  three  steps.  Movements  may  be  executed  at  the 
trail  by  prefacing  the  preparatory  command  with  the 
words  at  trail;  as,  1.  At  trail,  forward,  2.  MARCH; 
the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks, 
taking  interval  or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  exe- 
cuted from  the  order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in 
motion  and  resume  the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halt- 
ing. The  execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt 
is  completed. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held 
as  when  without  arms. 

The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the 
manual  of  arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance 
(center  of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed)  the  thumb  clasps 
the  piece ;  the  sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece,  "diagonally 
across  the  body"  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm  and 
hand  are  the  same  as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in 
the  manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with 
the  butt  of  the  piece  about  3  inches  from  the  ground, 
barrel  to  the  rear,  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the 
right,  steadying  the  piece,  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  inclining  downward,  all 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the  piece.  To  com- 
plete the  order,  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground 


62  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

with  the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side, 
and  take  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Allowing  the  piece  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to 
the  ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce 
effect  in  executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick 
time;  the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole 
attention  to  the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being 
gradually  acquired  as  they  become  accustomed  to  hand- 
ling their  pieces.  The  instructor  may  require  them  to 
count  aloud  in  cadence  with  the  motions. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  move- 
ments are,  for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into 
motions  and  executed  in  detail;  in  this  case  the  com- 
mand of  execution  determines  the  prompt  execution  of 
the  first  motion,  and  the  commands,  two,  three,  four, 
that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor 
first  cautions :  By  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided 
into  motions  are  then  executed  as  above  explained  until 
he  cautions:  Without  the  numbers;  or  commands 
movements  other  than  those  in  the  manual  of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular 
positions  of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be 
ordered  without  regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the 
piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue 
the  rifle  may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 


CHAPTER  IV 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD 

Based  on  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations 

CLOSE    ORDER   DRILLS 

For  several  days  after  reporting  you  will  undergo 
many  hours  of  close  order  drill.  You  will  ask  yourself, 
"Why  is  all  this  mental  and  physical  strain  necessary 
when  these  exercises  are  not  used  in  battle?"  The 
answer  is:  they  are  disciplinary  exercises  and  are  de- 
signed to  inculcate  that  prompt  and  subconscious 
obedience  which  is  essential  to  proper  military  control 
and  to  teach  you  precise  and  soldierly  movements; 
hence,  they  are  executed  at  attention. 

DEFINITIONS 

Deploy.  To  extend  the  front.  A  squad  deploys 
when  it  goes  "As  skirmishers."  A  company  likewise  de- 
ploys when  it  goes  from  column  into  line. 

File.  Two  men,  the  front  rank  man  and  the  cor- 
responding man  in  the  rear  rank.  The  front  rank  man 
is  the  file  leader.  A  file  which  has  no  rear  rank  man  is 
a  blank  file. 

Interval.  Space  between  elements  of  the  same  line. 
The  interval  between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches  and  is 
measured  from  elbow  to  elbow.  It  is  to  get  this  in- 
terval that  each  man  is  required  to  raise  his  arm  when 
the  company  is  formed. 

63 


64  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Distance.  Space  between  elements  in  the  direction 
of  depth.  It  is  measured  from  the  back  of  the  man  in 
front  to  the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear.  The  rear  rank 
when  in  line  or  column  is  40  inches  from  the  front  rank. 

The  guide  of  a  squad  in  line  is  right  unless  otherwise 
announced. 

The  guide  of  a  squad  deployed,  (i.e.,  skirmishers)  is 
center  unless  otherwise  announced. 

TO   FORM    THE    SQUAD 

To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself  3 
paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  and  com- 
mands:   Fall  in. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  pieces  at  the  order, 
and  are  arranged  by  the  corporal  in  double  rank,  as 
nearly  as  practicable  in  order  of  height  from  right  to 
left,  each  man  dropping  his  left  hand  as  soon  as  the 
man  on  his  left  has  his  interval.  The  rear  rank  forms 
with  distance  of  40  inches. 

The  instructor  then  commands:     Count  off. 

At  this  command  all  except  the  right  file  execute  eyes 
right,  and  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank 

count  one,  two,  three,  four one,  two,  three,  Jour;  each 

man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  as  he  counts. 

Pieces  are  then  inspected. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD 


65 


The  purpose  of  putting  the  left  hand  on  the  hip  is  to 
get  enough  elbow  room.  A  man  should  have  sufficient 
space  to  operate  his  piece.  These  four-inch  intervals 
give  it  to  him. 


PDDD  %vn% 


4,0 


Front 
Rank 


1 


Note  the  space  between 
elbows  (interval)  is  4  inches. 
The  space  between  the  front 
and  rear  rank  (distance)  is  40 
inches,  and  is  measured  from 
the  back  of  the  man  in  front  to 
the  breast  of  the  man  in  the 
rear. 


66 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


ALIGNMENTS 

To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having  been 
established:     1.  Right  (left),  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress,  all  men  place  the  left  hand 
upon  the  hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ; 
each  man,  except  the  base  file,  when  on  or  near  the  new 
lines  executes  eyes  right,  and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3 
inches,  places  himself  so  that  his  right  arm  rests  lightly 
against  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his  right  (vice  versa  in 
left  dressing) ,  and  so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in 
line  with  those  of  the  men  on  his  right,  and  also  that  each 
man  can  see  the  eyes  of  at  least  two  men  on  his  right. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks 
from  the  right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back  such  men 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  67 

as  may  be  in  the  rear,  or  in  advance,  of  the  line;  only 
the  men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are 
aligned,  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
and  drops  his  left  hand  by  his  side. 

There  are  in  dressing  a  number  of  common  errors 
that  we  should  try  to  avoid.  Don't  jab  the  man  on 
your  left  with  your  elbow.  If  you  are  not  on  the  line, 
move  your  feet.  Don't  lean  forward  or  backward. 
Be  sure  to  touch  gently  the  man  on  your  right  with 
your  right  arm.  Be  certain  to  keep  your  left  elbow 
forced  well  to  the  front.  This  is  a  little  uncomfortable 
at  first,  but  unless  we  do  this  our  arms  will  not  measure 
the  4  inches  correctly.  Don't  hump  up  the  left 
shoulder,  and  don't  turn  the  shoulders  to  the  right. 
Keep  fingers  of  left  hand  extended  and  joined. 

We  want  to  place  especial  stress  on  the  importance 
of  three  movements  in  the  school  of  the  squad.  When 
you  have  thoroughly  mastered  these  three,  you  will  have 
a  splendid  basis  for  the  remainder  of  the  School  of  the 
Squad,  the  full  value  of  which  you  will  later  appreciate. 
These  are:  Squad  right,  Squad  right  about,  and  Right 
turn. 

The  first  line  drawing  in  this  chapter  shows  correct 
proportions  of  interval  and  distance.  To  save  space 
and  for  convenience,  the  drawings  hereafter  are  made 
without  regard  to  proportions  (intervals  and  distances). 


68  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

First  Movement 
squad  right 

Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  1.  Squad  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH. 

In  this  movement  many  instructors  have  recruit 
squads'  step  off  on  the  7th  count.  When  the  drill  pro- 
gresses the  squad  should  step  off  on  the  5th  count. 

At    the    command 
0 S 0 0** «  march,  No.  1  in  the 

what  we  1 

'EE3    Q         E3  E3  E3  Kl  ^^     front  rank   faces  to 

2E    0  '    2 13    *  the  right  in  march- 

5H    0  mS  an(l  marks  time; 

*[3    0  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of 

7J/5  /5  i^/7«/  the  front  rank  turn 

we  want 

45  degrees  to  the 
right  (right  oblique),  place  themselves  abreast  (on  the 
same  line)  of  No.  1  and  mark  time. 

Now  it  is  difficult  quickly  to  understand  the  move- 
ments of  the  rear  rank. 
Give  them  a  lot  of  study  r  i  r  n  r  ~i  r  n 

and    don't    go    on    until  rhish+be 

you  are  certain  that  you 
understand. 

No.   3  moves   straight 
to  the  front.  3«-|E 

No.  2  follows  No.  3. 

No.  1  follows  No.  2. 

When  they  (Nos.  3,  2  and  1)  arrive  in  rear  of  their 


•BS3 


K71    kj2| 


way  //  /5 
T^Aefone. 


/ 
/ 


■  2 


/ 


,£pra 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  69 

file  leaders,  (Nos.  3,  2  and  1,  front  rank)  they  face  to 
the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time. 

No.  4  of  the  rear  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front 
four  paces,  and  places  himself  abreast  of  No.  3,  rear 
rank. 

When  No.  4,  front  rank,  and  No.  4,  rear  rank,  are 
on  the  line,  (and  the  remainder  of  the  squad  must 
glance  toward  them  to  see  when  that  is  true) ,  the  whole 
squad  moves  forward  without  further  command. 

Note  that  we  have  said  that  No.  1  front  rank  marks 
time.  We  see  that  he  becomes,  temporarily,  an  im- 
movable pivot  for  his  squad.  We,  therefore,  call  him 
a  fixed  pivot. 

Had  the  command  been  squad  left,  instead  of  squad 
right,  No.  4  would  have  been  the  fixed  pivot  instead  of 
No.  1. 

Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding 
case  except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line, 
mark  time  until  the  command  halt  is  given,  when  all 
halt. 

Whenever  the  third  command  (i.e.,  squad)  is  given 
it  means  that  the  command  halt  is  to  follow.  This  is 
a  caution  to  the  squad  to  prepare  to  halt.  The  com- 
mand halt  should  be  given  as  No.  4  arrives  on  the  line. 


70 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Second  Movement 
squad  right  about 

Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  march:     1.  Squad 
right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 


I 


□      □      □ 


This  is 
what 
we  want 


IS) 

2 


El 
/ 


D      □      □      □ 


2i 3 


77? /s  /s 
kve  have 


At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  twice  exe- 
cutes Squad  right,  initiating  (starting)  the  second 
Squad  right  when  No.  4  has  arrived  on  the  line.  That 
much  is  very  simple. 

The  rear  rank  has  a  harder  task.  Let  us  have  the 
front  and  rear  rank  execute  the  movement  separately: 


t 


n  ->~EKv  □    □ 


4    •• 


Rear 
Rank 


Rank    E3  E3 


.-ft.. 


A  _3_ 

■-E3: E3~- 


2  I 

IEI     El 


"Q B <- 


.4 


The  rear  rank  is  to  take  its  place  on  the  dotted  line 
a  b. 

No.  3  rear  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front  until  in 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  71 

prolongation  of  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  rear  rank. 

No.  2  follows  No.  3. 

No.  1  follows  No.  2. 

When  No.  3  arrives  on  the  line  to  be  occupied  by 
the  rear  rank  he  changes  direction  to  the  right;  he 
moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear  of  No.  3,  front 
rank,  when  Nos.  3,  2,  and  1,  rear  rank,  are  in  rear  of 
Nos.  3,  2,  and  1,  front  rank,  (i.e.,  when  they  are  in  rear 
of  their  front  rank  men),  they  face  to  the  right  in 
marching  and  mark  time.  No.  4  marches  on  the  left 
of  No.  3  to  his  new  position.  As  he  arrives  on  the  line, 
both  ranks  execute  forward  march  without  command. 
For  the  remainder  of  the  squad  to  know  when  No.  4 
front  and  rear  rank  have  arrived  on  the  line,  they 
glance  to  see.  The  squad  should  step  off  on  the  9th 
count. 

Third  Movement 

right  turn 
Being  in  line:     1.  Right  (left)  turn,  2.  MARCH. 

Before 

BHHBEI 

jgl-OD '/ 

*E-EI '' 

THIS  IS  THE  WAY  IT  IS  DONE 

At  the  command  march,  No.  1  front  rank  faces  to 
the  right  in  marching  and  takes  the  half  step.     Nos.  2, 


72  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

3,  and  4  front  rank  right  oblique  (turn  45  degrees  to 
the  right)  until  opposite  their  places  in  line,  then  exe- 
cute a  second  right  oblique  and  take  the  half  step  on 
arriving  abreast  of  the  pivot  man.  When  No.  4  ar- 
rives on  the  line  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  take  the  full  step 
without  further  command.  (To  know  when  No.  4 
arrives  on  the  line  it  is  necessary  to  glance  in  his  di- 
rection.)     Full  step  on  the  7th  count. 

The  rear  rank  executes  the  movement  in  the  same 
way  and  turns  on  the  same  ground  as  the  front  rank. 
The  rear  rank,  therefore,  moves  forward  at  the  com- 
mand march,  or  continues  to  move  forward,  if  already 
marching,  until  it  arrives  at  the  place  where  the  front 
turned,  when  it  turns. 

Note  that  the  squad  turns  on  No.  1  front  rank  but 
that  he  does  not  remain  in  his  position  even  temporarily, 
as  in  squad  right;  he  is,  therefore,  called  the  moving 
pivot.     No.  4  is  called  the  marching  flank. 

Had  the  command  been  left  turn,  No.  4  would  have 
been  the  moving  pivot,  and  No.  1  the  marching  flank. 

Knowing  the  three  above  movements,  we  are  pre- 
pared for  the  following: 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Take  interval,  2.  To 
the  right  (left),  3.  MARCH,  4.  Squad,  5.  HALT. 


I    Z    3    4- 

BEING  IN  THIS  FORMATION 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  73 

At  the  command  to  the  right  (left),  the  rear  rank 
men  march  backward  four  steps  (15  inches  each  step) 
and  halt. 

LIKE  THIS 

Note  that  the  ac- 

0I@@  tual    distance    from 

Rear  rank  4-  the  front  rank  to  the 

hafP<*es+*0^  from^ront      rear  rank  is  now  40 

l/j  A  c?j  c£i  plus      4x15      inches, 

§  §  §  §  i-e.,  100  inches. 

/       2      3     4- 

At  the  command  march,  all  face  to  the  right  and 
No.  1  front  and  rear  rank  step  off.  No.  2,  front  and 
rear  rank,  follow  No.  1,  front  and  rear  rank,  at  a  dis- 
tance of  four  paces.     Likewise  with  the  other  numbers. 

q    □  m  m  0 

Like  this,  when  No.  1  front 
and  rear  rank  have  gained  four 
paces  distance. 

JS      £3  IHI  EI  E3 

/  2      3     4- 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  No.  3  is  three  paces 
distant  from  No.  4,  all  halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

D  □  □  □ 

The  squad  looks  like 
this    when    the    move-      /If    /nferVa/s 
ment  is  completed. 

13         H         EH         El 

I  E  3  4- 


74  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Being  at  intervals:  1.  Assemble,  to  the  right, 
(left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  No.  1  front  rank  stands 
fast.  No.  1  rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches.  The  other 
men  face  to  the  right,  close  by  the  shortest  line,  and 
face  to  the  front. 


n  n  n  n 

«--»  i-J  J-J  JLJ 


a  ^ 


DD 


^ 


/  2  3  4- 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Take  distance,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  No.  1  of  the  front  rank 
moves  straight  to  the  front;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the 
front  rank  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  rear  rank,  in 
the  order  named,  move  straight  to  the  front,  each 
stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man  at  four 
paces.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their 
distances. 

In  case  more  than  one  squad  is  in  line,  each  squad 
executes  the  movement  as  above.  The  guide  of  each 
rank  of  numbers  is  right. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD 


75 


In  line 


pi  n  pi  n  > 

*U   HA   KA  KA 

*]*  tan  «|^  *  * 


idi 


/tp  i 

/7f  distances    I    I 

i 


I    I 


4B 


!4 


'(3 


/El 

The  front  rank  men  should  walk  straight  to  the  front 
and  their  rear  rank  men  should  cover  them  accurately. 

Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  As- 
semble, 2.  MARCH. 

No.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast;  the  other  num- 
bers move  forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 


76  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

THE   OBLIQUE   MARCH 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being  in 
column  or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the 
squad  to  face  half  right  (or  half  left),  points  out  to 
the  men  their  relative  positions,  and  explains  that  these 
are  to  be  maintained  in  the  oblique  march. 

1.  Right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45  degrees  to  the 
right  of  his  original  front.  He  preserves  his  relative 
position,  keeping  his  shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the 
guide  (the  man  on  the  right  front  of  the  line  or 
column),  and  so  regulates  his  steps  that  the  ranks  re- 
main parallel  to  their  original  front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  men  halt  faced  to  the 
front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  1.  Forward,  2. 
MARCH. 

n  n  n  n 


V 

n 

LJ 

/ 

w 

r  n  n 

l  j  l  J 

Y 

LJ 

n 

4- 

PPPP 

♦ 

fiPPP 

A 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  77 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then 
move  straight  to  the  front. 

If  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the 
oblique  march  is  resumed  by  the  commands:  1.  Ob- 
lique, 2.  MARCH. 

TO    FOLLOW    THE    CORPORAL 

Being  assembled  or  deployed,  to  march  the  squad 
without  unnecessary  commands,  the  corporal  places 
himself  in  front  of  it  and  commands:     FOLLOW  ME. 

If  in  line  or  skirmish  line,  No.  2  of  the  front  rank 
follows  in  the  track  of  the  corporal  at  about  3  paces; 
the  other  men  conform  to  the  movements  of  No.  2, 
guiding  on  him  and  maintaining  their  relative  positions. 

If  in  column,  the  head  of  the  column  follows  the  cor- 
poral. 

nnn:i 

/        2       3 

3  Paces / 

1    / 

i 

Corpora/ 

Note  that  No.  4  rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  the  cor- 
poral when  the  corporal  is  in  front  of  the  squad.  This 
is  a  general  rule.  When  any  front  rank  man  is  absent 
his  rear  rank  man  steps  up  in  the  front  rank.     When 


78  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

the  squad  is  following  the  corporal  No.  4  rear  rank  re- 
mains blank  (i.e.,  No.  3  does  not  step  to  the  left  and 
cover  No.  4). 

TO   DEPLOY   AS   SKIRMISHERS 

Being  in  any  formation,  assembled:  1.  As  skir- 
.  mishers,  2.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad,  if 
not  already  there.  Moving  at  a  run,  the  men  place 
themselves  abreast  of  the  corporal  at  half-pace  intervals. 
Nos.  1  and  2  on  his  right,  Nos.  3  and  4  on  his  left,  rear- 
rank  men  on  the  right  of  their  file  leaders,  extra  men 
on  the  left  of  No.  4;  all  then  conform  to  the  corporal's 
gait. 

There  is  a  rule  of  thumb  that  must  be  remembered. 
The  rear-rank  man  is  always  on  the  right  of  his  file 
leader. 

A  common  error  is  for  beginners  to  execute  the 
movement  at  a  slow  trot  when  a  run  is  required. 

When  the  squad  is  acting  alone,  skirmish  line  is  simi- 
larly formed  on  No.  2  of  the  front  rank,  who  stands 
fast  or  continues  the  march,  as  the  case  may  be;  the 
corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad  when 
advancing  and  in  rear  when  halted. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  men  march  at 
ease,  pieces  at  the  trail  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

The  corporal  is  the  guide  when  in  the  line;  otherwise 
No.  2  front  rank  is  the  guide.     The  guide  is  center. 

The  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  is  one-half 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  79 

pace,  resulting  practically  in  one  man  per  yard  of  front. 
The  front  of  a  squad  thus  deployed  as  skirmishers  is 
about  10  paces. 


.NO.      1 

RR 


No.  1    No.  2   No.  2   Cpl.    No.  3   No.  3 
VR  RR     FR  RR     FR 

SQUAD  DEPLOYED  ON  CORPORAL 


No.  4> 
RR 


/ 


i — i  n  n 

I I    LJ    LJ 

*7      ^2        +3- 

/      i^k  K^j  iAi  i i 

,4'  r 


/?55emb/ed  in  f/ne 


/ 


/ 


/  / 

/  / 


/ 


n 

/ 


/ 


n 

2 


•I   J\\ 
i 
I 

n 


\ 

\ 
\     \ 


]  Deployed  /n  //r?e 

2    Corporal  3        3        4- 
-/O  Paces  > 

THIS  IS  THE  WAY  IT  IS  DONE 


The  common  error  is  to  keep  an  interval  of  a  very 
few  inches  when  15  inches  are  required. 

TO   INCREASE   OR  DIMINISH   INTERVALS 

If  assembled,  and  it  is  desired  to  deploy  at  greater 
than  the  normal  interval;  or  if  deployed,  and  it  is  de- 
sired to  increase  or  decrease  the  interval:  1.  As 
skirmishers*  (so  many)  paces,  2.  MARCH. 


80  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL, 

Intervals  are  taken  at  the  indicated  number  of  paces. 
If  already  deployed,  the  men  move  by  the  flank  or  away 
from  the  guide. 

The  above  command  is  used  but  verv  little. 


THE   ASSEMBLY 

Being  deployed:     1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their 
proper  places. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move 
in  double  time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

The  assembly  while  marching  to  the  rear  is  not  exe- 
cuted. 

Note.  It  will  be  better  for  the  beginner  to  let  the  remainder 
of  this  chapter  go  for  awhile.  Your  instructor  will  explain  all  of 
the  following  points  in  a  way  that  will  be  easier  for  you  than  for 
you  to  try  to  work  them  out  alone.  They  will  come  up  in  the  first 
month's  work  and  will  be  explained  and  shown  as  you  go  along.  As 
you  become  more  proficient  we  advise  you,  then,  to  take  up  the  re- 
mainder of  the  chapter. 

If  standing:    KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right;  carry  the  right  toe  about  1 
foot  to  the  left  rear  of  the  left  heel;  kneel  on  the  right 
knee,  sitting  as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  right  heel;  left 
forearm  across  left  thigh;  piece  remains  in  position  of 
order  arms,  right  hand  grasping  it  above  the  lower  hand. 

If  standing  or  kneeling:     LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee  against  left  heel;  carry 
back  the  left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  81 

about  35  degrees  to  the  right;  piece  horizontal,  barrel 
up,  muzzle  off  the  ground  and  pointed  to  the  front; 
elbows  on  the  ground;  left  hand  at  the  balance,  right 
hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  opposite  the  neck. 
This  is  the  position  of  order  arms,  lying  down. 

If  kneeling  or  lying  down:     RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the 
ground  marked  by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  body  on  both  knees;  stand  up, 
faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

If  lying  down:     KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  take  the  position  of 
kneel. 

In  double  rank,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying 
down  are  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization 
of  cover. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may 
be  taken  in  lieu  of  the  kneeling  position. 

LOADINGS  AND   FIRINGS 

The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  fir- 
ings are  always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  tying  down  in  double  rank,  the 
rear  rank  does  not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  com- 
mand for  loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

Pieces,  having  been  ordered  loaded,  are  kept  loaded 


82  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

without  command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspec- 
tion arms,  fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine 
is  exhausted. 

The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight 
setting.  Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command 
for  firing,  but  may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears 
suddenly  and  is  unmistakable;  in  such  case  battle  sight 
is  used  if  no  sight  setting  is  announced. 

The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated 
and  the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or 
announcement  need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of 
either  or  both  is  necessary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the 
aiming  point  or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight 
setting  announced,  until  a  change  is  ordered. 

If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load, 
that  position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight 
setting;  if  the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is 
taken  at  the  first  command  for  firing. 

When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  ac- 
curate firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

TO   LOAD 

Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  With 
dummy  (blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skir- 
misher faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the 
right,  about  1  foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  88 

greatest  firmness  and  steadiness  of  the  body;  raises,  or 
lowers,  the  piece  and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the 
balance,  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  muzzle  at 
the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut-off  up.  With 
the  right  hand,  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes 
a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots,  places 
the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the 
fingers  extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on 
the  magazine  floor  plate;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the 
magazine  by  pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  without 
removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the  bolt  home,  turning  down 
the  handle;  turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  "safe"  and 
carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each  rear 
rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar  posi- 
tion opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front  rank 
man,  muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front 
rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces 
being  held  as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of 
load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is 
similar;  if  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left 
thigh ;  if  sitting  the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees ; 
if  lying  down,  the  left  hand  steadies  and  supports  the 
piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the  butt  resting  on  the 
ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 


84  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

STACK   AND   TAKE   ARMS 

The  subject  of  stack  and  take  arms  is  less  important 
than  the  rest  of  this  chapter.  It  is  difficult  to  be  learned 
from  a  book.  Your  company  commander  will  explain 
it  to  you.     It  is  given  here  to  serve  as  a  reference. 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:     STACK  ARMS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt 
between  his  feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined 
slightly  to  the  front  and  opposite  the  center  of  the  in- 
terval on  his  right,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  raising  the 
stacking  swivel;  each  even  number  of  the  rear  rank 
then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  his  file  leader, 
who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right  hand 
and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of  that  of 
his  own  piece  and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval,  the 
right  hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages 
with  that  of  his  own  piece ;  each  odd  number  of  the  front 
rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand,  carries  it  well 
forward,  barrel  to  the  front;  the  left  hand,  guiding  the 
stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower  hook  of  the  swivel  of 
his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook  of  that  of  the  even 
number  of  the  rear  rank;  he  then  turns  the  barrel  out- 
ward into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces  and 
lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to  the  right  of  and  against 
the  toe  of  his  right  shoe. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD  8.3 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by 
the  even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces,  he  takes 
the  position  of  the  soldier. 

Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks:     TAKE  ARMS. 

The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of 
the  front  rank;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank 
grasps  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his 
rear-rank  man  with  his  right  hand,  grasping  both  be- 
tween the  bands;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank 
grasps  his  piece  in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand, 
disengages  it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the  ground  and 
then,  turning  the  piece  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from  the 
stack;  each- even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages 
and  detaches  his  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left,  and  then 
passes  the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and  all 
resume  the  order. 

Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files,  No. 
1  rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making 
and  breaking  the  stack;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he 
resumes  his  post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose 
pieces. 

Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 


CHAPTER  V 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 

Based  on  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations 

The  company  in  line  is  formed  in  double  rank  with 

the  men  arranged,  as  far  as  practicable,  according  to 

height  from  right  to  left,  the  tallest  on  the  right. 
The  original  division  into  squads  is  effected  by  the 

command:  Count  off.  The  squads,  successively  from 
the  right,  count  off  as  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  cor- 
porals placing  themselves  as  No.  4  of  the  front  rank. 

At  the  formation  of  the  company  the  platoons  or 
squads  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left, 
and  these  designations  do  not  change. 

For  convenience  in  giving  commands  and  for  refer- 
ence, the  designations,  right,  center,  left,  when  in  line, 
and  leading,  center,  rear,  when  in  column,  are  applied 
to  platoons  or  squads.  These  designations,  light,  cen- 
ter, left,  when  in  line,  and  leading,  center,  rear,  when 
in  column,  are  applied  to  the  actual  right,  left,  center, 
head,  or  rear,  in  whatever  direction  the  company  may 
be  facing.  The  center  squad  is  the  middle  or  right 
middle  squad  of  the  company.  If  there  are  an  even 
number  of  squads  in  the  company,  for  instance  eight, 
the  center  squad  would  be  the  fourth. 

The  designation  "So-and-so's"  squad  or  platoon  may 
also  be  used. 

86 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


87 


in 


ID 


n>- 


0  s 


CM 


5 

o 


<l) 


(a 

v 

(0 


(J 

c 
"o" 

M- 


s 
s 


ki 


R 

I 


^3 


C/3 

c3 


o 
a 


■ 

g 

O 
U 


w 

C3 

X 
a> 

•  i—i 

V3 


03 


a3 

S   d 


c3 

bJD 
o 

o 

(— ] 


«4-l 

o 

fi 
o 


o 

o3 


03 


173 
O 


k 


-si     ^ 

I  I* 

c\i  5.. 


5 

a. 
5 


■  »  IE 


5  Si 

Is* 


% 
8 

s 


id 

Q 

D   ID     BOB 


Q 


88  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

During  battle,  these  assignments  are  not  changed; 
vacancies  are  filled  by  non-commissioned  officers  of  the 
platoon,  or  by  the  nearest  available  officers  or  non-com- 
missioned officers  arriving  with  reinforcing  troops. 

CLOSE   ORDER 

In  column  of  squads,  each  rank  preserves  the  align- 
ment toward  the  side  of  the  guide. 

Men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  do  not  execute  the  load- 
ings and  firings. 

TO   FORM    THE    COMPANY 

At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly  the  first  sergeant 
takes  position  6  paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  of 
the  company  is  to  be,  faces  it,  draws  saber,  and  com- 
mands :    Fall  in. 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  places  himself,  facing 
to  the  front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest, 
and  at  such  point  that  the  center  of  the  company  will 
be  6  paces  from  and  opposite  the  first  sergeant;  the 
squads  form  in  their  proper  places  on  the  left  of  the 
right  guide,  superintended  by  the  other  sergeants,  who 
then  take  their  posts. 

The  first  sergeant  commands:  Report.  Remaining 
in  position  at  the  order,  the  squad  leaders,  in  succession 
from   the   right,   salute   and   report:    All   present;   or 

Private (s)   absent.     The  first  sergeant  does  not 

return  the  salutes  of  the  squad  leaders;  he  then  com- 
mands:    l.   Inspection,    2.   ARMS,    3.    Order,    4. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  89 

ARMS,  faces  about,  salutes  the  captain,  reports:  Sir, 
all  present  or  accounted  for,  or  the  names  of  the  unau- 
thorized absentees,  and,  without  command,  takes  his 
post. 

If  the  company  cannot  be  formed  by  squads,  the  first 
sergeant  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3. 
Right  shoulder,  4.  ARMS,  and  calls  the  roll.  Each 
man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers  here  and  executes 
order  arms.  The  sergeant  then  effects  the  division  into 
squads  and  reports  the  company  as  prescribed  above. 

The  captain  places  himself  12  paces  in  front  of  the 
center  of,  and  facing,  the  company  in  time  to  receive 
the  report  of  the  first  sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns, 
and  then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  when  the  first  ser- 
geant has  reported,  and  draw  saber  with  the  captain. 

Generally  in  camp  the  saber  is  not  worn.  The  of- 
ficers and  first  sergeants  carry  pistols.  The  hand 
salute  is  rendered  when  so  armed. 

In  the  School  of  the  Squad  we  gave  three  movements 
that  formed  the  basis  of  the  squad  drill.  There  are 
six  movements  in  the  School  of  the  Company  that 
should  be  thoroughly  understood.  When  the  beginner 
knows  these  he  will  have  no  difficulty  with  the  remain- 
der of  the  close  order. 

1st  movement  on  the  fixed  pivot 
Being  in  line,  to  turn  the  company:     1.  Company 
right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT;  or, 
3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 


90 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


A 
H 
H 

O 

o 

•J 

«< 
K 

o 


o 
o 

1X1 


■5 


-s 


K       \ 


\ 


N 


s 


N 


\ 


I 

1 


o   o  --1 


^       CO 
TO"        TO 

ft~ 


CU 
^3 


cu 

»■* 

CU 

o 


ft 


o 


o 

bn 

-t-> 

c 

M 

3 

a 

a 

(71 

!-i 

*h 

OS 

■^    ^    o 


*  Z 

<u     ft   cu 


03 
^3 


O 
cu 

cu 
H 


o3 
CU 


O 


o 


G  cu 

8  ft 

cu  S 

^3  O 


cu 


£      to" 

cu    pA 

s  s 


cu 

cu  _£2 

CU     o  _. 

■£3     cu  ■+-» 

.     rC  en 

P-H  CU 

£  ° 

S_l        CU  TO1 

J3  ft 


w 


O     r&        O 


s 


\ 


IIS  \  N 

II       \  N  \  \ 


— r 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  91 

At  the  second  command  the  right-flank  man  in  the 
front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks 
time;  the  other  front-rank  men,  oblique  to  the  right, 
place  themselves  abreast  of  the  pivot,  and  mark  time; 
in  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the  right,  followed 
in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight  to  the 
front  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face 
to  the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time ;  the  remaining 
men  of  the  rear  rank  move  straight  to  the  front  4  paces, 
oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 
third  man,  cover  their  file  leaders,  and  mark  time;  the 
right  guide  steps  back,  takes  post  on  the  flank  and 
marks  time. 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  last  man  is 

1  pace  in  rear  of  the  new  line. 

The  command  Halt  may  be  given  at  any  time  after 

the  movement  begins;  only  those  halt  who  are  in  the 
new  position.  Each  of  the  others  halts  upon  arriving 
on  the  line,  aligns  himself  to  the  right,  and  executes 
front  without  command. 

The  difference  between  this  movement  and  squad 
right  is  slight.  The  rear  rank  acts  a  little  differently, 
and  the  company  waits  for  the  command  to  move  for- 
ward.    The  idea  is  exactly  the  same. 


92  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

2d  movement  on  the  moving  pivot 

Being  in  line,  to  change  direction:     1.  Right  (left) 
turn,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

Executed  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad, 
except  that  the  men  do  not  glance  toward  the  marching 
flank  and  that  all  take  the  full  step  at  the  fourth  com- 
mand. The  right  guide  is  the  pivot  of  the  front  rank. 
Each  rear-rank  man  obliques  on  the  same  ground  as 
his  file  leader. 

Sefore 

■■/r"7"'  / 

/      / 


Arfer 


/ 


/ 


"71" 
/; 

/      / 
/       / 


/ 


'       / 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


THIRD    MOVEMENT   TO    CHANGE   FROM    LINE   TO    COLUMN 

AND  MOVE  FORWARD 

Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads  and  move 
forward:     1.  Right  (left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  squad  marches 
forward;  the  remainder  of  the  company  executes  squads 
right,  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  squad.  The 
right  guide,  when  he  has  posted  himself  in  front  of  the 
right  squad,  takes  four  short  steps,  then  resumes  the 
full  steps;  the  right  squad  conforms. 

A  common  error  is  for  the  guide  to  forget  to  take  the 
four  short  steps. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


93 


C 
H 


C 


H 
C 

EC 


[ 


H 


C 


IS 

n 


na 


n 


HZI 


Keep  dressed  ac- 
curately on  the  side 
of  the  guide.     (He 
is    always    on    the 
side   opposite   from 
the       file      closers. 
This    is    a    rule    of 
thumb    that   should 
i  be     memorized     at 
Oconee.)      The   guide 
every       squad 
keep 
I  inches 


n 


na 


u 


m£in 


-t-a  |  should 


from 


-pi^l  r  man  in  front. 


40 

the 
So 


I  ~  many  new  men  f  or- 
J  get    about    the    40 


ja 


-Q-i  |  inches.     They  usu- 
j-gj  ^ally    take    a    little 


-q  «  over  30.    When  the 


n 


JZ\ 


-j-r^j  ^  company  is  moved 
into  line  there  is 
of  course  a  jam. 
Hold  your  head  up. 
Don't  look  down  to 
the  ground.  You 
will  be  in  this  for- 
mation more  than 
any  other.  Try  to 
keep  the  following 


10 


nzi 


gif 


94  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

cautions  in  mind:  The  leading  men  of  the  company 
should  have  four  inches  interval.  Better  to  have  too 
much  than  too  little  if  mistakes  are  to  be  insisted  upon. 
Keep  the  pieces  in  the  correct  positions  at  right  shoul- 
der and  then  have  heads  and  rifles  in  a  bee  line.  When 
the  movement  is  completed  the  company  will  be  in  the 
formation  shown  in  the  drawing. 

FOURTH  MOVEMENT  COLUMN  RIGHT 

Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  change  direction:  1. 
Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command  the  front  rank  of  the  leading 
squad  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot  as  in  the  School 
of  the  Squad;  the  other  ranks,  without  command,  turn 
successively  on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. 

-D  D  D  0  D  D  U 


It  is  a  very  common  error  for  the  pivot  man  to  take 
too  short  a  step  and  thereby  cause  a  jam.  Bear  this  in 
mind.  Another  very  common  error  is  for  the  flank  man 
(or  men)  to  take  a  very  long  step.  This  is  caused  by 
the  pivot  man's  forgetting  to  glance  and  see  when  the 
flank  man  arrives  on  the  line,  before  he  takes  the  full 
step.     Another  common  error  is  to  get  out  of  column 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  95 

while  making  this  movement.     Bear  this  in  mind  and 
walk  straight  to  the  turning  point. 


,  - 


JLHIS  SHOWS  THE  COMPANY  IN  COLUMiM  CI   SQUADS, 
CORRECT  POSITION 


THIS  SHOWS  THE  COMMON  ERRORS 


96  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Now  we  come  to  the  last   two    movements. 
cause  more  trouble  than  any  others. 


They 


FIFTH   MOVEMENT  ON   RIGHT    (LEFT)    INTO   LINE 

Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line 
on  right  or  left:  1.  On  right  (left)  into  line,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

(On  right  [left]  into  line,  means  turn  in  the  direction 
that  is  on  your  right  and  get  into  line.  You  have  to  be 
in  column  before  the  movement  is  begun.) 

Let  us  first  consider  the  company  in  column  of  squads. 

qo 
Qa 

& 

.0 


Before 


/1-ffer 


—IT 

LJ 


■H    V- 

LJ 


n 


~n. 


n 

-H     I- 


LJ 


4T 

LJ 


.-n. 


-H 

t 
.J 

I 

T 
~] 

T 
-1 

f 


-- J    ! — 


At  the  captain's  command  on  right  into  line,  the 
corporal  of  the  leading  squad  commands  right  turn. 
The  corporals  of  all  the  remaining  squads,  if  halted, 
command  forward,  if  marching  they  caution  their 
squads  to  continue  the  march.    At  the  captain's  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  97 

mand  march,  the  leading  squad  turns  to  the  right  on  a 
moving  pivot.  The  remaining  squads  march  straight 
to  the  front. 

Each  corporal  commands  right  turn  before  arriving 
opposite  the  right  of  his  squad's  place  in  line.  When 
the  front  rank  of  his  squad  has  arrived  opposite  that 
place  he  gives  the  command  march. 

The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  squad 
has  advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direction. 
Only  the  leading  squad  halts.  The  corporal  then  com- 
mands right  dress. 

The  remaining  corporals  before  arrival  on  the  line, 
command,  squad,  and  add  the  command  halt  just  be- 
fore the  front  rank  reaches  the  line.  They,  then,  com- 
mand right  dress. 

The  capta in  then  dresses  the  company  and  commands 
front. 

If  executed  in  double  time  the  leading  squad  marches 
in  double  time  until  halted. 

Now  let  us  consider  the  company  in  columns  of  pla- 
toons.    See  illustration  on  next  page. 

At  the  captain's  command  on  right  into  line,  the 
leader  of  the  first  platoon  commands  right  turn,  the 
leaders  of  the  rear  platoons,  if  halted,  command  for- 
ward; if  marching,  they  caution  their  platoons  to  con- 
tinue the  march.  The  first  platoon  executes  the  right 
turn  at  the  captain's  command  march.  Having  com- 
pleted the  turn  the  platoon  commander  gives  the  com- 
mand, forward,  MARCH. 


'■'■■■''■'■' "I 

MIII^IIMIIMIIUIIILW 


'  i  i  i »  1 1 1  i  i  i  1 1  i  i  1 1  i  i  i  i 
m  i  i  \a  i  i  B  '  '  B  i  '  B  '  '  EH 


er>* Platoon    | 

r 


Before 


/tfYer 


n 

!  i 


i 


i  i 
i  i 
i  i 

LJ 


98 


/st  f?/ar?oor> 

71 


n 


LJ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  99 

The  remaining  platoon  commanders  give  right  turn, 
MARCH,  when  opposite  their  places,  and  the  command, 
forward,  MARCH,  when  the  turn  has  been  completed. 

When  the  leading  platoon  has  advanced  the  desired 
distance  the  captain  gives  the  command,  company, 
HALT.  At  the  command  company,  the  leading  pla- 
toon leader  gives  the  command,  platoon.  His  platoon 
only  halts  at  the  captain's  command,  halt.  The  pla- 
toon leader  then  gives  the  command,  right  dress,  and 
takes  his  post  in  the  file  closers.  The  remaining  pla- 
toons are  successively  halted  and  dressed  by  their  leader. 
The  captain  gives  the  command  FRONT. 

SIXTH    MOVEMENT    RIGHT    FRONT    INTO    LINE 

Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line 
to  the  front:  1.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

(Right  [left]  front  into  line  means  move  to  the  right 
of  the  front  and  get  into  line.  It  is  necessary  to  be  in 
column  to  begin  this  movement. ) 

Let  us  first  consider  the  company  in  column  of  squads. 
At  the  captain's  command,  right  front  into  line,  the 
corporal  of  the  leading  squad,  if  halted,  commands  for- 
ward; if  marching,  he  cautions  his  squad,  continue  the 
march.  The  corporals  of  the  remaining  squads  com- 
mand right  oblique.  At  the  command  march,  the 
leading  squad  moves  forward.  The  remaining  squads 
oblique  as  indicated.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
the  leading  squad  has  advanced  the  desired  distance; 
its  corporal  then  commands  left  dress. 


100 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


The  remaining  corporals  command  forward, 
MARCH,  when  opposite  their  places  in  line.  They 
halt  and  dress  their  squads  on  the  line  established  by  the 
leading  squad. 

When  the  company  is  in  column  of  platoons  the 
movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  and  by  the 
same  commands  except  the  word  platoon  is  substituted 
for  squad.    The  Captain  gives  the  command  FRONT. 


8 

//tp 

r—f  /   ,'VD  Before 


Before 


Sv-\    /   y 


-w 


Ln-L  i  i 


t 

'  rH 

r 
* 

±3 


i  ,  i 


t    t    t 
ill 


i 
i 

y 

i 
i 
i 


After 


S       4      J|2 


After 


Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  platoons,  or  the  re- 
verse: 1.  Platoons  right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3. 
Company,  4.  HALT;  or,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 


Before 


df+i 


er 


-—\--y 

s 
/ 
/ 
/       *^ 
s 
s 
s 
/ 
• 

■J' 

:z=        zp 

1    / 
• 

/ 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


101 


Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany. 

Before  forming  line  the  captain  sees  that  the  guides 
on  the  flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  to  be  exe- 
cuted are  covering.  This  is  effected  by  previously  an- 
nouncing the  guide  to  that  flank. 

The  two  common  errors  are :  1.  First,  the  pivot  man 
takes  a  short  step  instead  of  marking  time.  Second, 
(being  in  line),  the  pivot  men  of  the  platoons  forget 
that  they  are  the  pivots  and  therefore  do  not  execute  the 
command  when  ordered. 

The  following  illustration  shows  the  side  view  of  a 
platoon.  Note  the  common  errors:  No.  1  rear  rank  is 
closed  up  to  about  twenty  inches.     He  is  looking  down 


102        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

at  the  heels  of  his  front  rank  file  (man) .  Rifles  are  im- 
properly held.  Some  men  in  the  rear  rank  have  more 
than  forty  inches  distance  from  their  front  rank  men. 

Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads,  or  the  re- 
verse; or,  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  column  of 
platoons,  or  the  reverse:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH;  or,  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3. 
Company,  4.  HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  School  of 
the  Squad. 


ffiEFTOffffff 


If  the  company  or  platoons  be  formed  in  line  toward 
the  side  of  the  file  closers  they  dart  through  the  column 
and  take  posts  in  rear  of  the  company  at  the  second 
command.  If  the  column  of  squads  be  formed  from 
line,  the  file  closers  take  posts  on  the  pivot  flank,  abreast 
of  and  4  inches  from  the  nearest  flank. 

Being  in  column  of  platoons,  to  change  direction:  1. 
Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  platoon 
commands :  Right  turn.  At  the  command  march  the 
leading  platoon  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot;  its 
leader  commands:  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  on  com- 
pletion of  the  turn.  Rear  platoons  march  squarely  up 
to  the  turning  point  of  the  leading  platoon  and  turn  at 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


103 


the  command  of  their  leaders.  When  each  platoon  has 
completed  its  turn,  the  leader  commands  forward, 
MARCH. 

Before 


dfter 


i 
i 
i 

i 

i 
i 


L !—-> 


/ 


/ 


Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  of  platoons 
or  the  reverse:  1.  Platoons,  column  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany. 

Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads  and  then  change 
direction.  1.  Squads  left  (right),  column  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH. 


The  dotted  line       P" 
shows   the  company^— 
in  line  before  the 
new  movement-  is 
begun . 


ncrcrd'd 


o 


This  shows 
the  movement 
|        |   half  completed 


The  left  squad  initiates  (begins) 
the  column  right  as  soon  as  it  has 
completed  the  squad  left.  | 

Being  in  line,  to  form  line  of  platoons:     1.  Squads 
left    (right),    platoons,    column    left    (right),    2. 


H 


S 


H 


I 


H 


H 


1 


H 


H 


IS 


I 


iz; 

o 

o 

H 

pi 

t* 
o 

i— i 


s 


H 


f 


104 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY         105 

MARCH;  or,  1.  Platoons,  right  (left)  by  squads,  2. 
MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

FACING   OR    MARCHING   TO   THE   REAR 

Being  in  line,  line  of  platoons,  or  in  column  of 
platoons  or  squads,  to  face  or  march  to  the  rear:  1. 
Squads  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH;  or,  1.  Squads 
right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4. 
HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  School  of 
the  Squad. 

If  the  company  is  in  line  of  platoons,  or  in  column  of 
squads,  the  file  closers  turn  about  toward  the  column, 
and  take  their  posts;  if  in  line,  each  darts  through  the 
nearest  interval  between  squads. 

To  march  to  the  rear  for  a  few  paces:  1.  About,  2. 
FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

If  in  line,  the  guides  place  themselves  in  the  rear  rank, 
now  in  front  rank;  the  file  closers,  on  facing  about, 
maintain  their  relative  positions.  No  other  movement 
is  executed  until  the  line  is  faced  to  the  original  front. 

Being  in  column  of  squads  to  form  column  of 
platoons,  or  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  the  com- 
pany in  line:  1.  Platoons,  right  (left)  front  into 
line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany.    If  forming  column  of  platoons,  platoon  leaders 


106        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

verify  the  alignment  before  taking  their  posts;  the 
captain  commands  front  when  the  alignments  have  been 
verified. 

When  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time  the 
commands  for  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted  and 
the  guide  is  toward  the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 

ROUTE    STEP   AND    AT   EASE 

The  column  of  squads  is  the  habitual  column  of  route, 
but  route  step  and  at  ease  are  applicable  to  any  march- 
ing formation. 

To  march  at  route  step:  1.  Route  step,  2. 
MARCH.  Sabers  are  carried  at  will  or  in  the  scab- 
bard; the  men  carry  their  pieces  at  will,  keeping  the 
muzzles  elevated;  they  are  not  required  to  preserve 
silence,  nor  to  keep  the  step.  The  ranks  cover  and 
preserve  their  distance.  If  halted  from  route  step,  the 
men  stand  at  rest. 

To  march  at  ease:     1.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH. 

The  company  marches  as  in  route  step,  except  that 
silence  is  preserved  when  halted,  the  men  remain  at  ease. 

Marching  at  route  step  or  at  ease:  1.  Company,  2. 
ATTENTION. 

At  the  command  attention  the  pieces  are  brought  to 
the  right  shoulder  and  the  cadenced  step  in  quick  time 
is  resumed. 

RULES   FOR  GUIDES 

A  guide  is  a  noncommissioned  officer  or  a  private 
upon  whom  the  company  regulates  its  march. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  107 

It  is  not  difficult  for  an  inexperienced  man  to  learn, 
with  a  little  practice,  the  duties  and  the  correct  positions 
of  a  guide.  Remember  the  rule  of  thumb,  The  guide  and 
the  file  closers  are  on  the  opposite  flanks  when  the  com- 
pany is  in  column  of  squads.  In  squads  right  about  it 
would  be  ridiculous  for  the  file  closers  to  move  from  one 
flank  to  another.  Guides  are  permitted  and  supposed 
to  look  around  to  see  if  they  are  in  their  proper  places; 
most  new  men  are  timid  about  this. 

The  following  general  rules  and  examples  will  help 
you: 

The  guide  of  a  company  or  platoon  in  line  is  right, 
unless  otherwise  announced. 

The  guide  of  a  company  or  platoon  in  column  of 
squads  is  toward  the  side  of  the  guide,  who  places  himself 
on  the  side  of  the  company  away  from  the  file  closers. 

The  guide  of  a  deployed  line  (a  skirmish  line)  is 
always  center  unless  otherwise  announced. 

EXAMPLES 

Suppose  the  company  to  be  in  line. 
In  executing: 

1.  Squads  right.     The  guides  go  to  the  left  flank. 

2.  Right  by  squads.     The  guides  go  to  the  left  flank. 

3.  Squads  left.     The  guides  go  to  the  right  flank. 

4.  Left  by  squads.     The  guides  go  to  the  right  flank. 

If  the  company  is  in  column  of  squads  and  the  com- 
mand is  either  squads  right  or  left  about,  the  guides 
simply  remember  to  remain  on  the  flank  opposite  from 


108        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

the  file  closers.  It  is  very  easy  to  see  that  a  world  of 
confusion  would  be  caused  by  the  file  closers  attempting 
to  move  to  the  opposite  flank  during  squads  right  or 
left  about.  If  the  guides  are  in  doubt  look  to  see  where 
the  file  closers  are  and  then  apply  the  rule  of  thumb: 
File  closers  and  guides  are  always  on  opposite  flanks. 

TO   DIMINISH    THE    FRONT   OF   A    COLUMN    OF    SQUADS 

Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Right  (left)  by 
twos,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  all  files  except  the  two  right 
files  on  the  leading  squad  execute  "in  Place  Halt"; 
the  two  left  files  of  the  leading  squads  oblique  to  the  right 
when  disengaged  and  follow  the  right  files  at  the  shortest 
practicable  distance.  The  remaining  squads  follow 
successively  in  like  manner. 

Being  in  column  of  squads  or  twos :       f  j  l  J  uj  u 
1.  Right  (left)   by  file,  2.  MARCH.       jgioiiwf** 

At  the  command  march,  all  files  exe-        -f  T  ^  ^ 
cute   "In   Place   Halt,"    except    the        ^jl^jlj^j 
right  file  of  the  leading  two  or  squad.         £3JolE>Ii<3 
The  left  file  or  files  of  the  leading  two  or        ,-£;  r-y    * 
squad  oblique  successively  to  the  right       Syv' 
when  disengaged  and  each  follows  the       H  £p 
file  on  its  right  at  the  shortest  practi-       rjh  r£| 
cable  distance.     The  remaining  twos  or        \     t 
squads  follow  successively  in  like  man-       H  0 

ner«  RIGHT  BY  TWOS 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


109 


n  n  n  ri 

kJ LJIJU 

4        *        -         * 

R*  Kft  KA  *A 


nrinn 

V>J>J>J 


Being  in  column  of  files  or  twos,  to  form 

column  of  squads;  or,  being  in  column  of 

files,  to  form  column  of  twos:     1.  Squads 

(twos),  right  (left)  front  into  line,  2. 

MARCH. 

j£'-'    /'  At  the  command  march,  the  leading 

?/  file  or  files  halt  and  come  to  order  arms. 

The   remainder   of   the   squad,    or   twos, 

obliques  to  the  right  and  halts  on  line  with 

the  leading  file  or  files.     The  remaining 

squads  or  twos  close  up  and  successively 

form  in  rear  of  the  first  in  like  manner. 

The  movement  described  in  this  para- 
graph will  be  ordered  right  or  left,  so  as 
right  by  file  to  restore  the  files  to  their  normal  relative 
positions  in  column  of  twos  or  in  column  of  squads. 

The  movements  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding 
paragraphs  are  difficult  of  execution  at  attention  and 
have  no  value  as  disciplinary  exercises. 

Marching  by  twos  or  files  can  not  be  executed  without 


P 
9 


Executing .  twos 
/eft  front    /nfo 
tine 


r~[  3 


§9 

/      2 


r'"""'4. 
rp  rj 

r  i  n 


□  ITlT?l  fe]  Executing  sqrucrofs 


2    3  4- 


110        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

serious  delay  and  waste  of  road  space.  Every  reason- 
able precaution  will  be  taken  to  obviate  the  necessity  for 
these  formations. 

The  remainder  of  chapter  on  close  order  drill,  School 
of  the  Company,  is  in  general  for  those  above  the  grade 
of  private,  therefore,  unless  we  are  perfectly  clear  in 
what  we  have  had  so  far,  let  us  not  go  too  deeply 
into  these  special  features  until  we  have  more  experi- 
ence. 

The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and 
practical  instruction  of  his  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers,  not  only  in  the  duties  of  their  respective  grades, 
but  in  those  of  the  next  higher  grades. 

If  the  left  squad  contains  less  than  six  men,  it  is  either 
increased  to  that  number  by  transfers  from  other  squads 
or  is  broken  up  and  its  members  assigned  to  other  squads 
and  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  These  squad 
organizations  are  maintained,  by  transfers  if  necessary, 
until  the  company  becomes  so  reduced  in  numbers  as  to 
necessitate  a  new  division  into  squads.  No  squad  will 
contain  less  than  six  men. 

The  company  is  further  divided  into  two,  three,  or 
four  platoons,  each  consisting  of  not  less  than  two  nor 
more  than  four  squads.  In  garrison  or  ceremonies  the 
strength  of  platoons  may  exceed  four  squads. 

Platoons  are  assigned  to  the  lieutenants  and  noncom- 
missioned officers,  in  order  of  rank,  as  follows :  1,  right ; 
2,  left;  3,  center  (right  center)  ;  4,  left  center. 

The  noncommissioned  officers  next  in  rank  are  as- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY         111 

signed  as  guides,  one  to  each  platoon.  If  sergeants  still 
remain,  they  are  assigned  to  platoons  as  additional 
guides.  When  the  platoon  is  deployed,  its  guide,  or 
guides,  accompany  the  platoon  leader. 

The  first  sergeant  is  never  assigned  as  a  guide. 
When  not  commanding  a  platoon,  he  is  posted  as  a  file 
closer  opposite  the  third  file  from  the  outer  flank  of  the 
first  platoon;  and  when  the  company  is  deployed  he 
accompanies  the  captain. 

Musicians,  when  required  to  play,  are  at  the  head  of 
the  column.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  they  ac- 
company the  captain. 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers 
execute  the  manual  of  arms  during  the  drill  unless 
specially  excused,  when  they  remain  at  the  order.  Dur- 
ing ceremonies  they  execute  all  movements. 

In  taking  intervals  and  distances,  unless  otherwise 
directed,  the  right  and  left  guides,  at  the  first  command, 
place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and,  with 
them,  take  a  distance  of  4  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 
In  taking  intervals,  at  the  command  march,  the  file 
closers  face  to  the  flank  and  each  steps  off  with  the  file 
nearest  him.  In  assembling  the  guides  and  file  closers 
resume  their  positions  in  line. 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  captain  directs  the  first 
sergeant,  dismiss  the  company.  The  officers  fall  out ; 
the  first  sergeant  places  himself  faced  to  the  front,  3 
paces  to  the  front  and  2  paces  from  the  nearest  flank  of 
the  company,  salutes,  faces  toward  opposite  flank  of 


112        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

the     company,     and     commands:     1.  Inspection,     2. 
ARMS,  3.  Port,  4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 

The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Squad,  the  guide  being  established  instead 
of  the  flank  file.  The  rear-rank  man  of  the  flank  file 
keeps  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  covers  his  file 
leader. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  places  himself  in  pro- 
longation of  the  line,  2  paces  from  and  facing  the  flank 
toward  which  the  dress  is  made,  verifies  the  aligmnent, 
and  commands:     FRONT. 

Platoon  leaders  take  a  like  position  when  required  to 
verify  alignments. 


EXTENDED    ORDER   DRILLS 

As  soon  as  your  progress  in  close  order  is  sufficiently 
advanced,  you  will  be  given  extended  order  drill,  which 
will  teach  you  the  formations  used  in  battle,  and  how  a 
firing  line  is  controlled.     They  are  executed  at  ease. 

We  should  know  the  meaning  of  the  two  following 
terms:     Base  and  Deploy. 

Base.  The  element  on  which  a  movement  is  reg- 
ulated. In  company  drill  it  is  usually  the  right  or  left ; 
leading,  rear,  or  center  squad. 

Deploy.  To  extend  the  front.  The  company  de- 
ploys when  it  executes  as  skirmishers. 

There  are  really  only  two  conditions  that  we  must 
consider  in  this  drill.     The  movements  are  very  easy  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  113 


I 


15 
6) 


r\ 


I 


114        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

understand,  but  they  require  a  lot  of  practice  to  prevent 
confusion. 

First  Case.  Let  us  take  the  company  in  line 
at  a  halt.  It  is  desired  to  form  a  skirmish  line  to  the 
front,  l.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  cen- 
ter), 2.  MARCH. 

At  the  preparatory  command  (i.e.,  as  skirmishers, 
guide  right)  all  the  corporals,  except  the  corporal  of 
the  first  squad,  give  the  command,  by  the  left  flank,  the 
corporal  of  the  first  squad  gives  the  command,  as 
skirmishers. 

At  the  command  march,  all  squads,  except  the  first 
squad,  move  to  the  left,  and  when  they  have  their  proper 
intervals  they  are  deployed  to  the  right  (left)  and  on 
the  line  of  the  base  squad  by  the  corporals  giving  the 
commands:  As  skirmishers,  2.  MARCH.  The  cor- 
poral of  the  first  squad  deploys  his  squad  as  soon  as  he 
has  sufficient  room  (interval). 

That 's  all  there  is  to  the  first  movement  with  some 
slight  modifications. 

Of  course  if  the  command  had  been  as  skirmishers, 
guide  left,  the  base  squad  would  have  been  the  left  or 
fourteenth  squad  instead  of  the  first  squad,  for  when 
we  speak  of  the  right  or  left  of  a  company,  in  the  deploy- 
ments, the  company  being  in  line,  we  mean  the  right  or 
left  squads  of  the  company. 

Another  modification:  Suppose  the  command  had 
been  as  skirmishers,  guide  center.  In  that  case  the 
base  squad  would  be  the  center  or  seventh  squad.     The 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY         115 

base  (seventh)  squad  deploys  without  moving  to  the 
right  or  left.  There  is  only  one  thing  for  the  first  six 
squads  to  do  and  that  is  to  move  to  the  right.  There  is 
only  one  thing  for  the  last  seven  squads  to  do  and  that 
is  to  move  to  the  left. 

We  have  considered  the  company  so  far  to  be  at  a 
halt;  suppose  that  it  had  been  moving  forward.  The 
corporal  of  the  base  squad  deploys  his  squad  as  soon  as 
he  has  sufficient  interval,  and  then  continues  straight  to 
the  front  until  the  command :  1.  Company,  2.  HALT, 
is  .given  by  the  captain.  The  other  corporals  move  their 
squads  to  the  left  front  (or  right  front),  by  command- 
ing their  squads,  Follow  me.  They  conduct  their 
squads  on  the  shortest  and  easiest  route  to  their  places 
on  the  line  and  then  deploy  their  squads  as  they  arrive 
on  the  general  line. 


c 


1    5 '     '    3^  »  Before 


\  N 


!      \      \     \ 


'A    \    \ 

DDDDDODOaaDDDDDDODODOODODDOD  DJD  D  D 

/if  fen. 

The  corporals  should  remember  that  they  are  not  to 
step  out  from  their  squads  to  conduct  them  to  their 
proper  places  until  the  captain  has  given  the  command 
march. 


116         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

The  corporals  often  fail  to  take  sufficient  intervals 
thus  causing  a  jam. 

The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  corporals  should 
remember  to  give  by  the  right  or  left  flank  instead  of 
right  or  left  face. 

SECOND    CASE 

Now  suppose  the  company  is  in  column  of  squads  at 
a  halt.  It  is  desired  to  form  a  skirmish  line  to  the  front : 
1.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  corporal  of  the  first,  or 
leading  squad,  deploys  his  squad  without  advancing. 
All  of  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  left  front  and 
deploy  their  squads  on  the  line  formed  by  the  first  squad. 
At  the  preparatory  command  the  corporals  command, 
follow  me,  and  at  the  command  MARCH,  they  step  in 
front  of  their  squads  and  conduct  them  to  their  places. 

Had  the  command  been  as  skirmishers,  guide  left, 
of  course  all  except  the  leading  squad  would  have  moved 
to  the  right.  For  when  the  company  is  in  column  of 
squads,  as  skirmishers,  guide  right  means  that  the  first 
or  leading  squad  is  to  be  the  right  of  the  skirmish  line. 
If  left,  instead  of  right  is  given  that  simply  means  that 
the  leading  or  base  squad  is  to  be  the  left  of  the  skirmish 
line. 

Now  we  come  to  the  last  variation.  It  is  difficult  for 
the  new  man.  The  command  as  skirmishers,  guide 
center,  the  company  being  in  column  of  squads,  simply 
means  that  the  center  squad  is  to  be  the  base  squad. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  117 

All  other  squads  are  to  regulate  their  movements  on  the 
base  squad  as  in  all  other  cases. 

This  is  a  peculiar  case  and  for  it  the  authorities  have 
adopted  a  rule  of  thumb.  All  squads  in  front  of  the 
base  squad  go  to  the  right,  those  in  rear  to  the  left. 
That 's  all  there  is  to  it.  But  that  must  be  remembered. 
Corporals  will  conduct  their  squads  to  their  proper 
places  by  the  shortest  and  easiest  routes. 

We  will  use  a  platoon  of  four  squads  to  illustrate  the 
idea. 


Before 


a 


OOOOOOOO  eft) DODD CTO  DODDDDd  OaDDDClDO  □       H  T  Tef 


A     ^>  1 


Note  that  the  leading  corporal  turns  his  squad  well 
to  the  right  rear  and  then  to  the  left. 

We  have  assumed  the  company  to  be  at  a  halt;  sup- 
pose it  is  moving  forward.  In  that  case  the  base  squad 
simply  continues  moving  forward  after  it  has  deployed 
until  the  captain  gives  the  command  halt.  The  other 
corporals  conduct  their  squads  by  the  shortest  routes  to 
their  proper  places  and  deploy  them  on  the  general  line. 


118        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

When  the  company,  while  moving,  is  deployed,  it  is 
a  common  error  for  squads  in  rear  of  the  base  squad  to 


I     t*  I  —Before 


— ! — ^         >V         ^ 
»         \     '  '    ».  \ 

'j  ,     v*'    x^  \ 

f  \  \  \ 

□  DODDDDaaaaaDDDDDDDD  od d  a  a  a  a  a ab  a  a  o 


/Ifter 


i     -3    i    Before 
i      >    i      \// 

/^        i     t\   \ 

/  DDCJOpQDD  \  \ 

|2  \  \ 

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDOOQDD 

After 

take  long  and  fast  steps  and  come  up  on  the  line  of  the 
base  squad.     This  should  not  be  done  unless  the  com- 
mand double  time  is  given.    In  which  case  all  the  squads 
take  up  the  double  time,  except  the  base  squad. 

Extended  Order 
rules  for  deployments 
The  command  guide  right  (left  or  center)  indicates 
the  base  squad  for  the  deployment ;  if  in  line  it  designates 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  119 

the  actual  right  (left  or  center)  squad;  if  in  column  the 
command  guide  right  (left)  designates  the  leading 
squad,  and  the  command  guide  center  designates  the 
center  squad.  After  the  deployment  is  completed,  the 
guide  is  always  center  without  command,  unless  other- 
wise ordered. 

At  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  skirmish 
line,  from  either  column  of  squads  or  line,  each  squad 
leader  (except  the  leader  of  the  base  squad,  when  his 
squad  does  not  advance)  cautions  his  squad,  follow  me 
or  by  the  right  (left)  flank,  as  the  case  may  be;  at  the 
command  march,  he  steps  in  front  of  his  squad  and  leads 
it  to  its  place  in  line. 

Having  given  the  command  for  forming  skirmish  line, 
the  captain,  if  necessary,  indicates  to  the  corporal  of  the 
base  squad  the  point  on  which  the  squad  is  to  march; 
the  corporal  habitually  looks  to  the  captain  for  such 
directions. 

The  base  squad  is  deployed  as  soon  as  it  has  suf- 
ficient interval.  The  other  squads  are  deployed  as  they 
arrive  on  the  general  line;  each  corporal  halts  in  his  place 
in  line  and  commands  or  signals, as  skirmishers  march; 
the  squad  deploys  and  halts  abreast  of  him. 

If  tactical  considerations  demand  it,  the  squad  is  de- 
ployed before  arriving  on  the  line. 

Deployed  lines  preserve  a  general  alignment  toward 
the  guide.  Within  their  respective  fronts,  individuals 
or  units  march  so  as  best  to  secure  or  to  facilitate  the 


120        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

advance  but  the  general  and  orderly  progress  of  the 
whole  is  paramount. 

On  halting,  a  deployed  line  faces  to  the  front  (di- 
rection of  the  enemy)  in  all  cases  and  takes  advantage 
of  cover,  the  men  lying  down  if  necessary. 

The  company  in  line  or  column  of  squads  may  be 
deployed  in  an  oblique  direction  by  the  same  commands. 
The  captain  points  out  the  desired  direction;  the  cor- 
poral of  the  base  squad  moves  in  the  direction  indicated ; 
the  other  corporals  conform. 

To  form  skirmish  line  to  the  flank  or  rear  the  line  or 
the  column  of  squads  is  turned  by  squads  to  the  flank 
or  rear  and  then  deployed  as  described. 

The  intervals  between  men  are  increased  or  decreased 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  adding  to  the 
preparatory  command,  guide  right  (left  or  center),  if 
necessary. 

THE   ASSEMBLY 

The  captain  takes  his  post  in  front  of,  or  designates, 
the  element  on  which  the  company  is  to  assemble  and 
commands:     1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

If  in  skirmish  line  the  men  move  promptly  toward  the 
designated  point  and  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line. 
If  assembled  by  platoons,  these  are  conducted  to  the  de- 
signated point  by  platoon  leaders,  and  the  company  is 
reformed  in  line. 

Platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command:  1. 
Platoons,  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  121 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany. 

One  or  more  platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  com- 
mand:    1.  Such  platoon(s),  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  the  designated  platoon  or  platoons  as 
described  for  the  company. 

Wherever  it  is  necessary  in  campaign  to  deploy  troops 
there  is  often  so  much  noise  and  confusion  that  it  is  im- 
possible for  the  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  to 
make  themselves  heard.  Signals  must  be  used  instead 
of  verbal  commands. 

WHISTLE   SIGNALS 

There  are  only  two  kinds  of  whistle  signals;  a  short 
blast  and  a  long  blast.  A  short  blast  means  pay  at- 
tention, or  look  out  for  a  signal  or  command. 

A  long  blast  means  stop  firing  for  a  minute  ( suspend 
firing) . 

THE   ADVANCE 

The  advance  of  a  company  into  an  engagement 
(whether  for  attack  or  defense)  is  conducted  in  close 
order,  preferably  column  of  squads,  until  the  probability 
of  encountering  hostile  fire  makes  it  advisable  to  deploy. 
After  deployment,  and  before  opening  fire,  the  advance 
of  the  company  may  be  continued  in  skirmish  line  or 
other  suitable  formations,  depending  upon  circum- 
stances. The  advance  may  often  be  facilitated,  or  bet- 
ter advantage  taken  of  cover,  or  losses  reduced  by  the 


122 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


employment  of  the  platoon  or  squad  columns  or  by  the 
use  of  a  succession  of  thin  lines.  The  selection  of  the 
method  to  be  used  is  made  by  the  captain  or  major,  the 
choice  depending  upon  conditions  arising  during  the 
progress  of  the  advance.  If  the  deployment  is  found 
to  be  premature,  it  will  generally  be  best  to  assemble  the 
company  and  proceed  in  close  order. 

Patrols  are  used  to  provide  the  necessary  security 
against  surprise. 

Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Platoon  columns,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  platoon  leaders  move  forward  through  the  center 
of  their  respective  platoons;  men  to  the  right  of  the 
platoon  leader  march  to  the  left  and  follow  him  in  file ; 
those  to  the  left  march  in  like  manner  to  the  right;  each 
platoon  leader  thus  conducts  the  march  of  his  platoon 
in  double  column  of  files;  platoon  guides  follow  in  the 


n   rl  ri   ri  n   ri   ri    ri 

L  i    U     U  J     LJ    U-.     U     LJ     LJ  |L 


U-i  n   ri   ri  ri   ri  ri  ri  ri  ri   n   n   ri   ri   n   n 
[Cj  lj  LJ   LJ  lj   lj  lj  Lj   lj  lj  lj  «-j   lj   lJ  Lj   lj 

I 


ri    ri    ri    ri    ri    ri   ri   ri 

|_1     LJ     LJ     LJ     LJ     LJ     LJ     LJ 


|!! 
ill 
in 

□  D 
DiD 
Dp 
Dp 
Dp 
DD 
DJD 
D|D 
HI 


I 

D 
D 
□ 
□ 
□ 
D 
D 
□ 


a 
a 
a 
a 
a 
a 
a 


SHOWING  HOW  PLATOON  COLUMNS  ARE  FORMED 


'      • 


V 

I 
I 
I 
I 


□  • 


3 
2 


Corporal 

SQUAD  COLUMN 
123 


124         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

^^  M  r^  P^ 

LJ  iJ  «-■»  *•-» 


r^.  '1\  "'  f* 

Cj\  >.i\  "\  **\ 

f\  <V\  Refnre       /P\  M 


fiXBefore     fe\  &\ 

//;i  \  /A  \  //a  \         //a  \ 

//;xk\\      ///a\\      //7?V\\      ///lV\\ 
//  k\\\   ///fl\\\    ///fl\\\    /  /R\\\ 

bbbddddbnbdDnnaDQDDnbdaddDrJDDDDD 

Arter 
SQUAD  COLUMNS 

rear  of  their  respective  platoons  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Squad  columns,  2. 
MARCH.     See  preceding  page. 

Each  squad  leader  moves  to  the  front;  the  members 
of  each  squad  oblique  toward  and  follow  their  squad 
leader  in  single  file  at  easy  marching  distances. 

Platoon  columns  are  profitably  used  where  the  ground 
is  so  difficult  or  cover  is  so  limited  as  to  make  it  desir- 
able to  take  advantage  of  the  few  favorable  routes;  no 
two  platoons  should  march  within  the  area  of  burst  of 
a  single  shrapnel  (ordinarily  about  20  yards  wide). 
Squad  columns  are  of  value  principally  in  facilitating 
the  advance  over  rough  or  brush-grown  ground;  they 
afford  no  material  advantage  in  securing  cover. 

To  deploy  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  As 
skirmishers,  2.  MARCH. 

Skirmishers  move  to  the  right  or  left  front  and  suc- 
cessively place  themselves  in  their  original  positions  on 
the  line. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY 


125 


//'////;  W\\\\\\\     ///////  |A  \\\V\V\ 
66a6&t}6ti6hhbhtihbd66ti6f!ititibtibtitito.tih 

After    i 

PLATOON  COLUMNS 


Being  in  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  Assemble, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  signal  assemble.  The 
men  of  each  platoon  or  squad,  as  the  case  may  be,  ad- 
vance and,  moving  to  the  right  and  left,  take  their 
proper  places  in  line,  each  unit  assembling  on  the  lead- 
ing element  of  the  column  and  reforming  in  line.  The 
platoon  or  squad  leaders  conduct  their  units  toward  the 
element  or  point  indicated  by  the  captain,  and  to  their 
places  in  line ;  the  company  is  reformed  in  line. 


q 

tn 

'O' 

'□' 
'o> 

i 


i 


Atkk 


D 

a 


R    Before 


a 

/□I 

la 

'   D 
D 

V 


s 


p\ 


/s+ 


'D 

I  D  l 

V      1 

I j" 


< 


Assembled  on  *V. 
the  first  or  right  squad 


8 

ID| 
»Dl 

'  ° 

'    *    I 

\4'hfyvod 

"l j 


126         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

D  °>  Before  <D  Q 

,DD|  vDDl 


DD    \  '    DD   \ 

.     DD    \  ,'    DD    I 


/         '*'         \  '         I V '        . 

4fkr\      '/^    I      g"'  h--^"         "* 


*:j 


Being  in  skirmish  line,  to  advance  by  a  succession  of 
thin  lines:     1.  (Such  numbers) ,  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  captain  points  out  in  advance  the  selected  posi- 
tion in  front  of  the  line  occupied.  The  designated 
number  of  each  squad  moves  to  the  front;  the  line  thus 
formed  preserves  the  original  intervals  as  nearly  as 
practicable;  when  this  line  has  advanced  a  suitable  dis- 
tance (generally  from  100  to  250  yards,  depending  upon 
the  terrain  and  the  character  of  the  hostile  fire) ,  a  second 
is  sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so  on  at 
irregular  distances  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced. 
Upon  arriving  at  the  indicated  position,  the  first  line  is 
halted.  Successive  lines,  upon  arriving,  halt  on  line 
with  the  first  and  the  men  take  their  proper  places  in  the 
skirmish  line. 

The  first  line  is  led  by  the  platoon  leader  of  the  right 
platoon,  the  second  by  the  guide  of  the  right  platoon, 
and  so  on  in  order  from  right  to  left,  by  the  officers  and 
non-commissioned  officers  in  the  file  closers. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY         127 

The  advance  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  con- 
ditions demand  a  faster  gait. 

The  company  having  arrived  at  the  indicated  position, 
a  further  advance  by  the  same  means  may  be  advisable. 

The  advance  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to 
cross  a  wide  stretch  swept,  or  likely  to  be  swept,  by  ar- 
tillery fire  or  heavy,  long-range  rifle  fire  which  cannot 
profitably  be  returned.  Its  purpose  is  the  building  up 
of  a  strong  skirmish  line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a 
fire  fight.  This  method  of  advancing  results  in  serious 
(though  temporary)  loss  of  control  over  the  company. 
Its  advantage  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  offers  a  less  definite 
target,  hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

The  above  are  suggestions.  Other  and  better  forma- 
tions may  be  devised  to  fit  particular  cases.  The  best 
formation  is  the  one  which  advances  the  line  farthest 
with  the  least  loss  of  men,  time,  and  control. 

FIELD   EXERCISES 

These  exercises,  as  well  as  combat  exercises,  are  for 
instruction  in  duties  incident  to  campaign.  To  receive 
the  maximum  benefit  from  them  you  must  know  the  as- 
sumed  situation  of  each  exercise. 

THE   FIRE   ATTACK 

The  principles  governing  the  advance  of  the  firing 
(ine  in  attack  are  considered  in  the  chapters  on  Attack 
and  Defense. 

When  it  becomes  impracticable  for  the  company  to 


128         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

advance  as  a  whole  by  ordinary  means,  it  advances  by 
rushes. 

Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  By  platoon  (two 
platoons,  squad,  four  men,  etc.)  from  the  right 
(left),  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  flank  carefully 
arranges  the  details  for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution 
of  the  rush  and  puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable. 
If  necessary,  he  designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated 
fraction.  When  about  to  rush,  he  causes  the  men  of 
the  fraction  to  cease  firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat, 
but  in  readiness  to  spring  forward  instantly.  The 
leader  of  the  rush  (at  the  signal  of  the  platoon  leader, 
if  the  latter  be  not  the  leader  of  the  rush)  commands: 
Follow  me,  and  running  at  top  speed,  leads  the  fraction 
to  the  new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes  it  to  open 
fire.  The  leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if  it 
has  not  been  previously  designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new 
line,  the  next  like  fraction  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon 
leader,  without  further  command  of  the  captain,  and  so 
on,  successively,  until  the  entire  company  is  on  the  line 
established  by  the  first  rush. 

If  two  or  more  platoons  are  ordered  to  rush,  the  senior 
platoon  leader  takes  charge  of  them,  and  the  junior  (or 
juniors)  carries  out  the  wishes  of  the  senior. 

A  part  of  the  line  having  advanced,  the  captain  may 
increase  or  decrease  the  size  of  the  fractions  to  complete 
the  movement. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  129 

When  the  company  forms  a  part  of  the  firing  line, 
the  rush  of  the  company  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the 
captain,  as  described  for  a  platoon  in  the  preceding 
paragraph.  The  captain  leads  the  rush;  platoon  leaders 
lead  their  respective  platoons,  platoon  guides  follow  the 
line  to  insure  prompt  and  orderly  execution  of  the 
advance. 

When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running, 
becomes  impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that 
brings  the  attack  closer  to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling, 
should  be  employed. 

Quibbling  over  minor  details  shows  a  failure  to  grasp 
the  big  ideas. 


CHAPTER  VI 

FIRE  SUPERIORITY 

Do  not  study  this  chapter  until  you  begin  your  ex- 
tended order  drills. 

If  the  authors  of  this  text  were  requested  to  select  for 
you  the  most  important  of  all  information  that  you  will 
receive  during  your  instruction  at  a  training  camp,  they 
would  advise  vou  to  take  home  that  contained  in  this 
chapter.  If  you  have  learned  fully  so  much  you  will 
have  done  well.  If  you  have  failed  to  comprehend  as 
much  as  this,  you  will  have  returned  to  your  homes  lack- 
ing in  important  knowledge. 

If  you  are  on  the  battle-field  and  propose  to  crush 
the  other  side  (defeat  the  enemy),  you  have  got  to  do 
one  thing:  you  have  got  to  make  your  rifle  fire  better 
than  his,  and  you  have  got  to  keep  it  better. 

The  proposition  is  this :  The  enemy  is  on  the  defense. 
He  is  in  a  number-one,  first-class  trench.  It  is  con- 
structed with  steel,  concrete,  and  sandbags.  It  has  all 
the  improvements  that  science  can  devise.  Your  busi- 
ness is  to  attack  and  crush  the  enemy.  How  can  you 
advance  over  exposed  ground  against  such  a  position? 
The  man  behind  all  those  modern  improvements  has  got 
to  stick  his  head  up  more  or  less  when  he  fires.  If  the 
volume  and  rate  and  accuracy  of  your  fire  is  greater  than 

130 


FIRE  SUPERIORITY  131 

his,  he  will  grow  timid  about  the  matter.  His  fire  will 
become  less  effective.  That  is  to  say,  he  cannot  have 
fire  superiority.  When  your  side  has  fire  superiority, 
it  not  only  can  advance  upon  such  a  position  but  it  can 
do  so  without  ruinous  losses,  and  with  hope  of  success. 

To  obtain  this  fire  superiority  it  is  necessary  to  pro- 
duce a  heavier  volume  of  accurate  fire  than  your  op- 
ponent can  produce.  We  can  get  a  proper  conception 
of  the  ideas  involved  by  imagining  two  firemen  in  a  fight 
armed  with  hose.  One  has  a  larger  hose  and  a  greater 
water  pressure  than  the  other.  All  else  being  equal,  we 
can  foresee  clearly  who  will  be  the  victor  and  who  will 
be  defeated.  The  more  water  one  throws  into  the  other's 
face,  the  less  accurate  and  effective  will  the  other's  aim 
become.  This  is  equally  true  with  bullets.  Put  a  man 
on  the  target  range,  where  no  danger  whatsoever  is  in- 
volved, and  he  may  fire  with  a  nice  degree  of  accuracy. 
Put  him  on  the  battle-field  with  a  great  number  of  bul- 
lets whizzing  around  his  head,  and  he  must  be  a  trained 
veteran  to  fire  with  the  same  accuracy.  This  is  true 
simply  because  we  have  been  made  that  way. 

The  volume  and  accuracy  of  fire  depend  upon  several 
considerations:  (a)  Of  primary  importance  is  the  num- 
ber of  rifles  employed.  Let  us  imagine  a  battle-line  one 
mile  long.  It  is  obvious  that  we  cannot  have  one  man 
firing  behind  another.  We  don't  want  to  destroy  our 
own  men.  They  must,  therefore,  be  placed  side  by  side. 
Each  man  must  have  sufficient  room  to  operate  his  rifle. 
JExperience  tells  us  that  we  must  not  have  more  than 


132         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

one  man  per  yard.  We  thus  see  that  our  battle-line 
of  a  mile  can  only  have  about  eighteen  hundred  rifles. 

(b)  The  rate  of  fire  affects  its  volume;  an  excessive 
rate  reduces  its  accuracy.  If  you  were  hunting  tigers, 
you  can  easily  imagine  where  one  well-aimed  and  well- 
timed  shot  could  be  of  more  use  to  you  and  more  harm 
to  the  tiger  than  half  a  dozen  shots  fired  too  rapidly. 

(c)  If  the  target  is  large,  is  clear  (can  be  easily  seen), 
and  is  but  a  short  distance  from  you,  your  fire,  for  rea- 
sons that  do  not  require  explanations,  can  be  more 
rapid.  Greater  density  increases  the  effect.  Suppose 
a  hundred  deer  were  grazing  on  a  hill;  you  would  be 
more  likely  to  kill  some  deer  than  if  only  a  half  dozen 
were  there  (d)  The  position  of  the  target  influences 
the  effect  of  fire.  Suppose  that  ten  men  were  lined  up 
in  a  row  against  a  wall  and  that  it  is  your  business  to 
kill  the  lot  with  a  rifle.  If  you  are  in  front  of  them,  ten 
shots  at  least  will  be  required.  But  it  is  possible  for  you 
to  take  a  position  in  prolongation  of  the  line  (on  its 
flank)  and  kill  the  entire  number  with  one  bullet.  (This 
also  illustrates  the  extreme  vulnerability  of  flanks.) 

What  are  the  important  steps  that  must  be  taken  if 
you  are  going  to  get  this  fire  superiority?  1st,  Fire  Di- 
rection.    2d,  Fire  Control.     3d,  Fire  Discipline. 

FIRE   DIRECTION 

A  company  that  cannot  start  firing  or  stop  firing,  that 
cannot  fire  faster  or  slower,  that  cannot  distribute 
equally  its  fire  over  an  opposing  target,  that  cannot 


FIRE  SUPERIORITY  133 

switch  its  fire  from  one  place  to  another  and  make  bull's- 
eyes,  would  be  as  unsuccessful  in  battle  to-day  as  Har- 
vard's football  team  would  be,  without  practice,  in  its 
final  game  with  Yale.  The  team  work  in  no  depart- 
ment of  athletics  is  as  necessary  or  vital  as  that  of  a 
military  force,  the  teamwork  of  a  military  machine. 
The  first  is  a  sport,  a  limited  time  being  involved.  The 
second  is  a  question  of  life  and  death  to  the  nation. 

It  requires  a  nice  and  cool  judgment,  under  actual 
conditions  of  war,  to  point  out  and  distribute  properly 
the  target  to  the  different  groups,  to  find  the  exact  range, 
and  give  all  these  instructions  (directions)  that  will  be 
necessary  to  produce  an  effective  fire  upon  the  enemy. 
Who  is  responsible  for  giving  these  instructions  (fire 
direction),  and  exactly  what  are  all  the  conditions  that 
must  be  fulfilled  in  order  that  each  individual  on  the 
firing  line  may  know  exactly  where  and  how  to  fire? 

The  captain  (company  commander)  is  responsible  for 
all.  In  the  military  world  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
shifting  responsibilities.  The  commander  assumes  full 
responsibility,  whether  things  go  right  or  wrong.  He 
must  handle  his  job  through  his  subordinates  (platoon 
leaders).  1st,  He  points  out  the  target  to  his  platoon 
leaders.  2d,  He  assigns  a  part  of  the  target  to  each 
platoon,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  entire  target  (ob- 
jective) will  be  covered  (fired  upon).  3d,  He  deter- 
mines and  gives  the  men  the  distance  to  the  objective 
(range).  4th,  He  indicates  the  kind  of  fire  to  be  em- 
ployed (that  is,  whether  each  man  will  fire  as  he  pleases, 


134        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

fire  five  shots  and  then  stop,  et  cetera).  5th,  He  indi- 
cates when  the  company  is  to  commence  firing.  6th, 
Thereafter  the  captain  observes  what  effect  his  com- 
pany's fire  is  producing,  and  corrects  flagrant  (material) 
errors.  He  prevents  the  exhaustion  of  his  ammunition 
and  distributes  such  extra  ammunition  as  may  be  re- 
ceived from  the  rear. 

FIRE   CONTROL 

We  have  just  described  what  the  captain  directs. 
Now  we  must  put  his  directions  (orders)  into  effect. 
This  is  done  through  his  platoon  leaders,  assisted  by  the 
platoon  guides  and  the  corporals.  1st,  The  platoon 
leaders  point  out  and  describe  their  part  of  the  objective 
(target)  to  the  corporals.  2d,  They  assign  a  particular 
part  of  the  objective  to  each  corporal  with  the  view  of 
covering  equally  with  the  fire  the  entire  objective.  3d, 
They  announce  the  range  (distance  to  the  objective)  to 
their  platoons.  4th,  If  any  part  of  the  line  cannot  see 
the  objective,  the  platoon  leaders  must  make  the  changes 
so  that  it  can  see,  or  so  that  its  fire  will  be  effective. 
5th,  They  order  their  platoons  to  open  fire  at  the  proper 
tin,e.  Thereafter  they  observe  the  target  and  make  any 
necessary  changes  to  keep  the  fire  effective,  i.e.,  fire 
fast  or  slow,  according  to  the  necessity,  and  are  on  the 
alert  for  any  commands  or  signals  from  the  captain. 

The  platoon  guides  do  one  thing  only:  they  watch 
the  firing  line  and  check  every  breach  of  fire  discipline. 
(See  "Fire  Discipline,"  below.) 


FIRE  SUPERIORITY  135 

The  corporals  have  four  distinct  duties.  1st,  They 
transmit  the  commands  and  signals  to  their  squads 
when  necessary.  2d,  They  observe  the  conduct  of  their 
squads  and  abate  excitement.  3d,  They  do  all  in  their 
power  to  enforce  discipline.  4th,  They  participate  in 
the  firing. 

FIRE  DISCIPLINE 

Now  we  come  to  the  individual  private  on  the  firing 
line.  All  of  the  above  measures  for  efficiency  will  come 
to  but  little  unless  the  man  with  the  gun  can  understand 
and  do  what  he  is  directed  to  do.  This  training  is  called 
Fire  Discipline. 

Fire  Discipline  implies,  besides  a  habit  of  obedience, 
a  control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier  (the  result  of  train- 
ing), which  will  enable  him  in  action  to  make  hits  in- 
stead of  misses.  It  embraces:  1st,  Taking  advantage 
of  the  ground.  2d,  Care  in  setting  the  sight  and  de- 
livery of  fire.  3d,  Constant  attention  to  the  orders  of 
the  leaders,  and  careful  observation  of  the  enemy.  4th, 
An  increase  of  fire  when  the  target  is  favorable,  and  a 
cessation  of  fire  when  the  enemy  disappears.  5th, 
Economy  of  ammunition. 

Summary 

Fire  Direction  is  the  issuance  of  instructions  regard- 
ing the  firing. 

Fire  Control  is  the  explanation  of  these  instructions 
through  the  platoon  leaders. 

Fire  Discipline  is  the  quality  which  enables  the  soldier 
to  submit  to  control  and  fire  efficiently  under  all  condi- 
tions* 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE  SERVICE  OF  SECURITY 

" Security''  has  the  same  meaning  in  the  military 
world  as  elsewhere.  We  properly  think  of  the  security 
of  our  persons,  our  property,  our  families  in  connection 
with  the  term.  In  the  military  world  the  family,  or 
community,  being  so  much  larger,  the  word  "security" 
acquires  additional  dignity. 

A  husband  and  father  provides  for  the  protection  of 
his  family  whether  at  home  or  abroad.  So  does  the 
military  commander  for  his  command,  whether  it  is  an 
army  or  a  squad;  whether  it  is  in  camp,  on  the  march, 
in  battle,  advancing  upon  or  retreating  from  the  enemy. 
The  end  desired  is  the  same  in  all  cases.  A  study  of  all 
the  measures  adopted  by  the  successful  generals  in  his- 
tory shows  that  the  means  are  not  very  different. 

A  body  of  troops  in  camp  is  protected  (made  secure) 
by  the  use  of  groups  placed  between  the  enemy  and  the 
camp.  We  were  told  by  a  bee  expert  in  Arizona  that 
a  limited  number  of  bees  remained  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
hive.  They  were  quick  to  observe  and  resist  (the  two 
great  duties  of  an  outpost)  any  intruder. 

Suppose  that  you  are  in  a  part  of  the  jungles  of 

136 


THE  SERVICE  OF  SECURITY        137 

Borneo  where  wild  Mohammedan  tribes  still  exist,  that 
you  have  had  a  strenuous  day's  march,  and  it  is  time  for 
you  to  halt  and  camp  for  the  night.  If  you  are  a 
thoughtful  and  experienced  hunter  you  will  pitch  your 
camp  where  its  protection  will  be  least  difficult.  A 
few  wild  men  may  severely  punish  you  for  a  lack  of 
judgment  in  the  matter.  They  may  probably  spring 
from  a  weak  and  unexpected  quarter  when  the  occasion 
is  least  favorable  for  you.  And  unless  the  members  of 
your  camp  know  that  you  have  exercised  wise  discretion, 
and  that  there  are  proper  measures  for  their  security, 
they  will  be  unable  to  obtain  the  needed  repose  for  the 
following  day's  work.  From  this  we  can  see  the  im- 
portant business  (function)  of  an  outpost. 

As  a  father  would  interpose  himself  between  his  wife 
and  children  and  an  attacking  bulldog,  so  would  a  mili- 
tary commander  provide  a  similar  protection  for  his 
camp.  We  see  from  this  one  of  the  big  duties  of  an 
outpost  commander,  i.e.,  especial  attention  should  be  de- 
voted to  the  direction  from  which  the  enemy  (bulldog) 
is  coming  or  is  thought  to  be  coming,  and  a  probably 
less  degree  of  attention  to  other  points, 

Consider  yourself  a  member  of  General  Sherman's 
army  during  its  march  from  the  North  on  Atlanta. 
You  are  to  camp  for  the  night  on  a  veiy  open  piece  of 
ground.  You  do  not  know  where  the  enemy  is,  but  you 
believe  that  he  is  somewhere  south  of  you.  The  troops 
are  tired.  They  have  had  a  long,  hard  march.  Let 
us  suppose  it  is  your  duty  to  provide  the  security  of  the 


138        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

main  body  for  the  night.  General  Sherman  has  given 
you  a  certain  number  of  men  for  this  purpose.  Just 
how  would  you  go  about  it  ? 

Regardless  of  other  considerations,  it  is  imperative 
that  your  own  main  force  be  not  surprised  or  caught 
off  guard  by  any  contingency,  however  exceptional. 
To  secure  this  immunity,  it  is  necessary  to  send  men  or 
groups  of  men  in  the  direction- of  the  probable  advance 
of  the  enemy,  and  to  arrange  these  men  or  groups  of 
men  so  that  they  can  be  of  assistance  to  each  other.  This 
we  call  forming  an  outpost. 

It  may  be  possible  to  have  a  line  of  protection  extend- 
ing around  the  entire  camp.  It  must  be  extended  and 
arranged  so  as  to  keep  the  enemy  so  far  away  from  our 
main  body  that  he  cannot  observe  our  numbers  or  our 
position.  The  enemy  must  not  be  permitted  to  ap- 
proach close  enough  to  the  main  body  to  annoy  or  sur- 
prise it.  Experience  shows  that  all  of  this  is  best  ac- 
complished by  placing:  1st,  some  groups  or  line  of 
groups  farthest  from  our  main  body  and  closest  to  the 
enemy  in  order  to  observe,  to  report  the  movements  of 
the  enemy,  and,  when  necessary,  to  make  a  temporary  re- 
sistance; 2d,  a  line  of  resistance  ("supporting  groups") 
called  "supports"  upon  which  the  first  line  can  retire 
before  being  swamped  by  superior  numbers;  3d,  large 
groups,  or  line  of  groups  ("line  of  reserves"),  so  lo- 
cated that  they  may  go  to  the  assistance  of  the  second 
line  in  case  of  necessity.  Such  arrangements  may  be 
illustrated  by  the  following  diagram. 


THE  SERVICE  OF  SECURITY        139 

PLATE  5HCWIN6  ™MAIN  IDEAS  INVOLVED  IN 'SECURITY 


Danger  zone 
Cavalry 


Danger  zone 

Cavalry 


Danger  zone. 
Cavalry 


Note  that  distances  from 
the  line  of  observation  to 
'the  mam  body  increase  as 
the  groups  increase  in  size 
The  reserves  are  the  largest 
'groups  The  groups  on  the 
line  of  observation  are  the 
smallest 


If  a  swamp,  or 
0  large  body  of 
water  here,  very 
small  groups  will 
afford  the  neces- 
sary security 


/t  is  most  impor- 
tant to  note  that 
the  groups  are  placed 
according  to  the  condi- 
tions and  c-nrumstnnces 
of  the  particular^  case 
Don  t  follow  any  blind  rules 
four  judgment  must  te//  you 
when  tv  place  th/s  group  here  ana 
not  fa  p/ace  that  group  there    Stave 
as  teyv  men   on   such  duty  as  prac- 


ticable 


If  a  forest,  or 
steep  h'lh  here, 
very  small  par- 
ties will  afford 
the  necessary 
security 


Assume    that    we  want    to   afford   security  for 
our  main   body    from    any    especially  dangerous 
sector  such    ais   ABC  Our  cavalry  is  in  front 

of  our  first    line  and   in    touch    with    the  enemy 
The^   danger  zone    represents    the  direction   tronn. 
which    the    enemy    is    expected. 


This  plan  must  be  modified  according  to  the  particular 
case.  Let  us  suppose  that  we  are  camping  by  a  large 
body  of  water,  or  that  we  are  surrounded  by  mountains. 


140         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

We  can  easily  imagine  where  we  could  change  the  above 
general  plan  so  as  to  give  adequate  protection  and  at 
the  same  time  lessen  the  number  of  men  detailed  for 
security.  We  must  never  forget  that  men  are  generally 
tired  when  they  arrive  in  camp,  and  that  we  should  make 
their  work  as  light  as  circumstances  permit.  It  requires 
a  nice  judgment  to  choose  the  correct  number  for  se- 
curity. 

We  should  know  the  names  of  these  groups.  Far- 
thest away  is  the  line  that  sees,  and  reports  what  it  sees, 
but  can  offer  only  a  limited  resistance.  This  is  called 
the  "line  of  observation"  or  the  "line  of  outguards." 
In  rear  of  the  line  of  outguards  we  have  larger  groups 
placed  at  greater  distances.  These  are  called  "sup- 
ports." This  is  the  line  that  rights.  This  is  the  line 
that  makes  extensive  preparations  for  righting  (or  re- 
sisting) .  It  is  called  the  "line  of  supports"  or  the  "line 
of  resistance."*  We  have  one  farther  and  last  line  of 
groups  which  is  still  larger  and  occupies  still  greater  dis- 
tances than  the  two  we  have  just  discussed.  This  is  the 
safety  valve  and  is  called  the  "reserve,"  or  the  "line  of  re- 
serves." This  is  the  line  that  gives  a  sound  factor  of 
safety.  It  will  only  be  called  upon  in  cases  of  emer- 
gency and  may  therefore  generally  enjoy  a  consider- 
able degree  of  repose.  But  it  and  the  line  of  supports 
combined  must  have  sufficient  strength  to  delay  the 
enemy,  in  case  of  a  general  attack,  long  enough  for  our 
main  body  to  form  for  battle. 

Let  us  look  at  the  line  of  outguards  for  further  im- 

*The  line  of  supports  and  the  line  of  resistance  need  not  necessarily  be  the 
same. 


THE  SERVICE  OF  SECURITY        141 

portant  considerations  and  distinctions.  The  enemy's 
movements  and  operations  should  ordinarily  he  ex- 
pected where  there  are  for  him  least  difficulties.  Large 
(dangerous)  bodies  of  troops  find  trouble  in  marshes, 
thick  forests,  steep  mountainous  country.  They  avoid 
these  obstacles  as  much  as  possible,  selecting  open  coun- 
try, solid  soil,  strong  bridges,  and  good  roads.  Here  is 
where  large  and  strong  groups  in  opposition  are  neces- 
sary. Small  and  unimportant  groups  (or  no  groups 
at  all)  should  be  placed  where  the  enemy's  advance  is 
exceptionally  difficult.  Finally,  there  will  be  places 
between  these  last  two  extremes  that  require  just  an 
average  amount  of  attention,  that  is  to  say,  require 
groups  of  medium  strength. 

The  groups  that  are  largest  and  are  used  at  the  im- 
portant places  where  danger  is  most  expected,  are  called 
"Pickets."  (These  consist  of  from  two  squads  of  eight 
men  each  to  eight  squads.)  The  least  important  groups 
are  called  "Cossack  Posts."  (These  consist  of  four 
men,  usually  a  noncommissioned  officer  and  three  pri- 
vates.) The  groups  of  average  importance  are  called 
"Sentry  Squads."  (These  consist  of  eight  men,  a  cor- 
poral and  seven  privates.) 

Having  discussed  in  broad  terms  the  security  of 
troops  in  camp,  we  are  prepared  to  consider  their  se- 
curity while  either  advancing  upon  or  retreating  from 
the  enemy.  In  either  case  groups  are  placed  between 
our  main  body  and  the  actual  or  supposed  position  of 
the  hostile  troops.     When  we  are  advancing  upon  an 


142        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

enemy  our  advanced  groups  constitute  what  we  term  the 
"advance  guard."  If  we  are  retreating  from  the  enemy, 
our  rear  groups  compose  the  "rear  guard." 

The  main  general  ideas  of  an  advance  guard  are  illus- 
trated by  the  husband  who  takes  his  wife  and  family  to 
his  house  after  an  evening's  absence.  The  house  is  dark 
and  without  occupants.  The  wife  and  children  are  ap- 
prehensive of  danger.  The  husband  goes  first,  turns 
on  the  light,  and  searches  for  any  indications  of  an  en- 
emy. He  looks,  if  desirable,  in  the  closets  and  under 
the  beds.  If  there  is  any  one  that  may  harm  his  family 
it  is  his  duty  to  find  out  and  dispose  of  him. 

In  the  advance  guard  we  have  exactly  the  same  gen- 
eral scheme  as  with  outposts.  Far  advanced  to  the 
front  (and  often  to  the  sides  or  flanks)  we  have  small 
groups  (called,  when  considered  collectively,  the  "ad- 
vance party")  whose  business  it  is  to  inform  us  of  the 
presence  of  the  enemy.  Next  we  have  a  large  group 
("support")  to  assist  these  small  and  rather  helpless 
ones  in  advance  in  case  of  difficulty.  And  last  we  have 
a  still  larger  group  ("reserve")  that  may  be  called  upon 
in  great  emergencies. 

We  should  fully  understand  that  all  these  groups  are 
out  to  accomplish  several  ends,  but  their  one  great  and 
ultimate  object  should  be  to  push  on  ahead  of  the  main 
body  so  that  it  may  be  secure  and  its  march  uninter- 
rupted. To  accomplish  this  it  is  desirable  to  get  all 
possible  information  about  the  enemy;  it  is  also  desir- 


THE  SERVICE  OF  SECURITY        143 

able  to  keep  him  from  getting  any  information  about 
your  own  troops. 

The  ideas  are  nearly  the  same  with  rear  guards. 
Note  this  important  difference:  if,  in  an  advance  upon 
the  enemy,  your  advance  guard  should  suddenly  be  fired 
upon,  your  main  body  would  (temporarily)  halt.  If, 
in  a  retreat,  your  rear  guard  is  halted  by  the  enemy's 
fire,  your  main  body  would  normally  be  marching  far- 
ther from  it.  In  the  first  case  assistance  is  near  at  hand. 
In  the  second  it  is  withdrawing.  The  rear  guard  in  a 
retreat  should  therefore  be  a  little  larger  than  in  an 
advance.  It  must  be  able  to  extricate  itself  from  any 
situation  however  difficult  or  it  loses  its  usefulness.  Its 
commander  should  have  a  cool,  level  head.  To  delay 
the  enemy  and  thus  assist  the  main  body  to  escape  is  his 
mission.  For  him  to  remain  too  long  in  a  good  position 
might  endanger  not  only  his  safety  but  that  of  the  main 
body  as  well. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE 

The  European  War  has  demonstrated  more  clearly 
than  ever  before  two  points  in  attack  and  defense, 
First,  no  people,  or  group  of  people,  can  claim  a  monop- 
oly on  bravery.  They  all  move  forward  and  give  up 
their  lives  with  the  same  utter  abandon.  Courage  being 
equal,  the  advantage  goes  to  him  in  the  attack  who  pos- 
sesses superior  leaders,  greater  training,  and  better 
equipment.  Second,  a  man's  training  and  courage,  his 
clear  eye  and  steady  nerve,  his  soul's  blood  and  iron, 
constitute  a  better  defense  than  steel  and  concrete. 

A  soldier  has  little  business  attacking  or  defending 
anything  in  this  day  unless  he  is  an  athlete,  unless  he  is 
skilled  in  the  technique  of  manoeuver,  unless  he  is  a  good 
shot,  unless  he  knows  the  value  of  many  features  of  the 
terrain  (which  means  the  nature  of  the  country — its 
hills,  rivers,  mountains,  depressions,  etc. — considered 
from  a  military  point  of  view),  unless  he  is  disciplined 
to  a  splendid  degree,  and  unless  his  training  has  im- 
bued him  with  an  irresistible  desire  to  push  forward,  to 
get  at  his  opponent.  Assuming,  at  least,  as  much  as 
this,  we  are  prepared  to  consider  the  subject  of  the  at- 
tack (the  offensive). 

To  have  your  troops  superior  in  number,  condition, 

144 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  145 

training,  equipment,  and  morale  to  that  of  your  enemy ; 
to  be  at  the  right  place,  at  the  right  time,  and  there  to 
deliver  a  smashing,  terrific  blow — this  is  the  greatest 
principle  of  the  attack.  And  history  shows  that  victory 
goes  more  often  to  him  who  attacks. 

Initiative  in  war  is  no  less  valuable  than  in  business 
life.  Become  at  once  imbued  with  the  desire  to  put 
"the  other  fellow"  on  the  defensive.  That  makes  him 
somewhat  dependent  upon  your  own  actions.  That 
gives  you  opportunities  to  fool  him  that  he  does  not  so 
fully  enjoy.  Your  commander  can  elect  to  attack  any 
point  of  the  defensive  line.  Your  dead  and  wounded — 
always  a  demoralizing  element — are  left  behind.  Your 
target  is  stationary.  Your  side  is  closing  in.  The  en- 
emy is  straining  every  nerve  to  fire  faster  and  more  ef- 
fectively, and  still  your  side  is  closing  in.  There  is  the 
thrill  of  motion. 

To  attack,  you  will  usually  require  a  greater  number 
of  troops  than  the  defense.  Why  so?  Because  you  will 
be  more  exposed.  You  will  have  to  move  forward,  how- 
ever dangerous  the  ground.  Your  enemy,  for  his  pro- 
tection, will  be  certain  to  utilize  and  improve  every  ad- 
vantage of  cover.  Your  losses  will  be  greater.  You 
should  have  a  greater  number  of  reserves  to  fill  the  de- 
pleted ranks.  If  the  defensive  can  maintain  a  better 
(superior)  fire,  that  is  to  say,  a  fire  that  kills  and  wounds 
i  greater  number  than  the  opposing  fire  (this  we  call 
fire  superiority),  he  will  stop  the  advance  of  the  attack- 
ing force  unless  that  force  is  so  superior  in  numbers  that 


146        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

it  can  send  forward  reinforcements  after  reinforcements 
as  an  ocean  sends  shoreward  its  series  of  waves. 

Suppose  that  you  were  in  command  of  a  group  of  men 
and  that  you  were  ordered  to  attack.  Just  what  prin- 
cipal points  should  you  weigh?  First,  you  should  avail 
yourself  of  every  opportunity  to  obtain  all  information 
of  military  value,  such  as  the  enemy's  strength,  his  po- 
sition, and  intentions.  For  this  you  would  have  to  send 
out  groups  of  reconnoitering  patrols  exceptionally 
skilled  in  woodcraft,  or  trained  to  gather  information. 
As  soon  as  such  information  as  is  available  is  reported 
to  you,  you  should  at  once  begin  the  consideration  of 
all  the  important  elements  that  affect  your  problem. 
You  must  not  lose  sight  of  what  you  were  sent  out  to 
do  (your  mission).  Consider  how  this  and  that  fact 
bear  upon  your  course  of  action  (estimate  the  situation) . 
For  instance :  the  enemy's  force  is  reported  to  be  greatly 
inferior  to  your  own.  He  is  out  of  supplies.  He  is 
greatly  fatigued  with  forced  marches.  His  morale  is 
shattered  on  account  of  recent  and  frequent  reverses. 
His  camp  is  disorganized.  It  is  poorly  guarded.  Cer- 
tain roads  are  in  fine  condition.  Others  are  very  poor. 
Your  troops  are  in  splendid  shape  and  excellent  spirits. 
They  believe  that  they  can  crush  the  enemy  and  want  to 
attack.  As  you  easily  see,  all  such  points  have  great 
significance  in  sizing  up  the  case  (estimating  the  situa- 
tion) . 

Having  estimated  the  situation,  you  should  investi- 
gate and  consider  all  possible  courses  of  attack  that  are 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  147 

open  to  you.  Don't  ask  any  advice  from  any  one.  Se- 
lect the  course  that  appears  to  offer  the  greatest  chance 
of  success.  Make  up  your  mind  what  you  are  going  to 
do  (come  to  a  decision). 

Having  come  to  a  decision,  stick  to  it,  right  or  wrong. 
Your  next  and  final  thing  to  do  is  to  put  your  decision 
into  action.  To  do  that,  give  your  subordinates  the  in- 
formation they  should  possess;  tell  them  what  you  are 
going  to  do  and  how  you  are  going  to  do  it;  i.e.,  issue 
your  orders. 

A  study  of  the  orders  of  successful  generals  in  history 
teaches  us  that  we  will  be  greatly  aided  in  issuing  them, 
if  we  will  observe  a  system.  We  understand  an  order 
more  easily  and  quickly  if  it  conforms  to  some  plan  with 
which  we  are  familiar. 

In  order  to  give  your  group  an  opportunity  to  act 
with  a  greater  degree  of  teamwork,  and  intelligence  in 
case  of  an  emergency,  it  is  necessary  to  give  it  data  (in- 
formation) concerning  the  enemy.  Your  men  should 
know  where  there  are  friendly  troops.  Now  tell  them 
what  you  are  going  to  do  (your  plan),  whether  it  be  to 
attack,  retire,  or  assume  the  defensive.  And  then  or- 
der the  execution  of  that  plan  by  assigning  to  each 
group  its  task.  Next  tell  (direct)  what  is  to  be  done 
with  the  wagons  (trains) ,  and  last,  state  where  you  may 
be  found  at  any  time  in  case  of  need  or  where  messages 
may  be  sent  to  you. 

Having  issued  the  order,  let  us  now  observe  the  prog- 
ress of  the  attack.     You  are  probably  three  or  four  thou- 


148        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

sand  yards  from  the  enemy.  His  position  is  invisible. 
His  artillery  has  opened  fire.  Your  artillery  is  reply- 
ing. The  troops  must  advance  cautiously  over  exposed 
ground.  They  are  not  firing.  They  are  not  deployed 
for  action  (in  battle  line).  They  are  waiting  to  get 
within  as  short  a  distance  of  the  enemy's  line  as  possible, 
for  their  ammunition  is  limited;  and  after  troops  are 
actually  launched  in  the  attack,  control  over  them,  for 
ordinary  purposes,  is  practically  lost.  The  farther  from 
the  enemy  the  attack  is  launched,  the  longer  the  ex- 
posure to  their  fire  and  the  greater  the  number  of  casu- 
alties, so  the  leaders  of  the  different  groups  are  taking 
advantage  of  all  the  accidents  of  the  ground,  of  all  cover 
in  advancing.  They  are  using  one  formation  here,  an- 
other there,  with  a  view  to  minimizing  the  losses  and 
reaching  an  advantageous  position  as  soon  as  possible 
where  they  can  open  an  effective  fire  on  the  enemy. 

Now  the  enemy's  fire  is  severe.  Casualties  are  be- 
coming heavy.  The  men  are  growing  restless.  It  is 
necessary  to  return  the  fire.  Fire  superiority  should 
be  gained  at  once.  Don't  move  forward  until  you  gain 
it.  If  difficult  to  gain,  use  every  means  at  your  dis- 
posal. When  you  have  it,  keep  it.  Part  of  your  men 
can  advance  when  your  side  has  fire  superiority.  The 
remainder  of  the  firing  line  should  fire  faster  to  main- 
tain that  superiority.  If  you  lose  fire  superiority,  re- 
gain it.  If  necessary,  troops  from  the  rear  will  gen- 
erally be  sent  forward. 

Now  you  are  approaching  the  point  where  the  charge 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  149 

is  to  be  made.  Bayonets  are  fixed;  not  all  at  qne  time, 
for  that  would  affect  the  advantage  that  you  possess  with 
your  fire.  Groups  that  have  been  held  back  in  support 
are  advanced.  These  are  to  be  used  at  decisive  mo- 
ments. They  are  held  well  in  hand.  The  firing  line 
is  lost  in  noise  and  confusion.  Not  so  the  supports; 
control  is  exercised  over  them.  If  they  are  not  used  in 
the  attack  the}'  can  be  used  to  great  advantage  to  com- 
plete the  discomfort  of  the  enemy  after  the  clash 
(shock). 

There  is  at  last,  if  the  enemy  remains  in  his  position, 
the  clash.  Bayonet  against  bayonet,  man  against  man, 
nerve  against  nerve.  Apply  the  great  principle  of  at- 
tack and  decide  for  yourself  who  the  victor  will  be.  If 
successful,  then  organize  your  men  and  prepare  for  the 
pursuit  or  for  the  return  (counter  attack)  of  the  enemy. 

Now  you  are  to  handle  groups  on  the  defense.  You 
must  bear  in  mind  that  there  are  two  kinds  of  defense : 
first,  where  you  do  nothing  but  defend  (passive  de- 
fense) ;  second,  where  you  defend,  but  temporarily,  with 
the  idea  of  attacking  the  enemy  as  soon  as  a  favorable 
opportunity  arises  (active  defense).  Let  us  assmne 
that  you  have  been  ordered  by  superior  authority  to 
locate  and  prepare  a  definite  position  to  check  the  ad- 
vance of  an  enemy.  Just  what  main  points  should  you 
bear  in  mind?  Suppose  you  have  found  an  ideal  posi- 
tion; what  conditions  should  it  fulfil?  You  should  be 
able  to  see  the  enemy  long  before  he  arrives  at  your 
position.     Intervening  objects  and  trees  would  make 


150        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

that  impossible.  You  should  be  hidden  from  his  view. 
The  ends  of  your  lines  (your  flanks)  should  rest,  if  pos- 
sible, on  ground  easy  to  defend;  for  instance,  a  high 
mountain,  a  large  body  of  water,  or  an  impassable 
swamp.  A  few  acres  of  ground  will  not  hold  tens  of 
thousands  of  men.  Therefore  the  extent  of  the  ground 
must  be  suitable  for  the  size  of  your  group  (force  or 
command).  It  would  be  of  great  advantage  to  have 
such  cover  that  one  group  (for  instance,  a  support) 
could  move  from  this  position  to  that  without  danger  of 
being  fired  upon  or  observed.  A  wise  general  has  plans 
for  any  contingency.  He  is  either  going  to  win  or  he  is 
not  going  to  win.  If  he  loses,  he  should  have  a  means 
of  escape  (retreat) .  In  selecting  his  position  he  should 
place  it  where  the  enemy  must  attack  or  give  up  his 
mission.  Verdun  had  to  be  attacked  before  the  ad- 
vance on  Paris  from  the  east  was  practicable. 

In  defense  there  is  a  generous  allowance  of  advan- 
tages. Usually  you  have  time  to  select  and  prepare 
your  position.  By  preparing  a  position  we  mean,  you 
can  dig  trenches,  destroy  intervening  objects  that  ob- 
struct the  view  of  what  you  should  see,  construct  ob- 
stacles that  will  embarrass  the  enemy  in  his  advance, 
estimate  (or  determine)  distances  to  important  places. 
You  have  opportunities  for  collecting  ammunition,  ar- 
ranging wires  for  communication,  establishing  stations 
for  the  wounded.  Troops  in  motion  are  easier  to  see. 
You  are  not  called  upon  for  as  much  physical  strain  as 
the  attacking  troops.     You  are  less  fatigued.     Your 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  151 

machine  guns  are  better  concealed  and  the  gunners  know 
the  ranges  better  than  those  of  the  attack. 

But  it  is  most  distressing  to  a  man  on  the  defense  to 
see  the  enemy,  regardless  of  everything  he  can  do,  ad- 
vance step  by  step.  He  begins  to  question  within  him- 
self the  efficacy  of  his  fire,  which  is  to  doubt  his  own 
ability.  The  more  he  questions  and  worries,  the  less 
effective  his  aim  becomes.  His  comrades  are  dead  and 
wounded  about  him.  Their  cries  of  distress  are  heard 
above  the  noise  and  confusion  of  battle.  He  becomes 
less  methodical  and  deliberate  in  his  actions.  His  shoot- 
ing becomes  high  and  wild.  This  becomes  generally 
true.     The  attacking  force  gains  fire  superiority. 

Suppose  that  it  is  actually  your  business  to  construct 
a  defensive  position.  Just  how  will  you  assign  the 
tasks?  What  are  the  important  things  to  be  done  at 
first,  and  what,  if  time  is  pressing,  may  with  least  hard- 
ship be  omitted?  You  would  first  cut  down  trees,  blow 
up  buildings,  destroy  crops  that  prevented  you  from 
seeing  in  any  direction  of  danger.  Next  you  should 
provide  protection  (concealment  and  cover),  so  that 
there  will  be  as  few  casualties  as  possible.  Then  do 
what  is  in  your  power  to  make  it  most  difficult  for  the 
enemy  to  arrive  at  your  position;  i.e.,  construct  some 
barbwire  fences  (entanglements)  that  he  will  be  unable 
to  cross.  Have  your  expert  range  finders  determine 
and  make  notes  of  the  distances  to  important  points 
from  which  the  enemy  must  advance.  Next,  dig  ditches 
(trenches)  so  that  your  groups  (supports  or  reserves) 


152        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL, 

may  pass  from  one  point  to  another  without  danger. 
Now  take  steps  to  protect  your  most  vital  and  vulner- 
able points,  your  flanks.  Have  them  so  strong,  if  prac- 
ticable, that  the  enemy  will  leave  them  alone.  Assign 
to  each  group  of  men  a  section  of  the  ground  to  defend. 
Having  done  these  important  things,  then  go  about  those 
things  that  will  make  you  more  comfortable  in  the 
trenches. 


CHAPTER  IX 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE 

The  most  thrilling  experience  you  will  have  at  a  train- 
ing camp  will  probably  come  when  you  step  up  to  the 
firing  line  on  the  target  range  to  fire  your  first  shot. 
The  great  majority  of  new  men  grow  pale,  become 
nervous,  lose  their  calm  and  poise,  while  they  are  on 
the  firing  line.  This  is  a  fact,  not  a  theory.  And  this 
loss  of  nerve  is  not  confined  to  the  new  man.  Any  shot, 
however  old  and  experienced,  will  tell  you  that  he  fulty 
understands  what  we  have  just  described. 

To  become  a  good  shot,  we  must  solve  a  mental  con- 
dition that  corresponds  in  a  way  to  that  of  beginners  in 
golf.     And  we  must  master  some  details  in  technique. 

We  should  know  something  about  the  machine  (rifle) 
we  are  to  operate.  We  must  know  wThat  the  sights  are 
and  how  to  use  them.  We  should  know  how  those  men 
most  successful  in  the  science  and  art  of  shooting  hold 
the  rifle  under  different  conditions,  how  they  adjust  their 
slings,  how  they  prepare  (blacken)  their  sights  and  care 
for  their  rifles,  what  practice  and  preparation  they  take, 
and  what  bits  of  advice  thev  have  to  offer. 

The  primitive  man  had  no  means  of  accurately  aiming 
his  crude  devices  to  throw  stones.  But  in  this  dav  and 
age  we  have.     The  modern  rifle  is  one  of  the  most  per- 

153 


154        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

feet  pieces  of  scientific  machinery  in  the  world.  Very 
shortly  after  you  arrive  in  camp  your  captain  will  ex- 
plain to  you  its  sights  and  how  they  are  adjusted.  He 
has  a  sighting  bar  for  that  purpose.  It  will  take  you 
only  a  few  minutes  to  grasp  the  subject  when  you  have 
a  rifle  in  your  hands,  and  your  instructor  is  pointing  out 
and  explaining  just  what  you  should  know.  On  paper 
it  seems  to  be  hard. 

Now  you  will  want  to  learn  how  to  load  your  piece 
(rifle),  work  your  bolt,  and  squeeze  the  trigger.  Sim- 
ple as  these  points  may  seem,  you  will  have  something 
to  learn  after  you  have  been  at  it  ten  years.  Practise! 
practise!  practise!  Sit  on  your  bunk  and  work  your 
bolt  ten  thousand  times  before  you  go  on  the  range. 
Get  in  the  habit  of  doing  it  quickly.  Learn  to  keep 
your  piece  at  your  shoulder  while  you  pull  the  bolt  back 
and  push  it  home.  Learn  to  make  the  fewest  possible 
motions  of  your  body  in  working  it.  To  pull  a  bolt 
back  and  push  it  forward  seems  to  be  a  simple  thing 
to  do.  It  is  simple.  But  when  you  are  actually  firing 
at  the  target,  experience  tells  you  that  you  will  have 
more  trouble  and  a  greater  collection  of  hard  luck  stories 
to  amuse  your  friends  with  than  you  ever  imagined  pos- 
sible, unless  you  have  had  plenty  of  practice. 

To  squeeze  a  trigger  seems  to  be  a  simple  thing  to  do. 
It  is  simple.  But  after  you  have  been  squeezing  trig- 
gers for  twenty  years  you  will  have  something  more  to 
learn  about  it.  Ninety-five  per  cent,  of  the  failures  on 
the  target  range  in  the  training  camps  come  from  not 


rv 


TARGET  PRACTICE  155 

squeezing  the  trigger  properly.  You  can't  learn  how  to 
squeeze  it  on  paper.  You  have  got  to  practise.  Every 
time  you  work  your  bolt,  squeeze  your  trigger.  Get  in 
some  extra  "squeezes."  You  will  find  that  your  whole 
muscular  and  nervous  system  will  need  to  be  co- 
ordinated and  harmonized.  After  you  have  been  long 
about  it  you  will  find  an  extreme  delicacy  in  its  opera- 
tion. You  will  find  that  it  requires  a  great  deal  more 
than  a  finger.  All  the  muscles  of  your  hand  and  arm 
will  be  required.  We  cannot  overemphasize  the  impor- 
tance of  squeezing  your  trigger.  When  you  learn  to  do 
this  without  jumping  (flinching),  without  moving  an 
eyelash,  you  are  making  progress  and  are  prepared  for 
more  advanced  work. 

Why  do  you  suppose  we  have  "gallery  practice,"  i.e., 
practice  with  a  greatly  reduced  charge  of  powder? 
Simply  to  determine  and  correct  your  errors.  We  as- 
sume that  you  have  normal  sight  and  that  you  are  in 
fair  physical  condition.  Suppose  that  you  make  a  per- 
fect score.  What  conditions  must  you  fulfil?  1st, 
You  must  aim  in  exactly  the  same  way  every  time.  2d, 
At  the  instant  of  firing  your  body  must  be  in  perfect 
repose.  3d,  You  must  squeeze  your  trigger  properly 
(without  a  jerk) . 

You  could  not  aim  exactly  the  same  way  every  time 
unless  you  understood  your  sights  and  unless  you  could 
see  them  plainly.  You  will  be  told  to  blacken  them. 
Many  forget  and  fail  to  do  this.  They  do  not  fully 
realize  that  the  sights  are  much  easier  to  see  when  black- 


156        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

ened,  and  that  therefore  the  chances  of  hitting  the  bull's- 
eye  are  much  greater.  There  's  no  more  luck  in  shoot- 
ing than  there  is  in  solving  a  problem  in  geometry,  or  in 
a  game  of  billiards.  It 's  all  practice,  nerve,  and  sci- 
ence. 

Your  body  cannot  be  in  repose  at  the  instant  you  fire 
unless  you  have  your  sling  properly  adjusted,  unless 
you  are  reasonably  comfortable  (not  constrained),  and 
unless  you,  temporarily,  stop  breathing.  Your  body 
must  be,  for  an  instant,  a  vise.  Any  trivial  thing  such 
as  a  puff  of  wind,  a  jerk  of  the  trigger,  or  a  noise  near 
you,  will  ordinarily  change  your  hold  and  throw  you 
off  the  bull's-eye. 

Suppose  you  are  making  a  poor  score.  What  is  the 
trouble?  In  the  first  place  don't  blame  it  on  the  rifle 
or  the  ammunition.  Assume  full  responsibility  your- 
self. You  are  the  responsible  party.  Practise  a  great 
deal  and  see  if  you  can  locate  the  fault.  If  you  cannot, 
your  captain  will  assist  you. 

When  we  go  from  gallery  practice  to  the  target 
range,  where  we  fire  the  service  rifle  with  the  service 
charge,  we  find  a  great  difference  in  the  recoil  of  the 
rifle  and  in  the  sound.  The  good  Lord  has  made  our 
muscles  and  nervous  system  to  react  automatically  at 
danger  or  anything  connected  with  it.  That  is  prob- 
ably why  we  shudder  and  close  our  eyes  when  a  door  is 
slammed  very  near  to  us.  But  sound,  unless  we  get  too 
close,  does  not  hurt  any  one,  and  we  should  steel  our 


TARGET  PRACTICE  157 

nerves  to  remember  that  fact  when  we  are  firing.  We 
also  know  that  there  is  going  to  be  a  certain  amount  of 
recoil  of  the  rifle.  But  if  you  will  hold  your  sling  as 
you  have  been  instructed,  if  you  will  provide  yourself 
with  proper  elbow  and  shoulder  padding,  the  authors  of 
this  text  assure  you  that  you  will  experience  no  pain  or 
harm  from  the  recoil.  It  is  their  judgment  that  if  you 
are  healthy  and  can  see  and  will  go  on  the  range  with 
your  jaws  set  to  fire  with  anything  like  j^our  gallery 
practice  coolness,  and  calmness,  you  will  qualify.  Your 
greatest  stumbling  block  will  be  your  rapid  fire.  This 
is  where  you  fire  a  definite  number  of  shots  in  a  limited 
time.  And  this  is  where  you  will  experience  the  extreme 
amount  of  nervousness. 

When  you  return  from  firing  your  first  score  at  rapid 
fire,  and  have  had  time  to  think  calmly  over  your  ac- 
tions, you  will  probably  realize  that  your  nerves  were 
pitched  up  in  G  and  that  you  did  a  number  of  foolish 
things.  You  should  realize  that  you  are  not  an  excep- 
tional man.  Ninety-nine  out  of  every  hundred  normal, 
virile  men  are  more  or  less  nervous  when  they  first  step 
up  for  rapid  fire.  Practice  and  will  power  are  the  cor- 
rectives. 

Let  us  suppose  that  you  have  ten  shots  to  fire  in  two 
minutes.  If  you  fire  your  ten  shots  in  one  minute  it  is 
plain  that  you  return  unused  one  minute  given  to  you. 
This  minute  may  have  been  of  great  use  to  you  in  get- 
ting closer  to  the  bull's-eye.     If  you  fire  at  the  rate  of 


158        THE  PLATT8BURG  MANUAL 

ten  shots  in  three  minutes,  it  is  plain  that  when  your 
two  minutes  shall  have  expired  you  have  missed  the  op- 
portunity of  firing  four  times  at  the  bull's-eye. 

Get  one  of  your  bunkies  to  go  back  of  your  tent  and 
time  you.  Then  swap  about  and  you  hold  the  watch 
for  him.  Tiy  to  make  of  yourself  a  machine  that  fin- 
ishes the  ten  shots  just  before  the  time  expires. 

And  here  is  a  little  rule  of  thumb  we  want  you  to  bear 
constantly  in  mind  while  you  are  having  rapid  fire: 
Load  your  piece  quickly,  but  aim  and  squeeze  your  trig- 
ger deliberately.     Keep  cool. 

The  best  shot  in  the  company  is  the  man  who  prac- 
tises the  most. 


CHAPTER  X 

PRACTICE  MARCH  OR  "HIKE" 

The  manoeuver  practice  march  will  be  the  most 
instructive,  the  most  pleasant,  and  one  of  the  hard- 
est periods  of  your  service.  You  will  return  from  it 
proud  of  the  hardships  you  have  undergone  and  capable 
of  speaking  with  authority  on  many  practical  matters 
pertaining  to  soldiering.  You  will  be  able  to  amuse 
yourself  and  your  friends  with  reminiscences  of  the 
many  incidents  which  you  will  never  forget.  It  is  dur- 
ing the  practice  march  that  you  will  put  into  practical 
use  the  tactical  principles  and  battle  formations  of  which, 
up  to  that  time,  you  will  have  heard  at  lectures,  or  which 
vou  will  have  executed  in  a  mechanical  manner  at  drill. 

at 

You  will  return  from  each  march  with  a  knowledge  of 
many  practical  points  on  camp  sanitation,  of  the  pleas- 
ures and  hardships  incident  to  manoeuver  warfare,  and 
of  the  manner  in  which  a  soldier  adapts  himself  to 
changing  conditions,  all  of  which  cannot  be  learned 
from  books  or  lectures. 

The  practice  march  demands  a  large  expenditure  of 
physical  and  mental  energy ;  however,  the  hardships  are 
greatly  exaggerated  by  the  old  soldiers.  To  make 
up  a  set  of  equipment,  to  assist  in  cleaning  up  camp 
and  loading  trucks,  to  march  and  fight  for  a  distance 

158 


160        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

of  ten  or  twelve  miles  while  carrying  a  heavy  pack  on 
the  back  and  a  nine-pound  gun  on  the  shoulder,  and 
upon  reaching  camp  to  pitch  your  tent,  make  up  your 
bed,  do  some  fatigue  work,  and  probably  some  guard 
duty  in  addition,  all  in  one  day,  is  a  hard  physical  strain 
on  the  average  man.  By  obeying  implicitly  the  advice 
of  your  company  commander,  you  will  greatly  lessen 
the  hardships  incident  to  a  practice  march,  and  by  dis- 
obeying it  you  may  possibly  undergo  the  mortification 
of  having  to  drop  out  of  ranks  and  be  jeered  at  by  the 
passing  column.  The  following  suggestions,  if  fol- 
lowed implicitly,  will  lessen  the  hardship  of  the  "hike." 

MARCHING  RULES 

1.  Adjust  your  equipment,  if  necessaiy,  at  the  first 
halt. 

2.  Do  not  leave  the  column  without  the  express  per- 
mission of  your  company  commander. 

3.  Keep  in  your  proper  place  in  the  column. 

4.  Keep  fort}7  inches  from  the  man  in  front  of  you. 

HALTS 

Halts  are  made  for  the  purj)ose  of  resting.  Take  ad- 
vantage of  the  opportunity  by  sitting  down  at  once 
along  the  side  of  the  road  near  the  place  where  your 
squad  will  form  when  the  march  is  resumed.  Remain 
seated  until  the  command  to  fall  in  is  given. 

Sit  down  in  such  a  way  that  you  do  not  support  the 
weight  of  the  pack  on  your  shoulders  while  resting. 


PRACTICE  MARCH  OR     HIKE"       161 

Don't  go  wandering  off  into  people's  yards  or  orchards. 
Relax  as  completely  as  possible.  Get  into  place  imme- 
diately when  the  signal  is  given. 

CAMPING 

Two  men  tent  together — the  front  rank  man  and  hi* 
rear  rank  file.  After  pitching  your  tent,  get  inside  and 
level  off  the  ground.  Cut  a  drain  around  the  tent  to 
carry  the  water  off;  this  should  be  done  even  in  pleasant 
weather.  In  case  you  do  not  trench  your  tent  and  a 
sudden  rain  comes,  your  blankets  may  get  wet  and  you 
will  probably  lose  some  much-needed  rest  and  sleep.  If 
the  tent  pins  will  not  stay  in  the  ground,  cut  some  small 
sticks  to  a  length  of  about  twelve  inches  and  use  them  as 
tent  pins. 

PREPARING   YOUR   BED 

After  you  have  pitched  your  tent,  get  some  hay, 
grass,  straw,  or  leaves  and  cover  the  floor.  Place  one 
poncho  on  this,  then  one  or  two  blankets  on  top  of  the 
poncho  to  sleep  on,  and  use  the  remaining  blankets  as 
cover.  Spread  the  other  poncho  over  the  tent.  Many 
men  are  careless  about  making  a  comfortable  bed.  You 
will  be  rewarded  with  large  dividends  if  you  are  zealous 
in  making  yourself  comfortable.  Arrange  your  equip- 
ment at  the  rear  just  under  the  small  triangle.  Get 
your  meat  can,  knife,  fork,  spoon,  and  tin  cup  out  where 
they  will  be  handy. 


162        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

MAKING   UP   YOUR  PACK 

Immediately  after  reveille,  take  down  your  tent  and 
make  up  your  pack.  Place  your  extra  blankets  on  the 
pile  with  those  of  the  other  members  of  your  squad. 
Make  up  your  surplus  kit  bundle  and  put  it  in  the  sur- 
plus kit  bag. 

WATER 

Fill  your  canteen  each  evening,  as  the  water  wagons 
sometimes  do  not  reach  camp  before  the  morning  march 
is  commenced.  Excessive  water  drinking  on  the  march 
is  the  besetting  sin  of  the  inexperienced  soldier.  One 
swallow  of  water  calls  for  another.  Soon  your  canteen 
is  empty.  Your  stomach  feels  uncomfortable.  You 
are  still  thirsty.  If  it  is  necessary  to  replace  some  of 
the  water  of  the  body  which  is  lost  by  perspiration,  and 
this  is  often  necessary,  first  gargle  out  the  mouth  and 
throat  and  spit  the  water  out;  then  take  a  swallow  or 
two,  but  be  careful  not  to  drink  to  excess.  Injudicious 
and  excessive  water  drinking  fills  the  hospital  ambu- 
lances and  auto  trucks  with  men  who  should  be  in  ranks. 
One  half  a  canteen  of  water  is  sufficient  for  you  on  any 
march  you  will  have  to  make.  After  you  arrive  in  camp 
and  have  cooled  off  a  little,  drink  as  much  water  as  you 
desire,  but  do  so  slowly. 

CARE   OF  THE  FEET 

The  infantryman's  feet  are  his  means  of  transporta- 
tion. If  you  care  for  them  properly,  you  will  be  re- 
warded. 


PRACTICE  MARCH  OR  "HIKE"       163 

1.  Wash  and  dry  the  feet  carefully  and  put  on  clean 
socks  as  soon  as  practicable  after  getting  into  camp. 

2.  Wash  out  the  socks  you  have  been  wearing  and 
hang  them  out  to  dry. 

3.  Do  not  wear  socks  with  holes  in  them  if  you  can 
possibly  avoid  it.  Should  a  hole  begin  to  cause  rub- 
bing, turn  the  sock  inside  out  or  change  it  to  the  other 
foot. 

4.  Just  as  soon  as  you  decide  to  attend  a  training 
camp  or  join  the  colors,  cut  your  toe  nails  square  across 
the  ends  so  they  will  not  grow  in. 

5.  In  case  of  any  foot  trouble  that  you  cannot  relieve, 
report  to  the  surgeon  at  once.  Don't  wait  until  you 
cannot  march  before  reporting. 

6.  A  Treatment  for  Blisters.  Be  careful  not  to 
tear  off  the  skin  covering  the  blister.  Heat  the  point 
of  a  needle  until  it  is  red  hot  and  when  it  cools  insert  it 
under  the  live  skin  a  little  distance  away  from  the  blister. 
Push  it  through  to  the  under  side  of  the  bruised  skin  or 
blister  and  then  press  out  the  water.  To  protect  the 
blister,  grease  a  small  piece  of  chamois  with  vaseline  and 
place  it  so  that  it  covers  the  blister  and  extends  over 
on  the  solid  skin  surrounding  it.  Then  place  a"  piece  of 
oxide  adhesive  tape  over  the  chamois.  This  method  al- 
lows the  protective  covering  to  be  removed  without  rup- 
turing the  skin  over  the  blister  and  protects  the  new 
tender  and  sensitive  skin  so  that  the  weight  can  be  rested 
upon  the  foot  without  causing  severe  pain.  One  man 
in  each  squad  should  be  provided  with  a  needle,  adhesive 


164        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

tape,  a  bottle  of  vaseline,  and  a  piece  of  chamois  for  the 
common  use  of  the  squad. 
7.  Shoes. 

a.  Be  sure  they  fit  your  feet.     The  business  shoe 

you  wear  at  the  office  won't  do  for  marching 
when,  with  the  additional  weight  you  carry, 
your  foot  spreads  in  breadth  and  extends  in 
length;  hence  your  marching  shoes  should  be 
longer  and  broader  than  your  business  shoes. 
This  is  a  very  important  item  and  should  not 
be  neglected.  If  your  shoes  are  too  large, 
blisters  will  result ;  if  too  small,  your  foot  will 
be  cramped,  and  every  step  will  be  painful. 

b.  Break  your  shoes  in  prior  to  the  practice  march. 

c.  Keep  your  shoes  well  oiled  so  they  will  be  soft 

and  pliable  and  keep  out  water. 

d.  If  your  shoes  get  wet  on  the  inside  heat  some 

small  pebbles  (not  so  hot  as  to  burn  leather) 
and  keep  them  inside  the  shoes  until  dry. 

CAMP    SANITATION 

In  camp  you  are  really  your  brother's  keeper.  It  is 
the  duty  of  every  man  to  keep  the  camp  clean,  sanitary,- 
and  livable.  Constantly  bear  in  mind  that  a  great 
number  of  men  are  living  together  in  a  very  small  area ; 
that  food  is  being  prepared  in  the  open;  that  there  are 
no  sewers ;  and  that  the  ground  or  dust  and  streams  must 
not  be  polluted.  Obey  conscientiously  and  diligently 
the  following  rules : 


PRACTICE  MARCH  OR  "HIKE"       165 

1.  Don't  take  food  to  your  tent. 

2.  Use  the  latrines  that  are  provided. 

3.  When  possible  bathe  each  day  as  soon  as  prac- 
ticable after  you  arrive  at  camp. 

4.  Don't  throw  food  or  fruit  peeling  on  the  ground. 

5.  Dispose  of  any  food  you  cannot  eat  by  burning 
in  the  kitchen  incinerator. 

6.  Keep  away  from  the  kitchen  and  cooks. 

7.  Don't  dip  your  cup  in  the  drinking  water  re- 
ceptacle. Use  the  dipper  provided  for  that  pur- 
pose. 

8.  If  sick,  report  to  a  surgeon. 

9.  Don't  litter  up  the  camp  with  paper. 

10.  Get  your  drinking  water  and  bathe  at  the  author- 
ized places.  The  camp  commander  always  designates 
different  places  for  cooking  and  drinking  water,  for 
watering  the  animals,  for  bathing  and  washing 
clothes. 

11.  On  leaving  camp  the  ground  should  be  in  better 
condition  than  when  you  arrived.  All  sinks,  latrines, 
ditches,  and  holes  are  rilled  and  the  earth  stamped 
down;  all  combustibles  that  have  no  value  should  be 
burned  and  noncombustible  matter  either  buried  or  piled 
so  it  can  be  carted  away. 

12.  All  deposits  in  the  rears  should  be  covered  with 
earth. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

1.  Take  great  pains  each  morning  to  make  a  neat, 
small  and  solid  pack  and  strap  it  up  securely. 


166        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

2.  Don't  put  your  pack  on  until  ordered  to  do  so  by 
your  company  commander  or  first  sergeant. 

3.  Get  your  pack  properly  adjusted. 

4.  Don't  take  your  equipment  off  during  the  halts 
allowed  for  resting. 

5.  Don't  eat  anything  or  patronize  the  soft  drink 
stand  during  a  march. 

6.  Retire  early  and  get  a  good  night's  rest. 

7.  Use  only  heavy  or  light  wool  socks  and  see  that 
they  fit  perfectly.  If  you  cannot  wear  wool  socks,  try 
cotton  and  then  silk  socks. 

8.  Don't  overeat  or  overdrink. 

9.  A  light  pair  of  sneakers  or  canvas  tennis  shoes 
are  serviceable  for  camp  wear  in  the  afternoons  and  are 
restful  to  the  feet. 

10.  Each  morning  sprinkle  a  little  talcum  powder  or 
footease  in  the  shoes. 

11.  Keep  the  bowels  functioning  properly.  Should 
you  become  constipated,  report  to  the  doctor  for  medi- 
cine before  you  begin  to  feel  badly. 

12.  Clean  your  mess  kit  immediately  after  each  meal. 

13.  Respect  the  property  of  others. 

EQUIPMENT 

During  the  hike  your  equipment  for  living  will  be  lim- 
ited to:  (1)  your  pack  (things  that  you  carry  on  your 
back),  (2)  a  few  authorized  articles  which  are  placed  in 
a  squad  laundry  bag  (called  a  surplus  kit),  and  (3)  a 
blanket  roll. 


PRACTICE  MARCH  OR  "HIKE"       167 

Contents  of  the  Pack 

1  bacon  can.  1  comb  and  any  other  toi- 

1  condiment  can.  let  articles  desired. 

1  blanket.  1  cake  of  soap. 

1  poncho.  1  or  2  towels. 

1  shelter  half  (one-half  of    1  extra  suit  of  underwear. 

a  small  tent).  1  pair  socks. 

5  small  tent  pins.  1  pair  shoe  strings. 
1  tooth  brush. 

Contents  of  Surplus  Kit 

1  pair  of  breeches.  1  shoe  laces. 

1  suit  of  underwear.  2  pair  of  socks. 

1  shirt,  olive  drab..  1  pair  of  shoes   (tan). 

Any  other  article  that  may  be  prescribed  by  the  com- 
pany commander. 

The  surplus  kit  of  each  man  will  be  made  up  into  a 
neat,  compact  bundle,  tied  with  a  string  (use  a  shoe 
string  for  the  purpose),  and  tagged  with  the  owner's 
name.  These  individual  kits  will  be  packed  in  a  laun- 
dry bag,  called  "surplus  kit  bag,"  tagged,  one  for  each 
squad. 

Contents  of  Blanket  Roll 

1.  Extra  blankets. 

2.  One  ramrod  for  each  squad. 

3.  Any  other  articles  that  may  be  prescribed  by  the 
company  commander. 

Each  squad  makes  these  extra  blankets,  etc.,  into  a 


168        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

long  roll  which  is  called  the  "squad  blanket  roll."  A 
tag  is  tied  to  it,  showing  to  what  regiment,  company, 
and  squad  it  belongs. 

Notes 

1.  The  bacon  can  is  a  convenient  place  to  cany  a 
small  face  towel,  shaving  outfit,  and  other  small  toilet 
articles. 

2.  Keep  your  soap  in  a  soap  box. 

3.  Each  squad  should  have  its  own  cleaning  material 
which  should  be  tied  into  a  small  package  and  carried 
in  the  surplus  kit  bag. 

4.  Interest  in  a  hike  or  a  manoeuver  will  be 
stimulated  if  at  least  one  member  of  each  squad  has  a 
map  showing  all  the  camp  sites  and  route  of  march. 

5.  One  man  in  each  squad  should  be  provided  with  a 
small  bottle  of  iodine,  some  absorbent  cotton  and  ad- 
hesive tape  for  the  common  use  of  the  squad.  This  saves 
time  for  the  surgeon  and  men  in  caring  for  minor  in- 
juries, scratches,  etc. 

ESPRIT  DE  CORPS 

Have  too  much  esprit  de  corps  to  complain  of  the 
length  of  the  march,  or  to  kick  about  the  dust  on  the 
road.  Be  self -controlled.  Don't  boast  of  your  ability 
to  march  on  forever.  Such  remarks  are  depressing  to  a 
tired  comrade  who  is  not  as  physically  strong  as  you. 


CHAPTER  XI 

OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS 

To  make  it  possible  to  fill  the  gaps  made  in  the  Regu- 
lar Army,  by  the  heavy  loss  of  commissioned  officers 
which  is  inevitable  in  time  of  war  and  to  make  it  possible 
to  train  large  volunteer  armies  which  are  called  into  ex- 
istence when  war  is  imminent  or  actually  upon  the  coun- 
try, the  Government  has  provided  for  an  Officers' 
Reserve  Corps. 

It  is,  indeed,  a  patriotic  and  far-sighted  act  on  the 
part  of  a  citizen  to  become  a  reserve  officer,  for,  by  so 
doing,  he  will  increase  his  measure  of  usefulness  for  the 
time  when  his  country  will  need  him  most  and  when  he 
will,  if  he  is  a  real,  virile  man,  desire  to  be  of  the  utmost 
service  to  his  country. 

The  President  alone  is  authorized  to  appoint  officers 
in  the  Reserve  Corps.  Each  officer  must  be  physically, 
mentally,  and  morally  qualified  to  hold  his  commission. 

The  highest  rank  in  the  reserve  corps  will  be  that  of 
major. 

Age  limits  for  appointment  in  the  line  of  the  Reserve 
Corps : 

2nd  Lieutenants  must  be  under  32  years  of  age. 
1st  Lieutenants  must  be  under  36  years  of  age. 
Captains  must  be  under  40  years  of  age. 

169 


170        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Majors  must  be  under  45  years  of  age. 

Any  citizen  who  thinks  that  he  has  the  necessary  quali- 
fications and  desires  to  become  a  reserve  officer  should 
apply  to  the  Commanding  General  of  the  Department 
wherein  he  resides  for  an  application  blank  and  all  in- 
formation pertaining  thereto. 

You  must  undergo  a  course  of  training  in  camp.  We 
advise  you  in  the  strongest  terms  to  go  to  camp  as  soon 
as  possible.  There  are  no  short  cuts  in  the  military  busi- 
ness. The  most  efficient  instruction  under  the  most  ideal 
conditions  with  the  most  competent  officers,  will  be 
found  only  in  camp. 

GENERAL   INFORMATION   CONCERNING  THE  OFFICERS' 

RESERVE   CORPS 

An  officer  in  the  Reserve  Corps  cannot,  without  his 
consent,  be  called  into  service  in  a  lower  grade  than  that 
held  by  him  in  the  Reserve  Corps. 

When  a  Reserve  Officer  reaches  the  age  limit  fixed  for 
appointment  or  reappointment  in  the  grade  in  which 
commissioned,  he  will  be  honorably  discharged  from  the 
service  of  the  United  States  and  he  will  be  entitled  to 
retain  his  official  title,  and,  on  occasions  of  ceremony,  to 
wear  the  uniform  of  the  highest  grade  he  held  in  the 
Reserve  Corps.  The  preceding  provisions  as  to  ages 
of  officers  do  not  apply  to  the  appointment  or  reappoint- 
ment of  officers  of  the  Quartermaster,  Engineer,  Ord- 
nance, Signal,  Judge  Advocate,  and  Medical  Sections 
of  the  Reserve  Corps. 

A  commission  in  the  Reserve  Corps  will  cover  a  period 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         171 

of  five  years,  except  as  provided  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, unless  sooner  terminated  in  the  discretion  of  the 
President.  An  officer  may  be  recommissioned,  either 
in  the  same  or  a  higher  grade  for  successive  periods  of 
five  years,  subject  to  examination  and  age  limits. 

To  become  eligible  for  appointment  as  an  officer  of 
the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  a  man  must  be  not  less  than 
twenty-one  years  of  age  and  must  be  a  citizen  of  the 
United  States. 


THE   OFFICERS'   RESERVE  CORPS   IN    WAR 

In  time  of  actual  or  threatened  hostilities  the  Presi- 
dent can  order  officers  of  the  Reserve  Corps  to  tempo- 
rary duty  with  the  Regular  Army,  or  as  officers  at  re- 
cruiting rendezvous  and  depots,  or  on  such  duty  as  he 
may  prescribe.  An  officer  thus  called  into  service  re- 
ceives the  same  pay  and  allowances  as  an  officer  of  the 
same  rank  in  the  Regular  Army.  When  thus  called 
out  Reserve  Officers  may  be  promoted  in  rank  to  va- 
cancies in  volunteer  organizations.  Retired  officers  of 
the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  are  not  entitled  to  retired 
pay  but  are  entitled  to  pensions  for  disability  incurred 
in  line  of  duty  and  while  in  active  service.  When  called 
out  for  active  service  an  officer  in  the  Reserve  Corps  will 
be  required  to  obey  the  laws  and  regulations  for  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  Army  of  the  United  States  in  so  far  as 
they  are  applicable  to  officers  whose  permanent  reten- 
tion in  the  military  service  is  not  contemplated. 


172         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

THE  OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS  IN  PEACE 

During  peace  the  Secretary  of  War  can  order  any 
Reserve  Officer  to  duty  for  instruction  for  a  period  not 
to  exceed  fifteen  days  in  any  one  calendar  year.  While 
so  serving,  an  officer  will  receive  the  pay  and  allowance 
of  his  grade  in  the  Regular  Army.  This  period  of  serv- 
ice may  be  extended  with  the  consent  of  the  Reserve 
Officer.  By  thus  extending  such  periods  of  instruction 
a  Reserve  Officer  may,  at  the  conclusion  thereof,  be  ex- 
amined for  promotion  to  the  next  higher  grade. 

EXAMINATIONS 

Each  applicant  for  a  commission  in  the  Reserve 
Corps  will  be  given  a  rigid  physical  examination.  Make 
certain  that  you  can  pass  such  an  examination.  Go  to 
your  family  physician  and  get  him  to  examine  you. 

The  examinations  for  Reserve  Corps  commissions  are 
for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  practical  ability  of 
the  applicant.  The  record  of  all  the  service  and  train- 
ing the  applicant  has  had  at  training  camps  is  consid- 
ered as  part  of  the  examination. 

Those  desiring  to  enter  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps 
may  elect  any  of  the  following  sections : 

1.  Infantry  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

2.  Cavalry  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

8.  Field  Artillery  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

4.  Coast  Artillery  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

5.  Medical  (to  include  the  reserve  officers  of  the  Medi- 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         173 

cal  Corps,  Dental  Corps,  and  Veterinary  Corps) 
Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

6.  Adjutant  General's  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

7.  Judge  Advocate  General's  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

8.  Inspector  General's  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

9.  Quartermaster  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

10.  Engineer  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

11.  Ordnance  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

12.  Signal  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

REFORTS   TO   BE   MADE 

Officers  in  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  are  required 
to  report  at  once  to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Depart- 
ment in  which  they  live  or  to  the  heads  of  the  Staff  Corps 
or  Departments  to  which  they  may  belong  of  any  perma- 
net  change  of  address.  If  a  change  of  address  to  any 
other  department  is  involved  the  adjutant  of  each  de- 
partment should  be  notified. 

THE   RESERVE   OFFICERS'    TRAINING    CORrS 

The  President  is  authorized  to  establish  and  maintain 
in  civil  educational  institutions  a  Reserve  Officers'  Train- 
ing Corps  which  shall  consist  of  senior  and  junior  di- 
visions. 

SENIOR   DIVISION 

A  senior  division  of  the  Reserve  Officers'  Training 
Corps  may  be  established  at  any  university  and  college 
requiring  of  its  students  four  years  of  collegiate  study 


174         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

for  a  degree,  and  at  essentially  military  schools  which, 
as  a  result  of  annual  inspection  of  such  institutions  by 
the  War  Department,  are  especially  designated  as  quali- 
fied to  establish  a  unit  of  the  senior  division.  Authori- 
ties of  the  former  (universities  and  colleges  not  essen- 
tially military)  must  establish  and  maintain  a  two  years' 
elective  or  compulsory  course  of  military  training,  as 
a  minimum,  for  its  physically  fit  male  students.  This 
course,  when  entered  upon,  must  in  the  case  of  such 
students  be  a  prerequisite  for  graduation. 

When  any  member  of  this  senior  division  has  com- 
pleted two  academic  years  of  service  in  that  division ;  has 
been  selected  by  the  president  of  the  institution  and  by 
its  professor  of  military  science  and  tactics  (who  must 
be  an  army  officer)  ;  has  made  a  written  agreement  to 
continue  in  the  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps  for  the 
remainder  of  his  course  in  the  institution,  devoting  five 
hours  per  week  to  the  military  training  prescribed  by 
the  Secretary  of  War;  has  also  made  a  written  agree- 
ment to  pursue  the  courses  in  training  camps  (one  camp 
of  not  more  than  six  weeks'  duration  each  year)  pre- 
scribed by  the  Secretary  of  War) — when  he  has  fulfilled 
all  these  conditions,  he  may  be  given,  at  the  expense  of 
the  United  States,  a  money  commutation  of  subsistence 
at  a  rate  not  exceeding  the  cost  of  the  garrison  (army) 
ration  during  the  remainder  of  his  service  in  the  Reserve 
Officers'  Training  Corps.  This  will  amount  to  about 
thirty  cents  a  day.  This  provision  applies  only  to  the 
senior  division. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         175 

JUNIOR  DIVISION 

A  junior  division  of  the  Reserve  Officers'  Training 
Corps  may  be  established  at  any  institution  to  which  an 
army  officer  has  been  detailed  as  the  professor  of  mili- 
tary science  and  tactics,  and  which  cannot  meet  the  nec- 
essary requirements  for  the  senior  division.  In  this  case 
the  Government  does  not  give  a  commutation  of  sub- 
sistence and  the  students  are  not  asked  to  obligate  them- 
selves as  in  the  senior  division. 

TO   ENTER   THE  RESERVE  OFFICERS'    CORPS 

The  President  is  authorized,  under  such  regulations 
as  he  may  prescribe,  to  appoint  in  the  Officers'  Reserve 
Corps  any  graduate  of  the  senior  division  of  the  Reserve 
Officers'  Training  Corps,  who  shall  have  satisfactorily 
completed  the  two-year  course  of  training  (five  hours 
a  week) ,  incident  to  receiving  a  commutation  of  rations; 
also  any  graduate  of  the  junior  division  who  shall  have 
satisfactorily  completed  the  courses  of  military  training 
prescribed  for  students  of  the  senior  divisions,  referred 
to  in  the  first  part  of  this  paragraph,  and  shall  have  par- 
ticipated in  such  practical  instruction,  subsequent  to 
graduation,  as  the  Secretary  of  War  shall  have  pre- 
scribed. They  must  be  twenty-one  years  of  age  and 
must  make  written  agreement  under  oath  to  serve  the 
United  States  for  ten  years. 

Any  physically  fit  male  citizen  of  the  United  States, 
between  the  ages  of  twenty-one  and  twenty-seven  years, 


176        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

who  graduated  prior  to  June  22,  1916,  from  any  educa- 
tional institution  at  which  an  officer  of  the  Army  was 
detailed  as  professor  of  military  science  and  tactics,  and 
who,  while  a  student  at  such  institution,  completed 
courses  of  military  training  substantially  equivalent  to 
those  prescribed  for  the  senior  division  of  the  Reserve 
Officers'  Training  Corps,  may,  after  satisfactorily  com- 
pleting such  additional  practical  military  training  as  the 
Secretary  of  War  shall  prescribe,  be  eligible  for  appoint- 
ment to  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

The  President  can  appoint  and  commission,  as  a  tem- 
porary second  lieutenant  of  the  Regular  Army  in  time 
of  peace,  for  the  purpose  of  instruction  and  for  a  period 
not  to  exceed  six  months,  any  Reserve  Officer  who  was 
appointed  in  the  manner  described  in  the  two  preceding 
paragraphs.  A  temporary  second  lieutenant  will  re- 
ceive the  allowance  authorized  by  law  for  that  grade 
and  pay  at  the  rate  of  $100  a  month.  He  will  be  at- 
tached to  a  unit  of  the  Regular  Army  for  duty  and  train- 
ing. At  the  end  of  the  six  months  he  will  revert  to  the 
status  of  a  Reserve  Officer. 

DEPARTMENT   COMMANDER'S  RETORT 

At  the  end  of  each  calendar  year  department  com- 
manders and  chiefs  of  staff  corps  and  departments  com- 
pile lists  of  members  of  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  un- 
der their  command,  showing: 

(a)   Name,  rank,  age,  and  address. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         177 

(b)  Amount  of  instruction  received. 

(c)  Progress  made. 

(d)  Efficiency  of  officer. 

(e)  Recommendation. 

A  copy  of  these  lists  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Adjutant 
General  of  the  Army. 

The  remainder  of  this  chapter  boils  down  to  an  irre- 
ducible minimum  some  of  the  most  important  subjects 
with  which  a  Reserve  Officer  or  an  applicant  for  a  com- 
mission in  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  should  be  famil- 
iar. It  emphasizes  those  things  with  which  a  reserve 
officer  should  at  once  become  familar.  It  merely 
opens  up  a  broad  field  of  study  for  a  reserve  officer  and 
at  the  same  time  can  be  used  as  a  place  of  reference. 

THE   LAND   FORCES   OF   THE   UNITED   STATES 

You  now  are,  or  expect  to  become,  a  member  of  the 
land  forces  of  the  United  States.  Of  what  do  the  land 
forces  of  the  United  States  consist?  They' consist  of  the 
Regular  Army,  the  Volunteer  Army,  the  Officers'  Re- 
serve Corps,  the  Enlisted  Reserve  Corps,  the  National 
Army,  the  National  Guard  in  the  service  of  the  United 
States  and  such  other  land  forces  as  Congress  may 
authorize. 

The  land  forces  are  grouped  under  two  general  heads : 

(1)  The  Mobile  Army. 

(2)  The  Coast  Artillery. 

"The  Mobile  "Army.  The  mobile  army  is  primarily 
organized  for  offensive  operations  against  an  enemy, 
and  on  this  account  requires  the  maximum  degree  of 


178        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

mobility."     (Field  Service  Regulations.)     It  consists 
of: 

Infantry. 

Field  Artillery. 

Cavalry. 

Engineers. 

Signal  Corps  Troops. 
"The  Coast  Artillery.     The  coast  artillery  is  charged 
with  the  care  and  use  of  the  fixed  and  movable  elements 
of  the  land  and  coast  fortifications."     (Field  Service 
Regulations.) 

The  President  of  the  United  States  is  the  Comman- 
der-in-Chief of  the  Army.  He  exercises  his  command 
through  the  Secretary  of  War.  The  Chief  of  Staff  acts 
as  military  adviser  to  the  Secretary  of  War.  He  puts 
into  effect  the  Administration's  wishes. 

For  the  purpose  of  equipping,  inspecting,  directing, 
and  administering  to  the  Army,  there  are  the  following 
corps  and  departments: 


(2 
(3 

(4 

(5 
(6 
(7 
(8 
(9 
(10 


General  Staff  Corps. 

Adjutant  General's  Department. 

Inspector  General's  Department. 

Judge  Advocate  General's  Department. 

Quartermaster  Corps. 

Medical  Department. 

Ordnance  Department. 

Bureau  of  Insular  Affairs. 

Signal  Corps. 

Engineer  Corps. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS 


179 


The  following  are  the  grades  of  rank  and  commands 
of  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers: 


(1) 

General 

Commands : 

Armies. 

(2) 

Lieutenant-General 

Commands : 

Field  Army. 

(3) 

Major-General 

Commands: 

Division. 

(4) 

Brigadier-General 

Commands: 

Brigade. 

(5) 

Colonel 

Commands : 

Regiment. 

(6) 

Lieutenant-Colonel 

Second  in  command  in  a  Regiment. 

(7) 

Major 

Commands : 

Battalion. 

(8) 

Captain 

Commands : 

Company. 

(9) 

First  Lieutenant 

Commands : 

Platoon. 

do) 

Second  Lieutenant 

Commands : 

Platoon. 

(11) 

Veterinarian 

He  has  no 

command. 

(12) 

Cadet  at  United  States  Military  Academy — He  has  no  com- 

mand. 

(13) 

Sergeant-Maj  or 
(Regimental) 

He  has  no 

command. 

(14) 

Ordnance  Sergeant 

He  has   no 

command. 

(15) 

Quartermaster   Sergeant 

He  has  no 

command. 

(16) 

Sergeant-Maj  or 
(Battalion) 

He  has  no 

command. 

(17) 

First  Sergeant 

Commands : 

Platoon. 

(18) 

Sergeant 

Commands : 

Sometimes  a  Platoon. 

(19) 

Corporal 

Commands : 

Squad. 

ARTICLES   OF   WAR 

The  Army  is  governed  by  the  Articles  of  War,  which 
can  be  found  in  the  Army  Regulations.  Any  laws, 
orders,  et  cetera,  pertaining  to  the  Army  must  not  vio- 
late directly  or  indirectly  any  of  the  Articles  of  War. 
It  is  therefore  desirable  that  each  Reserve  Officer  know 
where  to  find  them  and  become,  in  a  general  way,  fa- 
miliar with  them. 


180        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

GENERAL  ADVICE 

To  become  a  first-class  drillmaster  is  desirable  and 
necessary.  But,  being  one,  you  are  not  to  be  intrusted 
with  the  command  of  troops  in  the  field  unless  you  have 
gone  much  farther  than  that.  To  become  an  excellent 
drillmaster  means  simply  that  you  have  mastered  a  de- 
tail. In  order  to  become  one  you  should  bear  this  in 
mind :  You  cannot  teach  a  man  how  to  do  a  thing  un- 
less you  know  that  thing  yourself.  If  you  don't  know 
your  drill,  don't  try  to  "bluff "  your  men.  Burn  the 
midnight  oil,  or  remain  a  private. 

MILITARY   CORRESPONDENCE 

An  official  letter  should  refer  to  one  subject  only. 

In  writing  to  the  War  Department  address  your  let- 
ter to  "The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army,  Washing- 
ton, D.  C." 

The  United  States  (including  colonies)  is  divided 
into  the  following  departments : 

(1)  The  Northeastern  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Boston. 
Massachusetts. 

(2)  The  Eastern  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Governors 
Island,  New  York. 

(3)  The  Southeastern  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Charles- 
ton, South  Carolina, 

(4)  The  Central  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Chicago,  Illinois. 

(5)  The  Southern  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Fort  Sam 
Houston,  Texas. 

(6)  The  Western  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  San  Francisco, 
California. 

(7)  The  Philippine  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Manila.  P,  I. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         181 

(8)  The  Hawaiian  Department,  with  Headquarters  at  Honolulu, 
Hawaii. 

You  will  be  in  one  of  these  departments.  Address 
your  communication  to  "The  Commanding  General"  at 
his  department  headquarters. 

Answer  all  official  communications  promptly.  This 
is  important.  Letters  must  be  written,  folded,  signed 
as  prescribed  by  the  War  Department.  Models  illus- 
trating the  system  are  furnished  by  the  Adjutant  Gen- 
eral's office,  Washington,  D.  C.  "Ind."  is  the  abbrevi- 
ation for  indorsement. 

(Correspondence  Model) 

COMPANY  B,  40th  INFANTRY, 
Fort  William  H.  Seward, 
Alaska,  July  19,  1916. 
From:     The  Commanding  Officer,  Co.  B,  40th  Inf. 
To:         The  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army 

(Through  military   channels.) 
Subject:     Philippine  campaign  badge,  Corporal  John  Doe. 


Inclosed  are  lists  in  duplicate  of  the  enlisted  men  of  Company 
B,  40th  Infantry,  entitled  to  the  Philippine  campaign  badge. 

John  A.  Brown, 

Capt.,  40th  Inf. 
1st  Ind. 

Hq.  Ft.  William  H.  Seward,  Alaska,  July  19th,  1916  — 
To  the  Comdg.   Gen.,  Western  Department,  San  Francisco,  Cali- 
fornia. 

A.  F.  R., 
Brig.-Gen.,  Comdg. 


182        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

2d  Ind. 

(incl.  is  the  abbreviation  for  inclosure.) 

(Stamp)  Rec'd  Western  Department,  July  SO,  1916. 

(Note.     This  correspondence  is  not  complete  but  it  illustrates 
how  to  write  a  military  letter  and  indorsement.) 


USE   OF  THE   COMBINED   ARMS 

Every  efficient  officer  must  realize  the  possibilities  and 
limitations  of  his  own  arm  of  the  service  as  well  as  the 
possibilities  and  limitations  of  the  other  arms.  Each 
arm  of  the  service  is  necessary  and  important.  A  proper 
understanding  of  the  use  of  the  combined  arms  is  as 
essential  to  success  in  battle  as  cooperation  between  the 
different  members  of  a  football  team  is  to  its  success. 
Don't  "knock"  any  arm  but  the  one  you  are  in,  and 
don't  knock  that  unless  you  are  willing  to  admit  you  are 
not  man  enough  to  improve  it. 

INFANTRY 

"The  infantry  is  the  principal  and  most  important 
arm,  which  is  charged  with  the  main  work  on  the  field 
of  battle  and  it  usually  decides  the  final  issue  of  the  com- 
bat." (Field  Service  Regulations.)  The  role  (duty 
or  job)  of  the  infantry,  whether  offensive  or  defensive, 
is  the  role  of  the  entire  force.  If  it  fails,  all  fail.  When 
properly  supported  by  artillery,  trained  infantrymen 
armed  with  rifles,  bayonets,  and  the  will  to  put  the  en- 
emy out  of  action,  will  settle  all  issues. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         183 

ARTILLERY 

The  chief  duty  of  the  artillery  is  to  support  the  in- 
fantry. It  does  this  in  three  ways:  1st,  By  firing  at 
the  hostile  infantry.  2d,  By  putting  out  of  action  the 
hostile  artillery  so  that  it  cannot  fire  at  the  infantry. 
3d,  By  demolishing  the  obstacles  in  front  of  the  enemy's 
works.  It  smothers  the  enemy  with  a  curtain  of  fire, 
so  that  the  infantry  can  move  forward  without  ruinous 
losses.  Cooperation  with  the  infantry  is  essential.  If 
the  infantry  is  defeated  the  artillery  covers  its  with- 
drawal; if  the  infantry  is  successful  the  artillery  moves 
forward  and  assists  in  reaping  the  full  reward  of  victory 
by  firing  on  the  fleeing  enemy.  The  present  European 
War  has  greatly  increased  the  prestige  and  importance 
of  this  arm  of  the  service.  The  amount  of  artillery  on 
the  Western  front  and  the  amount  of  ammunition  con- 
sumed daily  is  appalling. 

CAVALRY 

This  very  important  arm  is  the  eye  with  which  the 
general  sees  for  many  miles  to  the  front  and  flank.  In 
an  advance  it  pushes  ahead,  combs  the  country  for  the 
enemy,  disperses  his  .cavalry,  and  thus  protects  the  in- 
fantry in  the  rear.  It  locates  the  enemy,  and  occupies 
his  attention  until  the  infantry  comes  up.  It  protects 
the  flanks  and  rear  of  the  infantry  and  artillery  during 
the  fight.     If  needed,  it  joins  in  the  fight.     If  the  in- 


184        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

fantry  is  defeated  it  covers  the  withdrawal,  and  if  the 
infantry  wins  it  pursues  and  pounces  upon  the  enemy. 

MACHINE  GUNS 

Before  the  present  European  War,  machine  guns 
were  classified  as  emergency  weapons.  It  was  not  he- 
lieved  that  they  could  remain  long  in  action,  because 
they  would  soon  be  silenced  by  hostile  fire  (artillery  and 
infantry).  It  was  recommended,  therefore,  that  a  fa- 
vorable opportunity  be  awaited  before  opening  fire  which 
was  to  be  delivered  with  their  utmost  effectiveness. 
They  were  believed  to  possess  very  limited  possibilities 
in  an  attacking  line,  but  as  being  most  valuable  in  de- 
fensive works  where  protection  and  concealment  could 
be  found. 

During  this  war  they  have  lost,  as  a  defensive  weapon, 
no  prestige.  They  have  also  proved  of  great  value  to 
the  attacking  side.  They  are  being  made  light  and 
portable  to  accompany  the  firing  line  in  an  attack.  The 
supply  of  ammunition  alone  limits  the  number  that  can 
be  used. 

Each  side  in  the  present  war  has  used  them  by  the 
thousands  with  effectiveness.  Machine  guns  are  more 
worthy  of  consideration  to-day  than  heretofore. 

BOMBS  AND   HAND   GRENADES 

The  present  European  War  has  revived  the  use  of 
hand  grenades  and  bombs.  A  certain  number  of  sol- 
diers in  each  British  and  French  battalion  are  trained 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         185 

as  grenade  throwers.  Their  principal  weapon  is  a 
bucket  or  bag  of  grenades  or  bombs.  They  operate  not 
only  from  trenches  but  acconrpany  the  firing  line  in  an 
attack  and  dispose  of  sheltered  or  isolated  group  of  the 
enemy  by  smothering  their  position  with  a  shower  of 
hand  grenades  or  bombs. 

These  weapons  are  in  the  first  stages  of  development 
in  this  country.  They  offer  to  the  service  practically  a 
virgin  field  of  opportunities.  Some  Reserve  Officers 
might  make  a  specialty  of  this  subject  and  assist  in  its 
development. 

NIGHT   OPERATIONS 

"By  employing  night  operations  troops  make  use  of 
the  cover  of  darkness  to  minimize  losses  from  hostile  fire, 
to  escape  observation,  to  gain  time."  (Infantry  Drill 
Regulations.)  They  are  dangerous  because  control  is 
difficult  and  confusion  is  frequently  unavoidable.  Only 
trained  troops  should  be  used,  and  the  formation  must  be 
simple.     Don't  attempt  anything  complicated. 

Observe  the  following  suggestions.  For  an  attack  or 
offensive  movement: 

(1)  Study  by  daylight  and  after  dark,  if  possible,  the 
ground  you  are  to  cross. 

(2)  Make  careful  preparations  with  secrecy. 

(3)  Avoid  fire  action.  Pieces  should  not  be  loaded. 
Rely  on  the  bayonet. 

(4)  Give  each  unit  a  definite  objective  and  direction. 
Avoid  collision. 


186        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

(5)  Have  each  man  wear  a  distinctive  badge.  (For 
instance,  a  white  band  on  one  arm. ) 

If  on  the  defensive  and  you  expect  a  night  attack, 
place  obstacles  in  front  of  your  position,  heavily  patrol 
your  front,  fix  bayonets,  move  up  your  supports,  open 
fire  as  soon  as  results  may  be  expected,  and  illuminate 
the  foreground. 

OBSTACLES 

The  main  object  in  placing  obstacles  in  front  of  a  de- 
fensive position  is  to  delay  the  enemy  while  he  is  under 
the  defenders'  fire,  and  thus  make  his  advance  as  diffi- 
cult as  possible.  To  accomplish  this  result  they  must 
be  so  placed  that  the  enemy  must  cross  them.  They 
must  not  interfere  with  the  defenders'  view  or  fire ;  they 
must  not  be  easily  destroyed  by  artillery  fire;  they  must 
not  afford  concealment  to  the  enemy;  and  they  must  be 
so  made  that  they  will  not  obstruct  a  counter  attack  on 
the  part  of  the  defenders.  The  present  war  has  demon- 
strated that  the  barb  wire  entanglement  fulfils  more  of 
these  requirements  than  any  other  form  of  obstacle. — 
See  Engineer  Department's  "Manual  on  Field  Fortifi- 
cations" on  how  to  construct  obstacles. 

MEETING  ENGAGEMENTS 

When  two  hostile  forces  suddenly  meet  we  have  what 
is  termed  a  "meeting  engagement."  Very  little  or  no 
reconnaissance  is  possible.  There  is  an  absence  of 
trenches.     Both  sides  deploy  rapidly.     The  smaller  the 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         187 

force  the  more  frequently  will  it  fight  a  meeting  engage^ 
ment.  Therefore,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to 
junior  officers.  A  great  advantage  will  accrue  to  the 
side  which  can  deploy  the  faster.  The  leader  who  has 
intuition,  initiative,  who  can  make  a  quick  decision  and 
is  willing  to  take  a  long  chance,  will  have  a  great  ad- 


vantage. 


WITHDRAWAL  FROM   ACTION 


"The  withdrawal  of  a  defeated  force  can  generally  be 
effected  only  at  a  heavy  cost."  ( Infantry  Drill  Regu- 
lations.) When  a  withdrawal  is  necessary,  make  every 
possible  effort  to  place  distance  and  a  rear  guard  be- 
tween you  and  the  enemy.  Have  one  part  of  your  line 
withdraw  under  protection  of  the  fire  of  the  other  part 
and  so  on.  Reorganize  your  command  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible. 

INTRENCHMENTS 

"Ordinarily  infantry  intrenches  itself  whenever  it  is 
compelled  to  halt  for  a  considerable  time  in  the 
presence  of  the  enemy."  ( Infantry  Drill  Regulations. ) 
Trenches  are  constructed  with  a  view  of  giving  cover 
which  will  diminish  losses,  but  they  must  not  be  so  built 
or  placed  as  to  interfere  with  the  free  use  of  the  rifle. 
A  good  field  of  fire  is  the  first  consideration.  The  con- 
struction of  a  trench  is  simple,  but  the  location  of  it  is 
difficult.  If  possible,  trenches  are  laid  put  in  company 
lengths. 

Intrenchments  usually  take  tlie  following  form: 


188        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

(1)  Hasty  Cover.  Constructed  by  troops  with  the 
tools  they  cany  on  their  person.  It  is  a  shallow  trench 
with  a  parapet  at  least  three  feet  thick  and  one  foot  high. 
It  furnishes  cover  against  rifle  fire,  but  scarcely  any 
against  shrapnel. 

( 2 )  Fire  Trench.  It  should  be  deep  and  narrow  with 
the  parapet  flat  and  concealed.  While  in  it,  the  troops 
fire  at  the  enemy;  hence  the  name  fire  trench. 

Usual  forms  of  fire  trenches  are  as  shown  in  the  fol- 
lowing illustration: 


I  foot  command 


y— -  -:9'-_-— -*i-n 

I  foot  command      |^    &  Foot  hold 
enlarged 

to  be  wast 

m 


Planks  or  poles  and'v 
brush  laid  before  aim 
other  work  on  Fig.  rl... 
Chamber  mined  after  completion 
on  Fig  J 


-«-* 


Pockets  may  be  exca-0 
vaied  for  ammunition  M 


-mpm 

|  If  necessary  excavate 
%fy  for  feel  when 
£<L5%$LA  vl  sitting 

No  parapet  -waste  the  earth 


(3)  Support  Trenches.  The  supports  sleep  and  live 
in  these  trenches;  hence  they  are  covered.  The  cover 
(roof)  must  be  thick  enough  to  afford  protection  from 
high  angle  artillery  fire.  It  is  placed  as  near  the  fire 
trench  as  possible. 

(4)  Approach  Trenches.  These  connect  fire 
trenches  with  the  support  trenches  and  the  support 
trenches  with  any  trenches  in  rear  where  natural  cov- 


.  •  ••  •  •.- 


<0 

v  en i  o  d  C 

4,  C  <3  ~  O  o 

^i'ju~~ 'Sic-*! 


t  • 


Pf    ^^  uo4TfH«*aA 


S^  <3g  en 

Br:   0C« 


IS?" 


o 

O 

u 

y. 

O 
« 


t** 


****., 


«£&&»  -«*K6fc>-N 


**•»» 


-*+•»♦  wot***. 


,,xX**» 


1  +r  J> 


A  SECTION  OF  A  FORWARD  ENTRENCHED  ZONE 

OTHERS  ARC  IN  REAR 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         189 

ered  communication  is  impracticable.  They  are  zig- 
zagged to  escape  being  enfiladed.  ( That  is,  to  prevent 
one  explosion  from  doing  too  much  damage  in  a  single 
trench.)  During  an  engagement,  troops  by  using  these, 
trenches  can  go  safely  to  the  help  of  the  troops  in  the 
fire  trenches.     They  are  usually  deep  and  narrow. 

(5)  Intermediate  Trendies.  They  are  constructed 
in  rear  of  the  support  trenches  when  the  ground  ren- 
ders it  possible  to  offer  a  stubborn  resistance  between 
the  support  and  the  reserve  trenches.  They  are  con- 
structed like  fire  trenches. 

(6  )  Reserve  Trenches.  Constructed  like  the  fire 
trenches  and  occupied  by  the  local  reserves  who  live  in 
deep  dug-outs.  The  intermediate  and  reserve  trenches 
are  often  merged  into  the  support  trenches.  All  are 
protected  by  barbwire  entanglements.  No  set  plan  of 
trenches  can  be  used.  The  topographical  features  of 
the  ground  must  govern. 

MILITARY   MAPS 

Definition.  "A  military  map  is  a  drawing  made  to 
represent  some  section  of  the  country,  showing  the  fea- 
ires  that  are  of  military  importance,  such  as  roads, 
uridges,  streams,  houses,  and  hills.  The  map  must  be 
so  drawn  that  you  can  tell  the  distance  between  any  two 
points,  the  heights  of  the  hills,  and  the  relative  positions 
of  everything  shown."     (Field  Service  Regulations.) 

In  the  field  the  military  maps  are  supplemented  by 
sketches,  or  field  maps,  prepared  from  day  to  day.  For 
facility  in  reading,  military  maps  are  made  according  to 
a  uniform  system  of  scales  and  contour  intervals  as  fol- 
lows: 


190        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Road  Sketches.  Three  inches  on  the  map  is  equal  to 
1  mile  on  the  ground,  contour  intervals  of  20  feet. 

Position  and  Outpost  Sketches.  Six  inches  on  the 
map  are  equal  to  1  mile  on  the  ground,  contour  intervals 
of  10  feet. 

Manceuver  or  War  Game  Maps.  Twelve  inches  on 
the  map  are  equal  to  1  mile  on  the  ground,  contour  in- 
tervals of  5  feet. 

Large  Strategical  Maps  for  Extended  Manoeuvers. 
One  inch  on  the  map  is  equal  to  1  mile  on  the  ground, 
contour  intervals  of  60  feet. 

Every  officer  in  the  Reserve  Corps  should  be  able  to 
read  a  military  map  and  make  a  road,  an  outpost,  and 
a  position  sketch. 

BAYONET 

Importance  of  the  Bayonet.  The  infantry  soldier  is 
armed  with  a  bayonet.  He  relies  mainly  on  fire  action 
to  disable  the  enemy,  but  he  should  know  that  it  is  often 
necessary  for  him  to  cross  bayonets  with  the  enemy. 
Therefore  he  must  be  instructed  in  the  use  of  the  rifle 
and  the  bayonet  in  hand-to-hand  encounters.  The  pres- 
ent European  War  is  demonstrating  the  importance  of 
this  instruction.  If  you  did  not  receive  instruction  in 
bayonet  fighting  at  a  federal  training  camp,  it  was  not 
because  it  is  unimportant,  but  because  there  was  no 
available  time  to  give  it.  Any  Reserve  Officer  can  welj 
afford  to  specialize  in  this  work. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         191 

AMMUNITION 

An  infantry  soldier  goes  into  battle  carrying  220 
rounds  of  rifle  ammunition.  He  habitually  carries  in 
his  belt  100  rounds  and  when  a  fight  is  imminent  he  gets 
120  rounds  (2  bandoliers)  from  his  combat  train.  He 
keeps  30  rounds  in  the  right  pocket  section  of  his  belt 
to  be  expended  only  when  ordered  by  an  officer. 

A  cavalryman  goes  into  battle  carrying  150  rounds  of 
rifle  ammunition  and  40  rounds  of  pistol  ammunition. 
He  habitually  carries  in  his  belt  90  rounds  of  rifle  and 
20  rounds  of  pistol  ammunition.  When  about  to  go 
into  a  fight  he  gets  60  rounds  of  rifle  and  20  rounds  of 
pistol  ammunition  from  his  combat  train. 

All  officers  must  train  their  men  to  economize  in  the 
use  of  ammunition.  Train  service,  even  by  rail  for  am- 
munition, would  be  inadequate  if  this  were  not  done. 

TRANSPORTATION 

Organization  commanders  are  responsible  for  all  un- 
authorized material  or  supplies  that  may  be  put  on  their 
wagons.  You  should  therefore  become  acquainted  with 
the  transportation  attached  to  the  smaller  organizations. 
The  wagons  that  carry  your  ammunition  are  called  the 
Combat  Train.  The  wagons  that  carry  your  authorized 
baggage,  kitchen  equipment,  and  food  are  called  the 
Fieid  Train. 

THE   RATION 

A  ration  is  the  allowance  (money)  for  the  subsistence 
of  one  person  for  one  day.     It  is  based  on  the  cost  of  a 


192         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

fixed  amount  of  certain  foods  (such  as  meat,  potatoes, 
bread,  etc.)  necessary  for  a  workingman.  As  the  cost 
of  food  in  the  different  sections  of  the  country  varies, 
so  does  the  cost  of  the  ration.  There  are  several  kinds 
of  ration  based  on  what  the  soldier  is  doing  and  the  cli- 
mate he  is  in.  If  you  are  ever  in  command  of  a  com- 
pany, whether  in  the  field  or  in  barracks,  one  of  your 
most  important  duties  will  be  to  supervise  the  cooking 
and  messing  of  your  company.  You  should,  therefore, 
become  familiar  with  the  following  rations: 

(1)  Garrison  rations.  Used  by  troops  in  garrison 
and  during  peace  and  on  manceuvers. 

(2)  Reserve  ration.  Carried  on  the  person  and  in 
the  trains. 

(3)  Field  ration.  The  ration  prescribed  by  the  com- 
mander of  a  field  force. 

(4)  Travel  ration.     Used  when  traveling. 

(5)  Emergency  ration.  Used  by  troops  on  an  active 
campaign  in  an  emergency. 

(6)  Filipino  ration.     For  use  of  Filipino  Scouts. 

PROPERTY 

In  the  absence  of  regulations  on  the  subject,  each  Re- 
serve Officer  should  own  a  good  watch,  a  pair  of  field 
glasses,  a  compass,  and  a  note  book. 

GUARD   DUTY 

Guards  are  used  in  camp  or  garrison  to  preserve  or- 
der, to  protect  property,  and  to  enforce  police  regula- 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         193 

tions.  The  commander  of  the  guard  is  an  officer  or 
non-commissioned  officer.  He  performs  his  duties  un- 
der the  supervision  of  the  officer  of  the  day.  A  sentinel 
is  on  post  two  hours  out  of  every  six.  And  a  tour  of 
guard  duty  is  twenty-four  hours.  As  guard  duty  is  of 
such  utmost  importance,  and  laxity,  or  failure  to  per- 
form it  properly,  is  very  severely  punished,  the  duties 
of  all  connected  with  it  are  clearly  prescribed  in  the 
Guard  Manual. 

Orders  for  sentinels  are  divided  into  two  classes,  gen- 
eral and  special.  Each  should  be  memorized.  Special 
orders  relate  to  particular  posts  and  duties.  General 
orders  apply  to  all  sentinels  and  are  as  follows : 

"(1)  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  government 
property  in  view. 

"  (2)  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping 
always  on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes 
place  within  sight  or  hearing. 

"(3)  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  in- 
structed to  enforce. 

"  (4)  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from 
the  guard  house  than  my  own. 

"  (5 )   To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

"(6)  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel 
who  relieves  me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer, 
officer  of  the  day,  and  officers  and  noncommissioned  of- 
ficers of  the  guard  only. 

"(7)   To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

"  (8)    In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 


194        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

"(9)  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or 
near  my  post. 

"(10)  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

"(11)  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and,  dur- 
ing the  time  for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on 
or  near  my  post,  and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without 
proper  authority."     (Guard  Manual.) 

saluting 

Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  is 
easy.     In  general  it  does  not  exceed  thirty  paces. 

A  junior,  who  is  mounted,  dismounts  before  address- 
ing a  senior  who  is  dismounted.  If  the  senior  is  mounted 
the  junior  does  not  dismount  when  addressing  him. 

A  junior  officer  walks  or  rides  on  the  left  of  his  senior. 

National  Anthem.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  played  at  any- 
place when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  should  stand  at  attention 
facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  when  they  should  face  toward 
the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered,  they  shall  salute  at  the  first  note 
of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position  of  salute  until  the  last  note  of 
the  anthem.  If  uncovered,  stand  at  attention  but  do  not  salute.  If 
not  in  uniform  and  covered  they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the 
anthem,  holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so 
remain  until  its  close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  the  head- 
dress may  be  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded 
as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem  shall  be 
played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required  to  be 
repeated  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during  the 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         195 

playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  shall  be  shown 
toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country  when  played  upon 
official  occasions. 

Colors  or  Standards.  Colors  are  the  national  and 
regimental  flags  of  foot  troops.  Standards  are  the  na- 
tional and  regimental  flags  of  cavalry  or  field  artillery. 
When  passing  colors  or  standards,  uncased  (not  in  a 
waterproof  case),  the  prescribed  salute  must  always  be 
rendered.  By  the  prescribed  salute  is  meant,  if  un- 
armed or  armed  with  a  saber  which  is  sheathed,  the 
"hand  salute" ;  if  armed  with  a  drawn  saber,  the  "present 
saber."  If  you,  wearing  civilian  dress,  pass  them,  un- 
cover and  hold  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand. 

BOOKS* 

We  recommend  that  all  officers,  non-commissioned 
officers  and  all  privates  who  propose  to  work  for  ad- 
vancement read  the  following  books.  All  can  probably 
be  obtained  from  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army, 
Washington,  D.  C.  Any  other  military  books  desired 
can  be  purchased  from  the  United  States  Infantry 
Association,  Union  Trust  Building,  Washington,  D.  C. 

(1)  "The  Military  Policy  of  the  United  States,"  by 
Gen.  E.  Upton. 

(2)  "The  Guard  Manual,  United  States  Army." 

(3)  "The  Field  Service  Regulations,  United  States 
Armv." 

(4)  The  Drill  Regulations  of  the  arm  of  the  service 
to  which  you  are  assigned. 

*Some  government  publications  can  be  obtained  at  cost  from  the  Superin- 
tendent of  Public  Documents,  Washington,  U.  C 


196         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

(5)  "Non-commissioned    Officers'    Manual"     (War 
Department  Publication) . 

(6)  "First  Aid  to  the  Sick  and  Injured"  (War  De- 
partment Publication). 

(7)  "Army  Regulations"  (to  be  used  as  a  book  of 
reference  when  needed) . 

(8)  "Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations"    (War  De- 
partment Publication). 

(9)  "A  Manual  for  Courts-Martial,  U.  S.  Army." 

It  is  highly  desirable  for  every  Reserve  Officer  to  place 
his  name  on  the  mailing  list  at  the  Army  Service  School, 
Fort  Leavenworth,  Kansas.  This  costs  about  $1  a  year 
and  in  return  the  officer  receives  much  valuable  informa- 
tion. Write  to  the  Secretary  for  any  further  informa- 
tion desired  on  this  subject. 

FIELD   ORDERS 

Field  orders,  whether  written  or  oral,  should  follow 
a  certain  form.  This  decreases  the  probability  of  any 
vital  part  being  left  out  and  increases  the  probability  of 
the  receiver  or  reader  understanding  it. 

In  the  following  form  for  an  advance,  note  the  order 
in  which  the  paragraphs  occur.     This  is  very  important. 

FOR  AN   ADVANCE 

Field  Orders  (Title) 

No.—  (Place) 

(Reference  to  map  used)  (Date  and  Hour) 

(1)  (Information  of  enemy  and  of  our 
Troops                                supporting  troops) 

(2)  (Plan  of  commander) 

(a)   Independent  (3)    (a)    (Instructions  for  independent 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS 


197 


Cavalry: 
(Commander) 
(Troops) 

(b)  Advance  Guard: 

(Commander) 

(Troops) 

(c)  Main    Body — in 
der   of  march: 

(Commander) 


or- 


cavalry — place  and  time  of  de- 
parture, roads  or  country  to  be 
covered,  special  mission) 

(b)  (Instructions  for  advance 
guard — place  and  time  of  depar- 
ture, or  distance  at  which  it  is  to 
precede  the  main  body,  route, 
special  mission) 

(c)  (Instructions  for  main  body — 
distance  at  which  it  is  to  follow 
the  advance  guard,  or  place  and 
time  of  departure) 

(d)  (Instructions  for  flank  guard 
— place  and  time  of  departure, 
route,  special  mission) 

(e)  (Instructions  for  signal  troops 
— lines  of  information  to  be  es- 
tablished, special  mission) 

(x)  (Instructions  for  outpost — 
when  relieved  subsequent  duties) 

(4)  (Instructions  for  field  train — es- 
cort, distance  in  rear  of  column,  or  destination  when  different  from 
that  of  main  body,  if  disposition  not  previously  covered  in  "Or- 
ders") 

(Instructions  for  sanitary,  ammunition,  suppty  and  engineer 
trains   when  necessary) 

(5)    (Place  of  commander  or  where  messages  may  be  sent) 
(How  and  to  whom  issued) 

(Authentication) 

Notice  in  particular  that  the  first  thing  in  the  body  of 
the  order  is  the  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  sup- 
porting or  friendly  troops;  2d,  the  plan;  3d,  the  de- 
tailed instruction  for  executing  the  plan;  4th,  the  order 
to  field  train;  5th,  the  place  where  the  commander  can 
be  found. 


(d)  Right    (left)    Flank 
Guard : 

(Commander) 
(Troops) 

(e)  Signal  Troops: 

(Commander) 


198        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

All  orders,  whether  for  a  retreat,  an  attack,  a  defense, 
the  establishment  of  an  outpost  and  so  on,  should  take 
this  general  form. 

A   MODEL  ORDER  FOR  AN   ADVANCE 

Field  Orders  "Hq.  1st  Brigade,  1st  Division, 

No.  6  Fort  Leavenworth,  Kansas, 

Three   inch   Leavenworth  20  Aug.  '08,  8  P.  M. 

Map  (1)   Two  regiments  of  hostile  infantry- 
Troops  are  reported  to  have  occupied  Valley 

(a)  Advance   Guard:  Falls  late  this  afternoon,  en  route  for 

Major  A.  Easton.     Small  hostile  cavalry  patrols 

1st  Bn.  &  8  mtd.  order-  were   seen   two   miles   east   of   Valley 

lies,  1st  Inf.  Falls  at  6  P.  M.  to-day. 
1st.  Plat.  Tr.  A.  The  remainder  of  our  division  is  cx- 

7th  Cavalry  pected    to    reach    Fort   Leavenworth 

(b)  Main   Body — in   or-  to-morrow. 

der  of  March:  (2)   This    brigade    (less    the    3d    Inf. 

Colonel  B.  which   has   been   directed   to   hold   the 

1st.   Inf.    (less    1st  Bn.)      Missouri  river  crossing  at  Fort  Leav- 

2d  Infantry  enworth)     will    march    to-morrow    to 

Detachment  3d  F.  Easton   to   hold  the   crossings   of   the 

Hosp.  Big  Stranger  creek. 

(3)  (a)  The  advance  guard  will  clear  D  at  5-15  A.  M.,  marching 
via  the  E — G — Atchison  Pike — 1-74-78-80-Q-R-Easton  road. 
Patrols  will  be  sent  via  Lowemont  to  reconnoiter  the  crossings  of 
the  Big  Stranger  near  Millwood  and  via  Mount  Olivet  to  recon- 
noiter those  near  114. 

(b)   The  main  body  will  follow  at  a  distance  of  about  700  yards. 

(4)  The  baggage  train  (less  that  of  the  3d  Inf.),  escorted  by 
one  squad,  2d  Inf.,  will  start  from  D  at  6-15  A.  M.  and  follow  to 
P  where  it  will  await  further  orders. 

(5)  Reports  will  reach  the  brigade  commander  at  the  head  of 
the  main  body.  By  command  of  Brig.-Gen.  X: 

Y, 
Adjt.  Gen." 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         199 

Copies  by  Adjutant  to  Col.  B.  1st  Inf. 

Col.  C.  2d  Inf. 
Col.  D.  3d  Inf. 
Maj.  A.  1st  Inf. 
Capt.  E.  Tr.  A  7th  Cav. 
Capt.  F.  Hospital  Corps. 

GENERAL   IDEAS  AND   RULES   FOR   SOLVING 
MILITARY    PROBLEMS 

The  cave  man  knocked  over  his  foe  with  a  rude  club. 
The  operation  is  greatly  refined  to-day.  The  technique 
of  war  changes  with  the  ages,  but  human  nature  remains 
the  same.  Whether  with  grenade  or  gas,  from  sub- 
marine or  aeroplane,  a  man  after  all  possible  woe  and 
suffering  is  no  more  than  killed.  Human  nature  will 
submit  to  losses  in  battle  up  to  a  certain  point,  after 
that  the  frailties  are  asserted.  The  instinct  of  self- 
preservation  dominates.  Organization  and  discipline 
and  reason  are  dissipated.  A  condition  ensues  similar 
to  that  which  we  have  in  theaters  during  fires. 

Napoleon's  success  as  a  military  leader  was  due  to 
his  knowledge  of  men  and  how  to  handle  them,  common 
sense,  and  in  a  lesser  degree  to  what  he  learned  from 
books.  Upon  such  a  basis  the  young  managers  of  in- 
dustrial concerns  would  be  most  valuable  material  from 
which  to  select  and  train  successful  military  leaders. 
They  know  men,  and  it  is  necessary  to  possess  a  world 
of  common  sense  to  acquire  any  such  knowledge. 
Many  of  those  elements  that  make  success  in  a  military 
man  are  exactly  the  same  as  those  that  make  a  man 
successful  anywhere.     A  president  of  a  university,  a 


200         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

lawyer  or  banker  or  merchant  or  engineer,  has  exactly 
the  same  kind  of  daily  problems  to  solve,  and  requires 
much  the  same  talents  as  those  possessed  by  a  military 
leader. 

Since  success  in  battle  is  the  thing  at  which  we  are 
driving  in  all  military  training,  it  is  common  sense  to 
prepare  a  machine  that  will  do  the  business.  Every 
officer  and  noncommissioned  officer  has  got  to  know  how 
to  play  the  game.  A  good  private  makes  a  good  cor- 
poral, a  good  corporal  makes  a  good  sergeant,  a  good 
sergeant  makes  a  good  lieutenant — a  good  colonel  makes 
a  good  brigadier  general — all  exactly  as  in  civil  life. 

Prussia  has  had  her  greatest  military  success  when 
she  devoted  her  energies  to  manceuvers  and  to  the  solu- 
tion of  tactical  problems.  Her  defeats  and  humilia- 
tions have  come  when  she  has  neglected  this  work. 
And  there  's  nothing  mysterious  about  the  way  Prussia 
or  Napoleon  or  anybody  else  has  solved  their  military 
problems.  No  occult  forces  are  involved,  any  more 
than  there  is  in  building  a  canal  or  hunting  tigers.  The 
real  general  is,  in  a  sense,  a  postgraduate  hunter,  or  an 
advanced,  ail-American  quarterback. 

One  phase  of  the  military  work  is  significant  and 
should  cause  reflection.  The  punishment  for  errors  in 
war  is  very  severe.  A  leader  who  makes  mistakes  may 
not  only  pay  for  them  with  his  own  blood  but  others  too 
may  suffer  with  him.  In  war  we  must  obey  our  leaders 
whether  they  are  right  or  wrong.  How  great,  do  you 
suppose,  axe  those  hordes  that  have  been   sacrificed 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         201 

on  history's  battlefields  to  the  goddess  of  ignorance? 

Napoleon  says  in  one  of  his  maxims,  "Read  and  re- 
read the  campaigns  of  Alexander,  Caesar,  Gustavus 
Adolphus,  Turrenne,  Eugene,  and  Frederick ;  take  them 
for  your  model ;  that  is  the  only  way  of  becoming  a  great 
captain,  to  obtain  the  secrets  of  the  art  of  war."  To 
read  more  intelligently  such  history  we  should  know 
something  about  solving  problems  in  minor  tactics. 
We  must  know  how  to  solve  such  problems  if  we  are  to 
master  our  duties  as  officers. 

Whether,  as  general  or  corporal,  you  are  solving  a 
problem  on  a  map  or  on  the  ground,  your  methods  will 
be,  in  principle,  the  same.  In  the  former  case  your 
soldiers  understand  thoroughly  all  orders  and  do  ex- 
actly as  directed.  In  the  latter  case  your  soldiers  are 
human.  They  get  tired  and  sick.  They  go  in  the 
wrong  directions  and  get  lost  sometimes.  One  forgets, 
another  is  late,  and  the  third  misinterprets  an  order,  etc. 

Here  is  the  common-sense  way  in  which  an  all-Ameri- 
can quarterback  performs  his  duties.  He  studies  care- 
fully the  opposing  team  (enemy)  by  reports  before- 
hand and  on  the  field  of  the  contest,  to  determine  his 
weak  and  strong  points.  The  latter  he  wishes  to  avoid 
in  directing  his  attack.  He  considers  his  position  on 
the  field,  the  wind  and  weather,  if  raining,  etc.,  and  then 
his  different  plays  to  hit  the  weaker  parts  of  the  oppos- 
ing line  with  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  each. 
To  his  well-trained  mind  all  this  is  done  in  a  flash,  but 
the  lode  and  causes  and  effects  of  action  are  none  the 


202        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

less  present.  This  quarterback  has  analyzed  the  con- 
ditions of  his  problems,  he  has  figured  out  what  he  is  up 
against ;  that  is  to  say,  he  has  estimated  the  situation. 

He  is  now  ready  for  a  decision.  He  determines 
where  he  is  going  to  strike  and  with  what  kind  of  a  play 
he  will  do  it. 

He  gives  a  signal,  44 — 11 — 17 — 5.  That  is  to  say, 
he  issues  his  orders. 

That  is  exactly  the  way  a  military  man,  whether  he 
be  a  corporal  or  a  general,  goes  about  handling  a  prob- 
lem, whether  on  paper  or  on  the  ground.  When  he 
goes  into  battle  he  finds  the  only  difference  is  that  the 
problem  is  complicated  by  bullets  and  excitement. 

Don't  think  that  you  are  going  to  learn  to  solve  prob- 
lems from  books  alone,  any  more  than  you  can  learn 
to  play  tennis  or  build  bridges  on  paper.  You  have 
got  to  get  out  into  the  country  and  work  with  actual 
troops.  But  first  study  map  problems.  Come  to  a 
decision  slowly  until  you  have  had  considerable  practice, 
then  write  out  your  order  with  no  guides  or  references. 
Then  check  yourself  up.  Common  sense  and  simple 
plans  are  the  safest  guides. 

To  frame  a  suitable  field  order  you  must  make  an 
estimate  of  the  situation,  culminating  in  a  decision  upon 
a  definite  plan  of  action.  You  must  then  actually  draft 
or  word  the  orders  which  will  carry  your  decision  into 
effect. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         203 

THE   LOGICAL   WAY   TO   ESTIMATE   THE   SITUATION 

1st.  Consider  exactly  what  you  are  to  do,  i.e.,  your 
mission  as  set  forth  in  the  orders  or  instructions  under 
which  you  are  acting  or  as  deduced  by  you  from  your 
knowledge  of  the  situation. 

2d.  Consider  all  available  information  of  the  enemy. 
What  is  his  strength?  How  is  he  situated?  What  is 
he. going  to  do?  etc. 

3d.  Consider  all  conditions  affecting  your  own  troops. 
What  advantages  in  numbers  and  position  have  you 
over  the  enemy?     What  is  their  morale?  etc. 

4th.  Consider  the  terrain  in  so  far  as  it  affects  the 
situation. 

5th.  Consider  the  various  plans  of  action  open  to  you 
and  decide  upon  the  one  that  will  best  enable  you  to 
accomplish  your  mission  (carry  out  your  task)  ;  that  is 
to  say,  come  to  a  decision. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  express  that  decision  in  the 
form  of  an  order  as  the  quarterback  did  in  giving  the 
signal,  44 — 11 — 17 — 5. 

To  enable  the  will  of  the  commander  to  be  quickly 
understood,  and  to  secure  prompt  cooperation  among 
his  subordinates,  field  orders  are  required  to  follow  a 
general  form. 

Under  the  stress  and  strain  of  an  engagement  there 
are  many  causes  of  excitement.  Unless  we  have  trained 
ourselves  to  act  along  certain  lines  in  issuing  orders, 
we  may  forget  some  important   considerations.     We 


204        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

have  known  people  of  superb  intelligence  to  do  poorly 
before  a  large  audience  simply  from  lack  of  training 
and  experience. 

COEEECT   PEOCEDUEE   IN   GIVING   THE   MAIN   PAET 
OF  A  FIELD   OEDEE 

1st.  Give  the  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  our 
own  supporting  troops  (i.e.,  those  who  may  come  to  our 
assistance  in  case  of  need)  to  your  subordinates  that  will 
give  them  a  clear  understanding  of  the  problem  and 
enable  them  intelligently  to  cooperate  with  you. 

2d.  Now  state  what  you  are  going  to  do.  That  is  to 
say,  give  your  plan. 

3d.  Next,  how  you  are  going  to  put  that  plan  into 
effect.  That  is,  the  assignment  of  duties  to  each  sub- 
ordinate. 

4th.  Give  instructions  for  the  ammunition  trains, 
stations  for  the  slightly  wounded,  etc. 

5th.  State  where  you  can  be  found  or  where  messages 
may  be  sent. 

SOME   GENEEAL   HINTS 

Clear  and  decisive  orders  are  the  logical  result  of 
definite  and  sure  decisions.  To  gage  a  man's  caliber 
read  his  orders. 

You  must  not  be  hazy  and  indefinite  in  your  order. 
You  must  be  clear  and  definite.  Be  careful  about  your 
phrasing  and  expressions.  An  order  should  be  like  a 
cablegram:  convey  every  idea  but  contain  no  unneces- 
sary words. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         205 

Don't  break  up  the  squads  or  platoons  or  the  com- 
panies. Keep  the  tactical  units  together  as  much  as 
possible. 

It  is  marvelous  how  many  mistakes  can  occur  on  the 
battlefield.  Attempt  a  complicated  plan  and  its  failure 
is  reasonably  assured.  Have  your  plan  simple.  The 
enveloping  attack  is  the  best.  That  is  to  say,  have  your 
line  longer  than  the  enemy's  so  that  you  can  attack  one 
of  his  flanks.  He  knows  this  quite  as  well  as  you  and 
he  will  endeavor  to  perform  the  same  operation  upon 
you.  The  leader,  all  else  being  equal,  who  has  the 
wit  to  out-manoeuver  the  other  will  win  the  engage- 
ment. 

As  a  rule,  an  affirmative  form  of  expression  is  used. 
Such  an  order  as:  "The  supply  train  will  not  accom- 
pany the  division,"  is  defective,  because  the  gist  of  the 
order  depends  upon  the  single  word  "not." 

Write  your  order  so  it  can  be  read.  Don't  go  about 
it  as  though  you  were  a  doctor  writing  a  prescription. 
Things  will  go  wrong  if  you  do.  You  will  find  some 
of  your  troops  moving  in  the  wrong  direction  when  you 
need  them  badly. 

Be  brief.  Short  sentences  are  good.  They  are 
clear.  Conjectures,  expectations,  and  reasons  for 
measures  adopted  are  weak.  They  do  not  inspire  con- 
fidence.    They  should  be  avoided. 

Accept  the  entire  responsibility  of  your  command. 
If  things  go  wrong,  it 's  your  fault.  Correct  them.  A 
large  number  of  military  men  make  it  their  particular 


200        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

business  to  find  faults  in  others,  with  scarcely  a  thought 
for  their  own.  Don't  join  this  club.  Reverse  the  mat- 
ter. 

Avoid  such  expressions  as  "attempt  to  capture,"  "try 
to  hold,"  "as  far  as  possible,"  "as  well  as  you  can,"  etc. 
Tell  a  man  what  he  is  to  do.  Don't  divide  any  responsi- 
bility with  any  one. 

Officers  and  men  of  all  ranks  and  grades  are  given 
a  certain  independence  in  the  execution  of  the  tasks  to 
whjch  they  are  assigned  and  are  expected  to  show  initia- 
tive in  meeting  the  different  situations  as  they  arise. 
Every  individual,  from  the  highest  commander  to  the 
lowest  private,  must  always  remember  that  inaction  and 
neglect  of  opportunities  will  warrant  severe  censure. 
Do  something  that  will  help  carry  out  the  plans  of  your 
commander.  The  Japanese  regulations  caution  their 
commanders  to  avoid  inaction  and  hesitation. 

If  you  were  hunting  tigers  and  permitted  a  wounded 
one  to  move  to  your  rear  and  spring  upon  you,  unaware 
of  its  presence,  you  would  probably  pay  a  heavy  price 
for  not  being  on  the  alert.  For  a  military  leader  to  be 
caught  unawares  is  unpardonable. 

Napoleon  said  in  another  of  his  maxims:  "If  the 
enemy's  army  were  to  appear  on  my  front,  or  on  my 
right  or  left,  what  would  I  do?"  If  the  question  is  dif- 
ficult for  the  commander  to  answer,  his  troops  are  not 
only  poorly  placed  but  are  poorly  led. 

Don't  let  your  force  be  divided  up  into  detachments 
and  roam  all  over  the  country.     This  is  a  very  common 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         207 

error  with  beginners.  Avoid  dispersion.  Keep  your 
troops  together. 

You  cannot  fire  on  the  battlefield  with  the  same  ac- 
curacy as  you  do  on  the  target  range.  Fear  dilates  the 
pupil  of  the  eye.  Men  cannot  shoot  well  when  they  are 
under  great  excitement.  Don't  count  on  killing  too 
many  of  the  enemy  with  a  carload  of  ammunition. 

Never  forget  that  Fire  Superiority  is  the  thing  that 
wins  battles.  If  you  let  the  other  fellow  get  it  and  keep 
it,  he  's  going  to  win,  not  you. 

Don't  trespass  upon  the  province  of  a  subordinate. 
He  will  handle  his  job  if  you  will  handle  yours. 

Remember  that  your  flanks  are  just  as  vulnerable 
as  the  enemy's.  He  has  his  eyes  on  your  flanks  just  as 
much  as  you  are  observing  and  considering  his  own. 

Keep  cool  about  starting  the  action.  Don't  put  all 
your  men  in  before  you  understand  thoroughly  the  con- 
dition confronting  you.  Hold  a  large  part  of  your 
force  out  as  supports  and  reserves  until  you  know  defi- 
nitely the  enemy's  position. 

Don't  get  killed  unless  necessary;  your  usefulness  to 
the  State  comes  to  an  end  when  that  occurs.  Take 
advantage  of  cover,  hug  the  ground.  Learn  what  is 
good  and  what  is  poor  cover. 

It  is  a  common  fault  to  forget  about  the  service  of 
information  once  the  action  has  begun.  Keep  up  your 
patrolling.  Keep  yourself  posted  on  what  the  enemy  is 
about.  Otherwise  he  may  have  some  unpleasant  sur- 
prise for  you. 


208        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Be  particularly  careful  about  details  of  time  and 
place.  Regulate  your  watch  by  the  time  kept  at  head- 
quarters. 

When  you  Ve  got  the  enemy  on  the  run  don't  let  up 
for  an  instant.  Pursue  him  without  mercy.  Turn  his 
retreat  into  a  rout.     Capture  or  destroy  his  forces. 

Scarcely  any  of  these  things  we  are  telling  you  are 
new.  They  are  as  old  as  war  itself.  The  boxer  of  a 
thousand  years  from  now  may  know  a  little  more  about 
the  technique  of  the  game,  but  the  essentials  will  not 
change.  To  wear  the  champion's  belt,  he  will  have  to 
suffer  some  lusty  blows  and  be  able  himself  to  deliver 
some  more  powerful.  There  will  be  no  easy  road  to 
the  title.     So  it  is  with  all  wars. 

SUMMARY 

We  recommend  that  each  officer  become  familiar  with 
the  following  summary : 

"1.  Avoid  combats  that  offer  no  chance  of  victory  or 
other  valuable  results. 

"2.  Make  every  effort  for  the  success  of  the  general 
plan  and  avoid  spectacular  plays  that  have  no  bearing  on 
the  general  result. 

"3.  Have  a  definite  plan  and  carry  it  out  vigorously. 
Do  not  vacillate. 

"4.  Do  not  attempt  complicated  manceuvers. 

"5.  Keep  the  command  in  hand;  avoid  undue  exten- 
sion and  dispersion. 

"6.  Study  the  ground  and  direct  the  advance  in  such 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         209 

a  way  as  to  take  advantage  of  all  available  cover  and 
thereby  diminish  losses. 

"7.  Never  deploy  until  the  purpose  and  the  proper 
direction  are  known. 

"8.  Deploy  enough  men  for  the  immediate  task  in 
hand;  hold  out  the  rest  and  avoid  undue  haste  in  com- 
mitting them  to  the  action. 

"9.  Flanks  must  be  protected  either  by  reserves,  for- 
tifications, or  the  terrain. 

"10.  In  a  decisive  action,  gain  and  keep  fire  superi- 
ority. 

"11.  Keep  up  reconnaissance. 

"12.  Use  the  reserve,  but  not  until  needed  or  a  very 
favorable  opportunity  for  its  use  presents  itself.  Keep 
some  reserve  as  long  as  practicable. 

"13.  Do  not  hesitate  to  sacrifice  the  command  if  the 
result  is  worth  the  cost. 

"14.  Spare  the  command  all  unnecessary  hardship 
and  exertion." 

— Infantry  Drill  Regulations. 

MISCELLANEOUS   INFORMATION 

For  convenience,  military  information  is  considered 
under  two  heads,  namely  (1)  that  collected  in  time  of 
peace  by  the  body  of  army  experts  in  Washington  called 
the  General  Staff;  and  (2)  that  obtained  by  troops  in 
the  field  after  war  has  begun.  The  former  relates  to 
general  conditions  such  as  the  geography,  resources,  and 
military  strength  of  the  various  nations,  information 
necessary  to  enable  the  General  Staff  to  act  intelligently 


210        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

in  the  event  of  war.     The  latter  relates  to  more  local 
and  detailed  conditions  out  on  the  firing  line. 

For  a  general  to  act  intelligently  he  must  possess  in- 
formation of  the  position,  strength,  dispositions,  inten- 
tions, etc.,  of  his  opponent.  This  may  be  obtained  from 
a  number  of  sources — adjoining  troops,  inhabitants, 
newspapers,  letters,  telegraph  files,  prisoners,  deserters, 
spies,  maps,  but  mostly  from  information-gathering 
groups,  called  reconnoitering  patrols.  When  the  avail- 
able maps  do  not  show  all  the  military  features  of  the 
country,  officers  and  soldiers  must  go  on  ahead  and  make 
maps  that  do. 

INTELLIGENCE   SECTION   GENERAL   STAFF 

There  is  a  special  committee  of  the  Great  General 
Staff  called  the  Intelligence  Section,  whose  business  it  is 
to  weigh  and  classify  all  information  sent  to  it.  Mem- 
bers of  this  committee  are  placed  on  duty  with  large  or- 
ganizations (for  instance,  a  division,  a  field  army,  etc.). 

ASSUMPTION   OF   THE   ENEMY 

When  reliable  information  of  the  enemy  cannot  be  ob- 
tained, it  must  be  assumed  that  he  has  sense  and  will 
act  with  excellent  judgment. 

FALSE    INFORMATION 

Unless  instructions  have  been  given  to  spread  false 
information,  all  persons  connected  with  the  military  ser- 
vice are  forbidden  to  discuss  the  military  situation,  plans, 
movements,  etc.,  with,  or  in  the  presence  of,  civilians  of 
ant/  age,  sex  or  nationality. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         211 

FIRE 

There  are  three  kinds  of  fire  : 

(1)  Volley  Fire,  Every  one  fires  at  the  command 
FIRE.  It  is  used  at  funerals  and  occasionally  in  the 
first  part  of  an  action  when  the  enemy  presents  a  large, 
compact  target. 

(2)  Fire  At  Will.  In  this  each  soldier  fires,  loads, 
and  fires  again  independently  of  the  others.  He  fires 
fast  or  slow  as  the  occasion  demands. 

(3)  Clip  Fire.  The  soldier  stops  firing  when  he  has 
finished  his  clip  of  five  cartridges.  This  assists  in  pre- 
venting an  undue  expenditure  of  ammunition  and  in 
abating  excitement. 

THE     DIFFERENCE     BETWrEEN     INDEPENDENT     AND    DIVI- 
SIONAL   CAVALRY 

The  main  difficulty  in  seeing  the  distinction  between 
Independent  and  Divisional  Cavalry  consists  in  our  for- 
getting that  we  have  different  kinds  of  organizations  in 
the  army  as  well  as  we  have  anywhere  else.  Let  us 
clearly  understand  this : 

(1)  An  Infantry  Division  is  composed  of  nine  regi- 
ments of  infantry,  two  of  artillery,  and  one  of  cavalry. 

(2)  A  Cavalry  Division  is  composed  of  nine  regi- 
ments of  cavalry,  one  regiment  of  horse  artillery,  and 
no  infantry. 

The  cavalry  attached  to  an  Infantry  Division  is,  in 
general,  called  Divisional  Cavalry.  It  operates  at  but 
comparatively  short  distances  from  its  division,  its  duties 
being  of  a  somewrhat  local  nature. 


212        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

The  Independent  Cavalry,  because  it  can  move  so 
rapidly,  is  sent  far  in  advance  (thirty,  forty,  or  even  fifty 
or  more  miles)  of  the  main  army  to  obtain  general  in- 
formation, such  as  the  approximate  strength  and  loca- 
tion of  the  enemy's  forces.  The  Division  Commander, 
since  he  is  so  far  away  from  the  Commanding  General 
of  the  army  in  rear,  and  since  he  has  broad  general 
duties  to  perform,  must  of  necessity  have  broad  powers 
and,  in  general,  be  permitted  to  act  as  the  occasion  de- 
mands. He  is,  therefore,  said  to  act  independently,  and 
his  cavalry  is  called  Independent  Cavalry. 

THE    DIFFERENCE    BETWEEN    STRATEGY    AND    TACTICS 

Strategy  is  generalship  in  its  broadest  conception.  A 
strategist  conceives  and  projects  campaigns.  He  de- 
termines where  armies  and  navies  are  to  be  sent.  He  is 
not  concerned  with  the  handling  or  manoeuvers  of  armies 
and  fleets.  He  turns  over  those  details  to  tacticians. 
He  is  the  master  mind,  far  removed,  generally,  from 
the  battle  line,  who  picks  up  an  army  or  fleet  here,  and 
puts  it  there. 

Tactics  is  the  act  and  science  of  disposing  (arranging) 
armies  and  fleets  in  order  for  battle.  A  tactical  com- 
mander (tactician)  solves  local  details. 

Strategy  pertains  to  conception,  to  policy;  tactics,  to 
technique. 

The  great  General  Staff  in  Washington  inaugurates 
the  problems  to  be  solved  (strategy),  and  details  com- 
manders (tacticians)  to  solve  them. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         213 

EMPLOYMENT    OF    AIR    CRAFT    ON    AND    NEAR    THE    VTk* 
ING  LINE  IN  THE  THEATER  OF  OPERATION 

Airplanes  will  move  far  out,  perhaps  hundreds  of 
miles,  in  front  of  our  most  advanced  cavalry  for  the  pur- 
pose of  gathering  general  information  of  large  bodies 
of  the  enemy's  forces.  This  is  called  Strategical  Recon- 
naissance. Other  airplanes  do  more  local  scouting. 
They  go  but  comparatively  short  distances  from  the 
firing  line  for  the  purpose  of  determining  the  location 
of  trenches,  supports,  reserves,  artillery  positions,  etc. 
This  is  called  tactical  reconnaissance.  They  give  their 
artillery  commanders  information  as  to  where  their  pro- 
jectiles are  falling. 

During  siege  operations  (as  in  Europe,  where  some 
trenches  have  remained  in  about  the  same  place  for  long 
periods)  photographers  go  up  in  airplanes  each  morning 
and  photograph  the  enemy's  trench  lines.  Blue  prints 
are  made  of  these  lines.  By  comparing  these  with  the 
lines  of  the  previous  day  it  is  easy  to  determine  the 
changes  that  have  been  made  during  the  night. 
.  Other  airplanes  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  com- 
bat. They  prevent  opposing  airplanes  from  gathering 
information. 

THE    BIG    IDEAS    OF    MARCHES 

For  marches  to  be  entirely  successful  three  conditions 
must  be  fulfilled:  (1)  the  troops  must  get  there;  (2) 
they  must  get  there  on  time;  (3)  and  they  must  get  there 
in  good  condition. 


214         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Now  suppose  that  you  were  ordered  to  conduct  the 
march  of  a  company  of  green  men  for  a  distance  of  200 
miles,  just  how  would  you  solve  the  problem? 

Before  starting,  very  careful  preparations  should  be 
made.  Your  men  should  be  in  good  physical  condition ; 
they  must  be  given  so  much  work  that  they  are  athletes. 

Keep  these  points  in  mind : 

1.  Always  have,  when  possible,  the  comfort  of  your 
men  in  mind.  Their  work  in  carrying  a  load  of  nearly 
forty  pounds  and  marching  around  fifteen  miles  a  day 
will  be  hard  enough.  Don't  give  them  any  extra  hard- 
ships. 

2.  Make  the  conditions  of  the  march  pleasant.  En- 
courage the  men  to  laugh  and  sing. 

3.  Use  wagons,  automobiles,  etc.,  to  cany  heavy  loads 
(burdens)  whenever  possible. 

4.  It  is  a  custom  of  the  service  to  help  a  man  who  may 
not  be  strong  physically  but  who  is  straining  every  nerve 
to  get  there.  Be  the  first  to  volunteer  to  carry  for  him 
his  rifle  or  part  of  his  burden. 

6.  Look  out  especially  for  the  feet  of  your  men  and 
the  hoofs  of  your  animals. 

6.  On  long  marches  one  day  in  seven  should  be  a  day 
of  rest  and  recreation. 

7.  Never  take  an  extremely  hard  and  long  (forced) 
march  unless  imperative. 

8.  As  a  rule  troops  pay  no  compliments  on  the  march. 
They  have  enough  to  do  without  that. 

9.  Let  the  object  to  be  accomplished  determine  the 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         215 

general  conduct  of  the  inarch  (the  time  of  starting,  the 
rate,  length  of  march,  halts,  etc. ) . 

SHELTER 

When  troops  are  sheltered  under  canvas  (in  tents), 
they  are  in  camp.  When  they  are  resting  on  the  ground 
without  tents  (for  instance,  on  the  firing  line  the  night 
before  or  during  a  battle),  they  are  in  what  is  called 
bivouac.  When  they  occupy  buildings  in  towns  or  vil- 
lages, or  huts  especially  erected,  they  are  in  cantonment. 
WJien  they  are  assigned  to  public  (such  as  post-offices, 
town  halls,  court  houses,  hotels,  etc.)  or  private  build- 
ings they  are  said  to  be  billeted. 

SELECTION    OF   A   CAMPING   GROUND 

Suppose  that  you  were  sent  on  ahead  of  troops  on 
the  march  to  select  a  camp  ground  for  them,  what  big 
ideas  should  you  bear  in  mind. 

1.  The  ground  should  be  large  enough  for  the  troops 
without  crowding.  In  case  of  rain  it  should  be  easily 
drained.  And  there  should  be  no  stagnant  water  rear 
(say,  within  300  yards) . 

2.  There  should  be  plenty  of  pure  water. 

3.  There  should  be  good  roads  around. 

4.  Wood,  grass,  forage,  and  supplies  for  the  men  and 
animals  must  be  at  hand  or  obtainable.  Closely  cropped 
turf  with  sandy  or  gravelly  subsoil  is  best. 

Let  us  not  forget  that  good  old-fashioned  guide,  com- 
mon sense.  Men  are  as  human  in  camp  as  elsewhere. 
In   hot  weathfer   shade  trees   are   desirable.     In  cold 


216        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

weather  ground  sloping  to  the  south,  with  woods  to  break 
the  winds  is  fine. 

Avoid  old  camp  grounds,  marshy  ground,  and  places 
where  mosquitoes  are  plentiful. 

ADVICE    TO    OFFICERS 

A  company  of  infantry  is  composed  of  three  officers 
and  one  hundred  and  fifty  non-commissioned  officers 
and  privates.  What  a  shame  to  have  a  private  the 
mental  and  moral  superior  of  those  above  him! 

The  average  American  makes  a  first-rate  soldier.  He 
wants  his  officers  to  be  efficient  and  high-toned  leaders. 
It  thrills  him  to  have  their  actions  pitched  in  a  high  key. 
He  wants  to  be  well  instructed.  He  wants  to  be  led 
with  tact  and  diplomacy.  He  wants  them  to  be  neat, 
to  dress  immaculately,  and  to  be  military  in  bearing. 
He  wants  to  feel  that  there  is  no  favoritism;  that  justice 
prevails. 

Be  stern  in  discipline.  Exact  nothing  less  than  the 
best  in  a  man.  Tolerate  no  slovenliness.  Deal  laziness 
a  sharp  rebuke.  The  great  majority  of  your  men  are 
doing  their  level  best.  Let  them  know  that  this  is  what 
you  expect,  but  at  the  same  time  you  appreciate  them 
for  it. 

When  a  thing  is  wrong,  say  so.  Explain  the  correct 
method.  Do  so  calmly  and  efficiently.  You  have  made 
worse  mistakes  yourself.  Your  men  did  not  want  to 
make  the  mistake.  They  did  so  from  ignorance.  It  is 
possible  that  you  have  not  made  the  matter  clear  to  them, 
or  the  fault  is  yours  not  theirs. 


OFFICERS'  RESERVE  CORPS         217 

Don't  be  too  intimate  with  your  men.  Experience 
has  proven  that  you  cannot  fraternize  with  an  enlisted 
man  one  minute  and  then  punish  him  for  misconduct 
the  next. 

When  you  discipline  a  man,  first  make  him  see  his 
error  from  your  point  of  view,  and  then,  reprimand  him 
or  decide  on  his  punishment  in  an  absolutely  impersonal 
manner. 

Grow  impatient,  become  excited,  and  irritable,  rebuke 
too  severely  an  uninstructed  man  who  has  made  a  small, 
unintentional  mistake,  use  any  words  unworthy  of  your 
position — and  you  demonstrate  clearly  to  your  men  your 
unworthiness  to  hold  your  office. 

When  there  is  peace  and  harmony  and  efficiency  in 
your  organization,  you  are  responsible  for  it.  When 
there  are  grumblings,  lack  of  enthusiasm  and  esprit-de- 
corps,  be  honest  and  sensible  and  see  if  you  are  also  not 
responsible  for  it.  No  matter  how  badly  things  are 
going  at  drill,  never  lose  your  temper  with  the  company. 

When  things  are  going  well,  let  your  men  feel  that 
you  are  proud  of  them.  A  company  should  be  like  a 
good  football  team:  every  man  in  it  right  behind  the 
captain. 

A  FINAL   WORD 

Now  it  is  proper  to  consider  your  relation  to  your 
immediate  superiors.  You  have  no  business  command- 
ing; unless  you  have  first  learned  how  to  obev.  The  finer 
the  training  and  caliber  of  an  officer,  the  more  sensitive 


218        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

is  he  to  the  wishes  of  his  commanding  officer,  however 
informally  they  may  be  expressed. 

The  ideal  officer  is  a  Christian  gentleman  who  has  no 
task  too  small  to  faithfully  perform,  whose  country's 
welfare  is  above  his  own,  ready  for  any  sacrifice  great 
or  small ;  whose  thoughtf ulness  and  efficiency  last  twen- 
ty-four hours  a  day,  whose  relations  with  his  superiors 
are  based  on  modesty,  cheerfulness,  and  loyalty. 

A  message  from  the  Father  and  Mother  whose  son  is 
to  serve  under  you : 

"I  want  my  boy  to  do  his  bit.  I  want  him  to  willingly 
submit  to  all  sacrifices.  I  don't  limit  them.  I  expect  him 
to  become  efficient.  I  expect  him  to  obey  orders.  That 
means  all  orders.  Wrong  orders  as  well  as  right  orders. 

But  I  want  him  to  have  a  fighting  chance.  I  don't 
want  him  to  serve  under  an  inefficient  officer  who  is  play- 
ing to  the  galleries;  who  is  in  the  habit  of  doing  tilings 
wrong  instead  of  right.  If  the  worst  should  come,  I 
want  my  boy  to  perish  for  a  good  cause.  I  don't  want 
there  to  be  any  blunders  about  it. 

In  willingly  placing  my  boy  under  your  orders,  I 
charge  you  with  a  sacred  task.  I  charge  you  to  lead  him 
efficiently." 


SUPPLEMENT 
ADVANCE  WORK 


SUPPLEMENT 

CHAPTER  I 

THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY 
(Copied  from  the  Field  Service  Regulations) 

GENERAL   PRINCIPLES 

Security  embraces  all  those  measures  taken  by  a  com- 
mand to  protect  itself  from  observation,  annoyance,  or 
surprise  by  the  enemy. 

Ordinarily  this  security  is  provided  in  part  by  cavalry. 
But  as  a  command  is  not  always  preceded  by  cavalry, 
and  as  this  cavalry  can  not  always  prevent  sudden  in- 
cursions of  the  enemy  or  discover  his  patrols,  additional 
security  becomes  necessary.  This  is  obtained  by  cover- 
ing the  immediate  front  of  the  command  with  detach- 
ments. 

On  the  march  these  detachments  are  called  advance, 
flank,  or  rear  guards ;  in  camp  or  bivouac  they  are  called 
outposts. 

The  object  of  the  former  is  to  facilitate  the  movement 
of  the  main  body  and  to  protect  it  from  surprise  and 
observation;  the  object  of  the  latter  is  to  secure  the 
camp  or  bivouac  against  surprise  and  to  prevent  an  at- 
tack upon  it  before  the  troops  can  prepare  to  resist. 

221 


222         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

On  the  march  these  detachments  facilitate  the  advance 
of  the  main  body  by  promptly  driving  off  small  bodies 
of  the  enemy  who  seek  to  harass  or  delay  it ;  by  remov- 
ing obstacles  from  the  line  of  advance;  by  repairing 
roads,  bridges,  etc.,  thus  enabling  the  main  body  to  ad- 
vance uninterruptedly  in  convenient  marching  forma- 
tions. 

They  protect  the  main  body  by  preventing  the  enemy 
from  firing  into  it  when  in  close  formation;  by  holding 
the  enemy  and  enabling  the  main  body  to  deploy  before 
coming  under  effective  fire;  by  preventing  its  size  and 
condition  being  observed  by  the  enemy;  and,  in  retreat, 
by  gaining  time  for  it  to  make  its  escape  or  to  reorganize 
its  forces. 

As  the  principal  duty  of  these  bodies  is  the  same, 
viz.,  that  of  protecting  the  main  body,  there  is  a  general 
similarity  in  the  formations  assumed  by  them.  There  is 
(1)  the  cavalry  covering  the  front;  next,  (2)  a  group, 
or  line  of  groups,  in  observation;  then  (3)  the  support, 
or  line  of  supports,  whose  duty  is  to  furnish  the  observa- 
tion groups,  and  check  the  enemy  pending  the  arrival 
of  reinforcements;  still  farther  in  rear  is  (4)  the  reserve. 

An  advance  or  flank  guard  commander  marches  well 
to  the  front,  and,  from  time  to  time,  orders  such  addi- 
tional reconnaissance  or  makes  such  changes  in  his  dis- 
positions as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  demand. 

In  large  commands  troops  from  all  arms  are  generally 
detailed,  the  proportion  from  each  being  determined  by 
the  tactical  situation;  but  commanders  detail  no  more 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY         223 

troops  than  the  situation  actually  requires,  as  an  exces- 
sive amount  of  such  duty  rapidly  impairs  the  efficiency 
of  a  command.  As  a  general  rule  troops  detailed  on  the 
service  of  security  vary  in  strength  from  one  twentieth 
to  one  third  of  the  entire  command,  but  seldom  exceed 
the  latter.  When  practicable,  the  integrity  of  tactical 
units  is  preserved. 

In  mixed  commands  infantry  usually  forms  the 
greater  part  of  the  troops  detailed  to  the  service  of  se- 
curity. Cavalry  is  assigned  to  that  duty  whenever  ad- 
vantage can  be  taken  of  its  superior  mobility.  The 
kind  and  amount  of  artillery  are  determined  by  circum- 
stances. 

The  field  trains  of  troops  on  this  duty  generally  re- 
main with  the  field  train  of  the  command,  but  if  condi- 
tions permit  they  may  join  their  organizations. 

Troops  on  the  service  of  security  pay  no  compliments ; 
individuals  salute  when  they  address,  or  arc  addressed 
by,  a  superior  officer. 

ADVANCE  GUAEDS 

An  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the  main  body 
which  precedes  and  covers  it  on  the  march. 
Its  duties  are: 

(1)  To  guard  against  surprise  and  furnish  informa- 
tion by  reconnoitering  to  the  front  and  flanks. 

(2)  To  push  back  small  parties  of  the  enemy  and  pre- 
vent their  observing,  firing  upon,  or  delaying  the  main 
body* 


224        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

(3)  To  check  the  enemy's  advance  in  force  long 
enough  to  permit  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

(4)  When  the  enemy  is  encountered  on  the  defensive, 
to  seize  a  good  position  and  locate  his  lines,  care  being 
taken  not  to  bring  on  a  general  engagement  unless  the 
advance-guard  commander  is  empowered  to  do  so. 

(5)  To  remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road,  and  favor 
in  every  way  possible  the  steady  march  of  the  column. 

STRENGTH   AND   COMPOSITION 

Subject  to  variation  according  to  the  situation,  one 
twentieth  to  one  third  of  a  command  may  be  assumed 
as  a  suitable  strength  for  the  advance  guard.  The 
larger  the  force,  the  larger  in  proportion  is  the  advance 
guard,  for  a  large  command  takes  relatively  longer  to 
prepare  for  action  than  a  small  one.  In  large  com- 
mands it  is  usually  composed  of  all  arms,  the  propor- 
tions depending  on  the  nature  of  the  work,  character  of 
the  country,  etc. 

DISTANCE  FROM  THE   MAIN   BODY 

While  the  distance  between  these  two  bodies  should 
be  great  enough  to  prevent  needless  interruptions  in 
the  march  of  the  main  body,  and  to  give  the  latter  time 
to  deploy  should  the  enemy  be  encountered,  it  should 
never  be  so  great  that  timely  support  of  the  advance 
guard  becomes  impracticable. 


PLATE  SHOWING  ~IDEA3  INVOLVED  IN  -  ADVANCE  OUARD 

As  You  9°  from  the  point  to  the  main  body  note  that  the  distances 
are  greater  as  the  groups  become  larger.     Lander  groups   require 
more  time  and  space,   when  getting  ready    tor  action .    than 
5  ma  it  groups.   A  very  important  thing    to  remember  in  connection 
with  this  pi  ate  /s  that  you  have,  onty  5uch  groups   in  an  advance 
guard  as   are   necessary    to   insure   protection   for   the  mam 
body 

f  £  Point 


Patmls  here  if 
necessary 


I  Advance 
\f>exr-fy 


Patrols  here  if 
necessary 


Support 


Juch  patrols  on  each* 
flank  as  conditions 

flank  as  condi/ions 

make  necessary 

make  necessary 

w 

I 


Fatrob  If  necessary 


Main 
Body 


Patrols  Jf  necessary 


225 


226         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

DISTRIBUTION    OF   TROOPS 

An  advance-guard  order  generally  prescribes  the  fol- 
lowing distribution  of  troops: 

Advance  cavalry. 

Support. 

Reserve. 

The  manner  in  which  the  advance-guard  cavalry  is 
employed  depends  upon  the  situation.  Its  proper  place 
is  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy,  and  generally  all  or  the 
greater  part  is  used  as  advance  cavalry.  If  weak  in 
numbers,  it  may  be  assigned  to  the  support. 

ADVANCE   CAVALRY 

The  advance  cavalry  is  that  part  of  the  advance-guard 
cavalry  preceding  the  support.  It  reconnoiters  far 
enough  to  the  front  and  flanks  to  guard  the  column 
against  surprise  by  artillery  fire,  and  to  enable  timely  in- 
formation to  be  sent  to  the  advance-guard  commander. 

SUPPORT 

Following  the  advance  cavalry  is  the  support,  varying 
in  strength  from  one  fourth  to  one  half  of  the  advance 
guard.  In  mixed  commands  it  consists  of  infantiy,  to 
which  engineers  may  be  attached.  If  there  is  no  ad- 
vance cavalry,  some  cavalry  should  be  attached  to  the 
support  for  reconnoitering  duty. 

As  the  support  moves  out  it  sends  forward  an  ad- 
vance party  several  hundred  yards,  the  distance  varying 
with  the  terrain  and  the  size  of  the  command. 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY        227 

The  advance  party  supplements  the  work  of  the  ad- 
vance cavalry,  reconnoitering  to  the  front  and  flanks  to 
guard  the  support  against  surprise  by  effective  rifle  fire. 
The  patrol  preceding  the  advance  party  on  the  line  of 
march  is  called  the  point,  and  is  commanded  by  an  offi- 
cer or  an  experienced  noncommissioned  officer. 

With  the  advance  cavalry  in  front  but  little  recon- 
noitering by  infantry  is  necessary,  and  the  advance  party 
is  relatively  small — one  eighth  to  one  third  of  the  sup- 
port. If  there  is  no  advance  cavalry,  the  advance  party 
is  made  stronger  (about  one  half  of  the  support)  and 
the  flanks  are  guarded,  if  necessary,  by  additional  pa- 
trols sent  out  from  the  support  and  even  from  the  re- 
serve. 

The  support  commander  ordinarily  marches  with  the 
advance  party,  but  goes  wherever  needed.  He  sees  that 
the  proper  road  is  followed ;  that  guides  are  left  in  towns 
and  at  crossroads;  that  necessary  repairs  are  made  to 
roads,  bridges,  etc.,  and  that  information  of  the  enemy 
or  affecting  the  march  is  promptly  transmitted  to  the  ad- 
vance-guard commander.  He  endeavors  promptly  to 
verify  information  of  the  enemy. 

RESERVE 

The  reserve  follows  the  support  at  several  hundred 
yards'  distance.  It  consists  of  the  remainder  of  the  in- 
fantry and  engineers,  the  artillery,  and  the  ambulance 
company.     The  artillery  usually  marches  near  the  head 


228        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

of  the  reserve,  the  engineers  (with  bridge  train,  if  any) 
and  special  troops  at  the  rear. 


RECONNAISSANCE 

In  conducting  the  reconnaissance  the  patrols  are,  as 
a  rule,  small — from  two  to  six  men.  If  additional  pro- 
tection is  necessary,  a  flank  guard  covers  the  threatened 
flank.  The  flanking  patrols,  whether  of  the  advance 
cavalry  or  advance  party,  are  sent  out  to  examine  the 
country  wherever  the  enemy  might  be  concealed.  If 
the  nature  of  the  terrain  permits,  these  patrols  march 
across  country  or  along  roads  and  trails  paralleling  the 
march  of  the  column.  For  cavalry  patrols  this  is  often 
possible;  but  with  infantiy  patrols  and  even  with  those 
that  are  mounted,  reconnaissance  is  generally  best  done 
by  sending  the  patrols  to  high  places  along  the  line  of 
march  to  overlook  the  country  and  examine  the  danger 
points.  These  patrols  report  or  signal  the  results  of 
their  observations  and,  unless  they  have  other  instruc- 
tions, join  their  units  by  the  most  practicable  routes, 
other  patrols  being  sent  out  as  the  march  proceeds  and 
as  the  nature  of  the  country  required. 

Deserters,  suspicious  characters,  and  bearers  of  flags 
of  truce,  the  latter  blindfolded,  are  taken  to  the  advance- 
guard  commander. 

Civilians  are  not  permitted  to  precede  the  advance 
guard. 

Communication  between  the  fractions  of  an  advance 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY        229 

guard  and  between  the  advance  guard  and  main  body  is 
maintained  by  wire,  messenger  service,  or  signals. 

ADVANCE    GUARD    OF   A   SMALL   COMMAND 

In  forming  the  advance  guard  of  a  command  smaller 
than  a  brigade,  the  foregoing  distribution  is  modified, 
depending  upon  the  situation.  A  company  or  troop 
usually  sends  forward  only  a  point,  a  battalion  or  squad- 
ron, an  advance  party;  but  a  battalion  or  squadron  at 
war  strength  should  put  a  company  or  troop  in  the  ad- 
vance guard  and  a  regiment  should  put  a  battalion  or 
squadron,  if  an  enemy  is  liable  to  be  met.  Whenever 
the  advance  guard  is  less  than  a  battalion,  there  is  no  re- 
serve. 

REAR   GUARDS 

The  rear  guard  is  charged  with  the  important  duty  of 
covering  the  retreat. 

When  a  commander  decides  to  retreat,  he  issues  the 
necessary  order.  During  a  retreat  the  outpost  for  the 
night  usually  forms  the  rear  guard  of  the  following  day. 

STRENGTH   AND   COMPOSITION 

The  strength  of  a  rear  guard  depends  upon  the  nature 
of  the  country  and  the  strength  and  character  of  the  pur- 
suing force.  It  can  not,  like  the  advance  guard,  count 
on  the  support  of  the  main  body. 

Machine  guns  are  especially  useful  in  the  passage  of 
defiles  and  in  covering  the  crossings  of  rivers. 


230        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Engineers  and  ambulance  companies  are  usually  as- 
signed to  rear  guards. 

The  troops  of  a  rear  guard  are  selected  from  those 
that  have  had  previous  local  successes,  or  have  suffered 
little  loss  and  are  comparatively  fresh. 

DISTRIBUTION    OF   TROOPS 

The  proximity  and  conduct  of  the  enemy  control,  to 
a  large  extent,  the  formation  of  a  rear  guard.  When 
it  is  not  necessary  to  withdraw  in  deployed  lines,  the 
greater  part  of  the  rear  guard  marches  on  the  road  in 
column  of  route,  taking  up  a  formation  resembling  that 
of  an  advanced  guard  faced  to  the  rear.  The  distribu- 
tion of  troops  is  therefore  similar  to  that  of  an  advance 
guard,  namely: 

Reserve. 
Support. 
Rear  cavalry. 

The  rear  cavalry  is  that  portion  of  the  rear-guard 
cavalry  following  the  support.  The  support,  as  in  an 
advance  guard,  is  divided  into  two  parts ;  that  part  near- 
est the  enemy  is  called  the  rear  party  and  marches  with 
a  rear  point. 

DISTANCES 

The  distance  of  the  rear  guard  from  the  main  body 
and  between  the  fractions  of  the  rear  guard  are  about 
the  same  as  in  the  case  of  an  advance  guard.  If  march- 
ing at  night,  the  rear  guard  draws  nearer  the  main  body. 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY         231 

REAR   GUARD   OF   AN   ADVANCING   FORCE 

If  there  is  a  possibility  that  the  rear  of  the  column  may 
be  attacked,  a  rear  guard  of  suitable  strength  and  com- 
position is  provided.  Its  conduct  is  practically  the  same 
as  that  of  the  rear  guard  of  a  retreating  force.  It  gen- 
erally marches  in  rear  of  the  trains,  those  organizations 
following  the  combatant  troops  without  distance. 

OUTPOSTS 

The  size  and  disposition  of  the  outpost  will  depend 
upon  many  circumstances,  such  as  the  size  of  the  whole 
command,  the  proximity  of  the  enemy  and  the  situation 
with  respect  to  him,  the  nature  of  the  terrain,  etc. 

A  suitable  strength  may  vary  from  a  very  small  frac- 
tion to  one  third  of  the  whole  force.  For  a  single  com- 
pany in  bivouac  a  few  sentinels  and  patrols  will  suffice; 
for  a  large  command  a  more  elaborate  outpost  system 
must  be  provided.  It  should  be  no  stronger  than  is 
consistent  with  reasonable  security. 

The  most  economical  protection  is  furnished  by  keep- 
ing close  contact  with  the  enemy  by  means  of  outpost 
patrols,  in  conjunction  with  resisting  detachments  on 
the  avenues  of  approach. 

The  outpost  should  be  composed  of  complete  organi- 
zations. 

The  positions  held  by  the  subdivisions  of  the  outpost 
should  generally  be  prepared  for  defense,  but  conditions 
may  render  this  unnecessary. 

Troops  on  outpost  keep  concealed  as  much  as  is  con- 


232        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

sistent  with  the  proper  performance  of  their  duties;  es- 
pecially do  they  avoid  appearing  on  the  sky  line. 

COMPOSITION 

A  mixed  outpost  is  composed  principally  of  infantry. 
The  infantry  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  local  observa- 
tion, especially  at  night  and  with  resisting  the  enemy 
long  enough  for  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 
The  cavalry  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  reconnaissance, 
and  is  very  useful  in  open  country  during  the  day. 

If  the  infantry  has  been  severely  taxed  by  marching 
or  fighting,  a  large  part  of  the  outpost  may  be  tem- 
porarily formed  of  cavalry. 

Artillery  is  useful  to  outposts  when  its  fire  can  sweep 
defiles  or  large  open  spaces  and  when  it  commands  po- 
sitions that  might  be  occupied  by  hostile  artillery.  The 
guns  are  carefully  concealed  or  protected  and  are  usually 
withdrawn  at  night. 

Machine  guns  are  useful  to  command  approaches  and 
check  sudden  advances  of  the  enemy. 

The  field  trains  of  troops  on  outpost  duty  generally 
join  their  organizations;  if  an  engagement  is  probable, 
they  may  be  held  in  rear. 

DISTRIBUTION   OF   OUTPOST   TROOPS 

The  outpost  will  generally  be  divided  into  four  parts. 
These,  in  order  from  the  main  body,  are  the  reserve,  the 
line  of  supports,  the  line  of  outguards,  and  the  advance 
cavalry. 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY 


233 


PLATE  5H0WIN6™  IDEAS  INVOLVED  IN  ~  0UTP05T 


Cavalry 


Cavalry 


.-R-^-T 


I  L.nf    t 


'of     out 


t-t-T-*-*, 


Cavalry 


\  \  i 


Picket 


/to.Z 


x   '    '  .    '    >  >     /    /  r~~^QSentry  5qua<t 

No.  I  Support    NoA^upport    \j/  ,       /^^Cassac*  Pos 


NO.  J  Support, 


'Support       5| l|  /to.-? 


\ 

\ 


/ 


A/a  £*  /?£5£rv<?! 


One.'ZSSfS!?^ 


\    i     / 
v  '  / 


Support',     f    /    ^_ 

Ai?<?  Support  I      /'\ 
-X2  /  /      *> 

7v^  •    /■    ,^^ 

>   /       \  No  1/ Support 


I 


Afc? /  Reserve 


,/ 


\ 


//"  /3  important  to 
note  that   this  diagram 
15  tor  general  ideas 
These  must  be  modified 
to  suit  every  particular 
case  J ua a ment  solves 
the   problem.  Study  and 
expenence  help  judgment 


^Distances   in  all/  cases 
great  enough  to  permit 
groups   to  prepare  for 
attacks  in  case  the 
group  in  front  is  fired 


on 


Mountains  and  broad 
body  of  water  on  this 
flank    3mall  patrols 
will    afford  proper 
security 


Thick  forests  and  impassible 
swamps  on  this  flank    Very 
small  patrols  will   afford 
proper  security 


The  distance  separating  these  parts,  and  their  dis- 
tance from  the  main  body,  will  depend  upon  the  object 
sought,  the  nature  of  the  terrain,  and  the  size  of  the  com- 
mand.    There  can  be  no  uniformity  in  the  distance  be- 

m 

tween  supports  and  reserve,  nor  between  outguards  and 
supports,  even  in  the  same  outpost.     The  avenues  of 


234         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

approach  and  the  important  features  of  the  terrain  will 
largely  control  their  exact  positions. 

The  outpost  of  a  small  force  should  ordinarily  hold  the 
enemy  beyond  effective  rifle  range  of  the  main  body 
until  the  latter  can  deploy.  For  the  same  purpose  the 
outpost  of  a  large  force  should  hold  the  enemy  beyond 
the  artillery  range. 

The  reserve  constitutes  the  main  body  of  the  outpost 
and  is  held  at  some  central  point  from  which  it  can  read- 
ily support  the  troops  in  front  or  hold  a  rallying  position 
on  which  they  may  retire.  The  reserve  may  be  omitted 
when  the  outpost  consists  of  less  than  two  compa- 
nies. 

The  reserve  may  comprise  one-fourth  to  two-thirds 
of  the  strength  of  the  outpost. 

The  supports  constitute  a  line  of  resisting  and  sup- 
porting detachments,  varying  in  size  from  a  half  com- 
pany to  a  battalion.     They  furnish  the  line  of  outguards. 

The  supports  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right 
to  left.  They  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points 
on  the  outpost  line,  usually  in  the  line  on  which  resistance 
is  to  be  made  in  case  of  attack. 

As  a  general  rule,  roads  exercise  the  greatest  influ- 
ence on  the  location  of  supports,  and  a  support  will  gen- 
erally be  placed  on  or  near  a  road.  The  section  which 
it  is  to  cover  should  be  clearly  defined  by  means  of  tangi- 
ble lines  on  the  ground  and  should  be  such  that  the  sup- 
port is  centrally  located  therein. 

The  outguards  constitute  the  line  of  small  detach- 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY         235 

ments  farthest  to  the  front  and  nearest  to  the  enemy. 
For  convenience  they  are  classified  as  pickets,  sentry 
squads,  and  cossack  posts.  They  are  numbered  con- 
secutively from  right  to  left  in  each  support. 

A  picket  is  a  group  consisting  of  two  or  more  squads, 
ordinarily  not  exceeding  half  a  company,  posted  in  the 
line  of  outguards  to  cover  a  given  sector.  It  furnishes 
patrols  and  one  or  more  sentinels,  double  sentinels, 
sentry  squads,  or  cossack  posts  for  observation. 

Pickets  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  in 
the  line  of  outguards,  such  as  road  forks.  The  strength 
of  each  depends  upon  the  number  of  small  groups  re- 
quired to  observe  properly  its  sector. 

A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  posted  in  observation  at  an 
indicated  point.  It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in  observa- 
tion, the  remaining  men  resting  near  by  and  furnishing 
the  reliefs  of  sentinels.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  required 
to  furnish  a  patrol. 

A  cossack  post  consists  of  four  men.  It  is  an  ob- 
servation group  similar  to  a  sentry  squad,  but  employs 
a  single  sentinel. 

At  night  it  will  sometimes  be  advisable  to  place  some 
of  the  outguards  or  their  sentinels  in  a  position  different 
from  that  which  they  occupy  in  the  day  time.  In  such 
case  the  ground  should  be  carefully  studied  before  dark 
and  the  change  made  at  dusk.  However,  a  change  in 
the  position  of  the  outguard  will  be  exceptional. 

Sentinels  are  generally  used  singly  in  daytime,  but  at 
night  double  sentinels  will  be  required  in  most  cases. 


236        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Sentinels  furnished  by  cossack  posts  or  sentry  squads 
are  kept  near  their  group.  Those  furnished  by  pickets 
may  be  as  far  as  100  yards  away. 

Every  sentinel  should  be  able  to  communicate  readily 
with  the  body  to  which  he  belongs. 

Sentinel  posts  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right 
to  left  in  each  outguard.  Sentry  squads  and  cossack 
posts  furnished  by  pickets  are  counted  as  sentinel  posts. 

By  day,  cavalry  reconnoiters  in  advance  of  the  line  of 
observation.  At  night,  however,  that  the  horses  may 
have  needed  rest  and  because  the  work  can  be  done  bet- 
ter by  infantry,  the  greater  part  of  the  cavalry  is  usually 
withdrawn  in  rear  of  the  supports,  generally  joining  the 
reserve,  small  detachments  being  assigned  to  the  sup- 
ports for  patrolling  at  a  distance. 

With  efficient  cavalry  in  front,  the  work  of  the  in- 
fantry on  the  line  of  observation  is  reduced  to  a  mini- 
mum. 

General  instructions  for  the  advance  cavalry  are  given 
by  the  outpost  commander,  but  details  are  left  to  the 
subordinate. 

Instead  of  using  outguards  along  the  entire  front  of 
observation,  part  of  this  front  may  be  covered  by  patrols 
only.  These  should  be  used  to  cover  such  sections  of 
the  front  as  can  be  crossed  by  the  enemy  only  with  dif- 
ficulty and  over  which  he  is  not  likely  to  attempt  a  cross- 
ing after  dark. 

In  daylight  much  of  the  local  patrolling  may  be  dis- 
pensed with  if  the  country  can  be  seen  from  the  posts  of 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY        237 

the  sentinels.  However,  patrols  should  frequently  be 
pushed  well  to  the  front  unless  the  ground  in  that  direc- 
tion is  exceptionally  open. 

Patrols  or  sentinels  must  be  the  first  troops  which  the 
enemy  meets,  and  each  body  in  rear  must  have  time  to 
prepare  for  the  blow.  These  bodies  cause  as  much  de- 
lay as  j)ossible  without  sacrificing  themselves,  and  grad- 
ually retire  to  the  line  where  the  outpost  is  to  make  its 
resistance. 

Patrols  must  be  used  to  keep  up  connection  between 
the  parts  of  the  outpost  except  when,  during  daylight, 
certain  fractions  or  groups  are  mutually  visible.  After 
dark  this  connection  must  be  maintained  throughout  the 
outpost  except  where  the  larger  subdivisions  are  pro- 
vided with  wire  communication. 

In  addition  to  ordinary  outguards,  the  outpost  com- 
mander may  detail  from  the  reserve  one  or  more  de- 
tached posts  to  cover  roads  or  areas  not  in  the  general 
line  assigned  to  the  supports. 

In  like  manner  the  commander  of  the  whole  force  may 
order  detached  posts  to  be  sent  from  the  main  body  to 
cover  important  roads  or  localities  not  included  in  the 
outpost  line. 

The  number  and  strength  of  detached  posts  are  re- 
duced to  the  absolute  needs  of  the  situation. 

ESTABLISHING  THE   OUTPOST 

The  outpost  is  posted  as  quickly  as  possible,  so  that 
the  troops  can  the  sooner  obtain  rest.     Until  the  lead- 


238         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

ing  outpost  troops  are  able  to  assume  their  duties,  tem- 
porary protection,  known  as  the  march  outpost,  is  fur- 
nished by  the  nearest  available  troops. 

The  halt  order  of  the  commander,  besides  giving  the 
necessary  information  and  assigning  camp  sites  to  the 
parts  of  the  command,  details  the  troops  to  constitute 
the  outpost,  assigns  a  commander  therefor,  designates 
the  general  line  to  be  occupied,  and,  when  practicable, 
points  out  the  position  to  be  held  in  case  of  attack. 

The  outpost  commander,  upon  receipt  of  this  order, 
should  issue  the  outpost  order  with  the  least  practicable 
delay.  In  large  commands  it  may  often  be  necessary  to 
give  the  order  from  the  map,  but  usually  the  outpost 
commander  will  have  to  make  some  preliminary  recon- 
naissance, unless  he  has  an  accurate  and  detailed  map. 

The  order  gives  such  available  information  of  the 
situation  as  is  necessary  to  the  complete  and  proper 
guidance  of  subordinates;  designates  the  troops  to  con- 
stitute the  supports ;  assigns  their  location  and  the  sector 
each  is  to  cover;  provides  for  the  necessary  detached 
posts;  indicates  any  special  reconnaissance  that  is  to  be 
made ;  orders  the  location  and  disposition  of  the  reserve ; 
disposes  of  the  train  if  same  is  ordered  to  join  the  out- 
post; and  informs  subordinates  where  information  will 
be  sent. 

After  issuing  the  initial  orders,  the  outpost  comman- 
der inspects  the  outpost,  orders  the  necessary  changes 
or  additions,  and  sends  his  superior  a  report  of  his  dis- 
positions. 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY        l>:jo 

The  reserve  is  marched  to  its  post  hy  its  commander, 
who  then  sends  out  such  detachments  as  have  been  or- 
dered and  places  the  rest  in  camp  or  bivouac,  over  which 
at  least  one  sentinel  should  be  posted.  Connection  must 
be  maintained  with  the  main  body,  the  supports,  and 
nearby  detached  posts. 

The  supports  march  to  their  posts,  using  the  neces- 
sary covering  detachments  when  in  advance  of  the  march 
outpost.  A  support  commander's  order  should  fully 
explain  the  situation  to  subordinates,  or  to  the  entire 
command,  if  it  be  small.  It  should  detail  the  troops 
for  the  different  outguards  and,  when  necessary,  define 
the  sector  each  is  to  cover.  It  should  provide  the  neces- 
sary sentinels  at  the  post  of  support,  the  patrols  to  be 
sent  therefrom,  and  should  arrange  for  the  necessary 
intrenching.  Connection  should  be  maintained  with  the 
adjoining  supports  and  with  the  outguards  furnished  by 
the  supports. 

In  posting  his  command  the  support  commander  must 
seek  to  cover  his  sector  in  such  manner  that  the  enemy 
cannot  reach,  in  dangerous  numbers  and  unobserved,  the 
position  of  the  support  or  pass  by  it  within  the  sector 
intrusted  to  the  support.  On  the  other  hand,  he  must 
economize  men  on  observation  and  patrol  duty,  for  these 
duties  are  unusually  fatiguing.  He  must  practise  the 
greatest  economy  of  men  consistent  with  the  require- 
ments of  practical  security. 

As  soon  as  the  posting  of  the  support  is  completed, 
its  commander  carefully  inspects  the  dispositions  and 


240        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

corrects  defects,  if  any,  and  reports  the  disposition  of 
his  support,  including  the  patrolling  ordered,  to  the  out- 
post commander.  This  report  is  preferably  made  by 
means  of  a  sketch. 

Each  outguard  is  marched  by  its  commander  to  its 
assigned  station,  and  especially  in  the  case  of  a  picket, 
is  covered  by  the  necessary  patrolling  to  prevent  sur- 
prise. 

Having  reached  the  position,  the  commander  explains 
the  situation  to  his  men  and  establishes  reliefs  for  each 
sentinel,  and,  if  possible,  for  each  patrol  to  be  furnished. 
Besides  these  sentinels  and  patrols,  a  picket  must  have 
a  sentinel  at  its  post. 

The  commander  then  posts  the  sentinels  and  points 
out  to  them  the  principal  features,  such  as  towns,  roads, 
and  streams  and  gives  their  names.  He  gives  the  direc- 
tion and  location  of  the  enemy,  if  known,  and  of  adjoin- 
ing parts  of  the  outpost. 

He  gives  to  patrols  the  same  information  and  the  nec- 
essary orders  as  to  their  routes  and  the  frequency  with 
which  the  same  shall  be  covered.  Each  patrol  should 
go  over  its  route  once  before  dark. 

Every  picket  should  maintain  connection  by  patrols 
with  outguard  on  its  right  and  left.  Each  commander 
will  take  precaution  to  conceal  his  outguard  and  will 
generally  strengthen  his  position  by  intrenching. 


THE  THEORY  OF  SECURITY        241 

RELIEVING   THE   OUTMOST 

Evening  and  shortly  before  dawn  are  hours  of  special 
danger.  The  enemy  may  attack  late  in  the  day  in  or- 
der to  establish  himself  on  captured  ground  by  intrench- 
ing during  the  night;  or  he  may  send  forward  troops 
under  cover  of  darkness  in  order  to  make  a  strong  attack 
at  early  dawn.  Special  precaution  is  therefore  taken 
at  those  hours  by  holding  the  outpost  in  readiness,  and 
by  sending  patrols  in  advance  of  the  line  of  observation. 
If  a  new  outpost  is  to  be  established  in  the  morning,  it 
should  arrive  at  the  outpost  position  at  daybreak,  thus 
doubling  the  outpost  strength  at  that  hour. 


CHAPTER  II 

ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE 

Combat  is  divided  into  two  general  classes,  the  of- 
fensive (attack)  and  the  defensive. 

THE   THEORY   OF   ATTACK 

Decisive  results  are  obtained  only  by  the  offensive. 
Aggressiveness  wins  battles.  If  you  want  to  thrash  a 
man  go  after  him;  don't  wait  for  him  to  come  to  you. 
When  attacking  use  every  available  man.  Have  every 
man  in  the  proper  place  at  the  proper  time  and  in  a 
physical  and  moral  condition  to  do  his  utmost. 

ADVANTAGES   OF   THE   ATTACK 

(1)  You  can  elect  the  point  of  attack  while  the  de- 
fender must  be  prepared  to  resist  at  all  points. 

(2)  The  fact  that  you  are  advancing  in  spite  of  the 
defender's  fire  stimulates  you  and  depresses  the  enemy. 

(3)  You  leave  your  dead  behind  while  the  defender 
must  fight  among  his  fallen  comrades,  which  is  demor- 
alizing. 

(4)  You  usually  are  conscious  of  the  fact  that  you 
have  more  men  on  your  side  than  the  defender.  You 
have  more  rifles  on  the  line  than  the  enemy. 

242 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  243 

(5)  Your  fire  is  usually  more  efficacious  than  that  of 
your  opponent  because  it  is  usually  converging  while 
Ins  is  diverging. 

These  advantages  alone  will  not  necessarily  insure 
success,  but  fire  superiority,  if  gained  and  maintained, 
does  insure  success.  By  gaining  and  maintaining  fire 
superiority  you  remove  all  doubt  as  to  the  final  outcome 
of  the  attack. 

DIFFERENT   KINDS   OF   ATTACK 

The  most  usual  kinds  of  attack  are : 

Frontal  Attach.  This  attack  is  delivered  directly 
against  the  front  of  the  enemy.  It  offers  little  oppor- 
tunity to  bring  more  rifles  against  the  enemy  than  he 
can  bring  against  you.  Decisive  results  can  only  be 
expected  when  your  force  is  larger  than  your  opponent's 
or  when  his  is  unduly  extended.  It  is  a  dangerous  and 
costly  method  of  attacking. 

Enveloping  Attach.  Cover  the  front  of  the  enemy 
with  sufficient  force  to  hold  his  attention  and,  with  the 
rest  of  your  command,  strike  a  flank  more  or  less 
obliquely.  Since  your  line  is  now  longer  than  his,  and 
you  have  more  rifles  in  action  your  fire  is  converging 
while  that  of  your  enemy  is  diverging.  Never  attempt 
the  envelopment  of  both  flanks  unless  you  greatly  out- 
number your  enemy.  Cooperation  between  the  frontal 
and  enveloping  attack  is  essential  to  success.  The  frac- 
tion of  the  command  that  envelops  the  enemy  is  gener- 
ally larger  than  that  part  in  his  front.     A  wide  turning 


244        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

movement  is  not  an  enveloping  movement.  It  is  dan- 
gerous because  your  troops  are  separated  and  can  be  de- 
feated in  detail.  In  an  enveloping  movement  your  line 
will  usually  be  continuous;  it  simply  overlaps  and  en- 
velops the  enemy.  An  enveloping  attack  will  nearly 
always  result  locally  in  a  frontal  attack,  for  it  will  meet 
the  enemy's  reserve.  Let  us  repeat:  do  not  attempt  a 
wide  turning  movement.  Your  forces  will  be  separated, 
they  may  not  be  able  to  assist  each  other,  and  can  be  de- 
feated in  detail.  The  tendency  of  a  beginner  is  to  at- 
tempt a  wide  turning  movement.  The  error  of  dispersion 
is  then  committed. 

THE   ACTUAL,  ATTACK 

Deployment.  To  deploy  means  to  extend  the  front. 
When  does  a  column  extend  its  front  or  prepare  to 
fight?  When  open  terrain,  which  will  probably  expose 
the  troops  to  hostile  artillery  fire,  is  reached.  This  place 
may  be  two  or  more  miles  from  the  enemy.  What  is 
done?  Strong  patrols  are  sent  out  to  clear  the  fore- 
ground of  the  enemy's  patrol.  The  plan  of  the  attack 
is  inaugurated.  Extra  ammunition  is  issued.  Each  or- 
ganization is  assigned  its  task.  The  organizations  in 
the  firing  lines  are  assigned  objectives  and  move  out, 
followed  by  local  supports  and  reserves.  Don't  under- 
stand that  they  go  "as  skirmishers."  They  usually 
march  in  column  of  squads.  Strong  combat  patrols  are 
sent  out  to  protect  each  flank.  This  is  very  important 
even  with  small  commands. 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  245 

ADVANCING   THE  ATTACK 

It  is  now  necessary  to  advance  the  attack  to  a  point 
where  the  rifle  is  effective,  so  the  attacking  line  can  gain 
fire  superiority.  The  attack  which  halts  to  open  fire 
at  extreme  range  (over  1200  yards)  is  not  likely  to  ever 
reach  its  destination  (the  enemy).  Effort  should  be 
made  to  arrive  within  800  yards  of  the  enemy  before 
opening  fire.  How  can  this  be  done?  How  can  we 
pass  over  a  mile  or  more  of  ground,  swept  or  likely  to 
be  swept,  first  by  the  enemy's  artillery  fire  and  finally 
by  rifle  fire?  Answer. — By  using  all  the  cover  the  ter- 
rain offers  (escape  the  enemy's  view),  by  using  incon- 
spicuous formations,  by  using  such  formations  as  to  min- 
imize the  effect  of  the  enemy's  fire.  Discipline  at  this 
stage  of  the  attack  is  essential.  Each  company  in  the 
firing  line  will  probably  start  its  advance  upon  its  ob- 
jective in  column  of  squads,  but  taking  advantage  of  all 
cover.  If  thick  underbrush  is  found,  squad  columns 
would  probably  be  used.  If  the  enemy's  artillery  fire 
becomes  too  effective  platoon  columns  or  thin  lines 
are  used,  dependent  upon  terrain,  cover  and  the  time 
element.  Every  opportunity  is  taken  to  assemble  the 
companies  and  continue  the  advance  in  column  of  squads 
when  cover  is  available.  The  supports,  following  the 
firing  line,  adopt  the  same  methods  to  advance  as  the 
firing  line.  In  this  stage  of  the  attack  your  own  ar- 
tillery will  be  assisting  you  by  replying  to  the  enemy's 
artillery  and  infantry  fire  that  is  directed  at  you. 


246         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

THE  FIRE  ATTACK 

The  fire  attack  commences  when  the  infantry  in  thf 
firing  line  first  opens  fire  and  it  usually  ends  with  the 
charge.  A  charge  is  sometimes  not  necessary  because 
the  enemy  withdraws  from  his  position.  The  fire  at- 
tack does  not  start  until  the  firing  line  cannot  advance 
without  ruinous  and  demoralizing  losses.  It  should  not 
be  over  1200  yards  from  the  enemy.  At  this  time  fire 
superiority  must  be  gained.  This  may  necessitate  a 
steady,  accurate  fire  for  many  hours.  For  this  purpose 
the  commander  puts  more  men  on  the  firing  line  than 
the  enemy  and  then  some  more  if  necessary.  Local  sup- 
ports are  used  if  required.  Having  gained  fire  superi- 
ority, the  advance  by  rushes  commences,  but  each  rush 
must  leave  behind  or  have  in  front  of  it  enough  rifles  to 
maintain  fire  superiority.  This  determines  the  size  of 
the  rush.  You  cannot  lose  this  fire  superiority  and  ad- 
vance; and  once  it  is  lost,  hours  may  be  required  to  re- 
gain it.  The  number  of  men  in  each  rush  will  usually 
decrease  as  the  enemy's  position  Is  approached.  If  the 
firing  line  is  stopped,  if  fire  superiority  is  lost  and  can- 
not be  regained,  the  firing  line  intrenches  and  holds  on 
until  darkness  or  until  a  favorable  turn  in  the  situation 
develops.  It  is  suicidal  to  turn  back.  During  the  ad- 
vance, supports  move  up  as  close  to  the  firing  line  as 
cover  will  permit,  adopting  those  formations  best  suited 
to  keep  down  losses.  They  may  be  as  close  as  fifty 
yards  to  the  firing  line.  They  should  not  be  as  far  as 
500  yards  in  rear  of  it. 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  247 

THE   CHAKGE 

There  can  be  no  rule  to  tell  you  when  to  charge.  It 
may  be  from  25  to  400  yards.  The  common  sense  (tac- 
tical instinct)  of  the  senior  ranking  officer  on  the  firing 
line  must  tell  him  the  psychological  moment  to  order  the 
charge.  That  moment  will  be  when  your  fire  has  broken 
down  the  enemy's  fire,  broken  his  resistance,  and  de- 
stroyed his  morale.  The  artillery  increases  its  range. 
The  firing  line  and  remaining  supports  fix  bayonets. 
The  former  increases  the  rate  of  fire,  the  latter  rush  for- 
ward under  the  protection  of  this  fire,  join  the  firing 
line  and  give  it  the  necessary  impetus.  Together  they 
rush  at  the  enemy's  position.  No  restraint  is  placed 
upon  their  ardor.  Confidence  in  their  ability  to  use  the 
bayonet  gives  the  charging  troops  the  promise  of  suc- 
cess. If  the  charge  is  successful,  the  nearest  formed 
bodies  are  sent  instantly  in  pursuit  and  under  cover  of 
them  the  commands  are  reorganized,  order  restored,  and 
arrangements  made  to  resist  a  counter  attack.  If  the 
charge  is  unsuccessful  the  artillery  or  any  formed  troops 
in  rear  cover  the  withdrawal. 

THE   THEORY   OF   THE   DEFENSIVE 

The  defensive  is  divided  into  the  purely  passive  de- 
fense and  the  active  defense. 

The  passive  defense  seeks  merely  to  delay  the  enemy. 
The  results  can  never  be  other  than  negative.  It  is 
usually  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  time  and  most  fre- 


248         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

quently  used  by  a  rear  guard.  Since  the  idea  of  taking 
up  the  offensive  is  absent,  no  strong  reserves  are  held  out 
for  a  counter  attack;  the  firing  line  is  as  strong  as  pos- 
sible from  the  first;  every  advantage  is  taken  of  ob- 
stacles, natural  or  artificial.  The  flanks  must  be  made 
secure. 

The  active  defense  seeks  to  attack  the  other  side  at 
some  stage  of  the  engagement.  It  seeks  to  win  and 
only  the  offensive  wins.  It  is  often  necessary  for  a  com- 
mander to  assume  the  defensive  (active)  either  volun- 
tarily, in  order  to  gain  time,  or  to  secure  some  advan- 
tage over  the  enemy;  or  involuntarily,  as  in  a  meeting 
engagement  where  the  enemy  gets  a  start  in  deployment 
for  action  or  where  the  enemy's  attack  is  impetuous  and 
without  sufficient  preparation.  In  either  case  the  de- 
fensive force  contents  itself  with  parrying  the  blows  of 
the  enemy,  while  gathering  and  arranging  its  strength, 
looking  and  waiting  for  the  right  place  and  time  to  de- 
liver a  decisive  blow  which  is  called  the  counter  attack. 
Hence,  a  counter  attack  is  the  offensive  movement  of  an 
active  defense.  Its  success  greatly  depends  on  being 
delivered  with  vigor  and  at  the  proper  time.  It  may  be 
delivered  in  two  ways:  1st — straight  to  the  front 
against  a  weak  point  in  the  attacking  line,  or  2nd — by 
launching  the  reserves  against  the  enemy's  flank  after 
he  is  fully  committed  to  the  attack.  The  latter  method 
offers  the  greatest  chances  for  success  and  the  most  ef- 
fective results. 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  249 

ADVANTAGES   AND   DISADVANTAGES   OF   THE   DEFENSIVE 

The  defense  has  the  following  advantages  over  the 
attack: 

(1)  Troops  attacking  afford  a  better  target  than  the 
troops  on  the  defensive. 

(2)  A  larger  amount  of  ammunition  is  usually 
available. 

(3)  The  men  can  shoot  better  because  they  are  not 
fatigued  by  advancing. 

(4)  Losses  will  be  less  if  good  cover  is  secured. 

DISADVANTAGES   OF   THE   DEFENSE 

(1)  The  defender  surrenders  the  advantage  of  the 
initiative  as  the  attacker  can  elect  the  point  of  attack 
and  the  defender  must  be  prepared  at  all  points. 

(2)  The  defender  must  fight  amidst  his  dead  and 
wounded  which  is  depressing. 

(3)  The  defender,  seeing  the  enemy  continually  ad- 
vancing, becomes  conscious  of  his  inability  to  stop  him. 
This  is  depressing  to  the  defender  and  is  injurious  to  his 
morale. 

REQUISITES   OF   A   GOOD   DEFENSIVE   POSITION 

If  you  were  looking  for  a  good  defensive  position, 
what  points  would  you  have  in  mind  and  of  these  points, 
which  would  be  the  most  important?  The  requisites  to 
be  sought  in  a  good  defensive  position  are : 

"(1)  A  clear  field  of  fire  up  to  the  effective  range 
of  the  artillery. 


250         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

"(2)  Flanks  that  are  naturally  secure  or  that  can  be 
made  so  by  the  use  of  the  reserves. 

"(3)  Extent  of  ground  suitable  to  the  strength  of 
the  force  to  occupy  it. 

"  (4)  Effective  cover  and  concealment  for  the  troops, 
especially  reserves. 

"(5)   Good  communications  throughout  the  position. 

"(6)    Good  lines  of  retreat." 

— Field  Service  Regulations. 

All  of  these  advantages  will  seldom  if  ever  be  found 
in  the  position  selected.  The  one  should  be  taken 
which  conforms  closest  to  the  description,  but  you 
should  bear  in  mind  that  a  good  field  of  fire  and  effective 
cover,  in  the  order  named,  are  the  most  important 
requisites.  In  tracing  the  lines  for  the  trenches,  avoid 
salients  (a  hill,  spur,  woods,  etc.,  that  juts  out  from  the 
general  line  in  the  direction  of  the  enemy).  Avoid 
placing  the  fire  trench  on  the  skyline.  Locate  it  on  or 
below  the  military  crest.  [The  crest  from  which  you 
can  see  all  the  ground  to  the  front.] 

PREPARING   A   DEFENSIVE   POSITION 

Now  let  us  suppose  ourselves  as  part  of  a  battalion 
that  is  to  occupy  a  defensive  position.  What  would 
probably  be  done?  How  and  in  what  order  would  it 
be  done?  What  would  the  major  do?  He  would  de- 
cide upon  the  kind  of  defense  (active  or  passive)  to 
offer,  and  then  find  a  suitable  defensive  position  in  har- 
mony with  his  plans.     He  would  determine  exactly 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  251 

where  the  firing  and  other  trenches  are  to  be  dug.  He 
would  then  call  up  the  company  commanders  and  issue 
his  defense  order  in  which  the  task  of  each  company 
would  be  made  clear.  Those  to  occupy  the  firing  line 
would  each  be  assigned  a  sector  of  ground  to  the  front 
to  defend  and  a  corresponding  section  of  the  fire  trench 
to  construct.  The  supports  would  construct  their 
trenches  and  the  communicating  trenches.  He  would, 
if  necessary,  issue  the  necessary  orders  to  protect  the 
front  and  flanks  by  sending  out  patrols.  He  would  in- 
dicate how  the  position  is  to  be  strengthened  and  make 
arrangements  for  distributing  the  extra  ammunition. 
If  time  is  a  serious  consideration,  the  major  would  direct 
the  work  to  be  done  in  the  order  of  its  importance,  which 
is  ordinarily  as  follows: 

(1)  Clearing  of  foreground  to  improve  the  field  of 
fire  and  construction  of  fire  trench. 

(2)  Head  or  overhead  cover  concealment. 

(3)  Placing  obstacles  and  recording  ranges. 

(4)  Cover  trenches  for  supports  and  local  reserves. 

(5)  Communicating  trenches. 

(6)  Widening  and  deepening  of  trench;  interior  con- 
veniences. 

Now  having  cleared  the  foreground,  dug  the  trenches, 
recorded  ranges  to  the  important  objects  in  each  sector, 
etc.,  the  position  can  be  occupied.  The  citizen  ordina- 
rily pictures  the  firing  trench  full  of  soldiers  when  he  is 
told  the  trenches  are  occupied.  Not  so.  Patrols  would 
be  operating  well  to  the  front  to  give  timely  warning  to 


252         THE  PLATTSBUKG  MANUAL 

one  or  two  sentinels  in  each  company  fire  trench  of  the 
approach  of  the  enemy.  These  sentinels  would  in  turn 
inform  the  company  which  would  probably  be  resting  in 
the  trenches  in  the  rear. 

THE  ACTUAL  DEFENSE 

Let  us  suppose  now  that  our  battalion,  occupying  this 
defensive  position,  is  a  part  of  a  larger  force  which  is 
supported  by  artillery.  You  see  small  objects  one  and 
a  half  to  two  miles  to  your  front.  You  know  they  are 
the  enemy's  troops  because  your  artillery  is  firing  at 
them  and  your  combat  patrols  are  being  driven  in. 
Your  entire  company  has  moved  to  its  fire  trench.  You 
have  plenty  of  ammunition,  you  know  exactly  the  range. 
What  happens?  You  open  fire  on  the  enemy  at  prob- 
ably the  extreme  range  of  2000  yards.  Only  the  hostile 
artillery  can  return  this  fire  until  the  enemy's  firing 
line  closes  to  within  1200  yards  of  your  position. 
While  an  attacking  force  is  thus  approaching  you 
may  inflict  very  serious  losses  upon  it.  But  it  can- 
not stop,  however  serious  its  losses,  beyond  1200  yards; 
for  we  have  seen  that,  if  it  stops  advancing  in  order 
to  fire,  it  will  probably  never  arrive  at  your  posi- 
tion. When  within  1200  yards  the  enemy  will  build 
up  a  strong  rifle  fire  against  you  and  not  attempt  to  ad- 
vance until  he  has  gained  fire  superiority.  It  is  your 
business  not  to  let  him  get  fire  superiority,  and  if  he 
does  do  so  to  take  it  away  from  him  when  he  withdraws 
parts  of  his  rifles  to  advance  by  rushing.     Fight  each 


ATTACK  AND  DEFENSE  253 

rush.  If  your  defense  is  active  and  you  permanently 
stop  the  enemy's  advance  by  gaining  fire  superiority, 
and  he  cannot  regain  it,  even  though  he  uses  up  his  sup- 
ports, his  firing  line  will  become  confused  and  demora- 
lized and  it  will  be  the  psychological  time  for  the  proper 
commander  to  launch  his  counter  attack.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  you  cannot  stop  his  advance,  fix  bayonets  (fir- 
ing line  and  remaining  supports)  when  he  fixes  bayonets 
and  meet  his  charge  in  front  of  your  trench.  All  your 
supports  will  be  moved  up  to  assist  you  in  opposing  the 
charge.  If  you  are  unsuccessful  in  the  bayonet  fight 
or  forced  to  retire  from  your  trenches  during  the  fire 
fight  your  artillery,  cavalry  and  any  formed  reserves  in 
the  rear  will  cover  your  withdrawal,  which,  if  possible, 
should  be  made  straight  to  the  rear,  one  part  covering 
the  withdrawal  of  the  other  part,  and  so  on.  Reorganize 
at  the  first  opportunity. 


CHAPTER  III 

PATROLLING 

Everything  else  being  equal  the  army  that  possesses 
the  most  accurate  information  about  the  enemy  will  win. 
Military  history  recites  the  fact  that  almost  every  im- 
portant battle  has  been  either  lost  or  won  because  of 
information  or  lack  of  information  that  one  side  had 
or  did  not  have  of  the  other  side.  It  is  by  the  use 
of  patrols  that  the  most  valuable  information  of  the 
enemy  is  usually  obtained. 

There  are  many  kinds  of  patrols,  but  it  is  with  recon- 
noitering  or  information  seeking  patrols  that  this  chap- 
ter deals. 

DUTIES   OF   A   PATROL 

Each  reconnoitering  patrol  is  given  a  certain  mission 
(duty)  to  perform.  The  name,  "reconnoitering,"  mean- 
ing to  survey,  to  view,  indicates  that  its  first  duty  is  to 
get  information,  and  information  is  always  greatly  in- 
creased in  value  if  the  enemy  does  not  know  it  has  been 
obtained.  Having  obtained  valuable  information,  its 
next  duty  is  to  send  this  information  to  the  officer  send- 
ing out  the  patrol. 

254 


PATROLLING  255 

STRENGTH 

The  strength  of  the  patrol  will  generally  depend  on  its 
mission  and  on  the  number  of  messages  that  it  will  prob- 
ably send  back.  The  larger  the  patrol  the  greater  the 
probability  of  the  enemy  seeing  it.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  it  is  too  small,  it  will  not  have  sufficient  members  to 
send  in  important  information  and  continue  operations. 
Captain  Waldron  in  his  book,  "Scouting  and  Patrol- 
ling," recommends  a  patrol  of  a  leader  and  six  selected 
men  for  ordinary  reconnaissance.  This  number  makes 
it  possible  for  the  patrol  leader  to  place  a  man  out  on 
each  flank,  a  man  in  advance,  two  to  remain  with  him 
and  one  to  remain  in  the  rear  as  the  get-away  man.  The 
officer  who  sends  out  the  patrol  determines  its  strength. 

COMMANDER 

The  leader  should  be  an  officer  or  a  noncommissioned 
officer.  He  must  have  good  judgment,  be  cool,  be 
quick  in  making  a  decision,  be  strong  in  physique,  have 
initiative,  and  be  brave,  but  not  to  the  extent  of  rash- 
ness. Besides  his  regular  equipment  he  should  have 
a  good  pair  of  field  glasses,  a  compass,  a  watch,  wire 
cutters,  pencils,  a  message  book,  and  a  map  of  the 
country. 

INSTRUCTIONS 

The  officer  sending  out  a  patrol  should  give  it  instruc- 
tions on  the  following  points : 


256        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

1.  Information:  of  the  enemy  and  of  friendly  support- 
ing troops. 

2.  The  mission  of  the  patrol.  This  will  include  the 
general  direction  in  which  it  is  to  go. 

3.  How  long  the  patrol  is  to  remain  out. 

4.  Where  messages  are  to  be  sent. 

PREPARATION 

Before  going  out  the  patrol  commander  will  make  a 
careful  inspection  of  the  members  of  his  patrol  in  order 
to  see: 

1.  That  the  members  are  in  a  suitable  condition  for 
the  duty  to  be  performed.  (Not  drunk,  sick,  lame,  hav- 
ing a  bad  cough,  etc. ) 

2.  That  each  man  is  properly  armed  and  has  the 
requisite  amount  of  ammunition. 

3.  That  the  accoutrement  is  so  arranged  that  it  will 
not  rattle  or  glisten  in  the  sunlight. 

4.  That  no  man  has  anything  about  him  that  will  af- 
ford the  enemy  valuable  information  in  the  event  of  cap- 
ture. 

At  the  conclusion  of  this  inspection  he  will,  in  the 
presence  of  the  officer  sending  out  the  patrol,  go  over 
his  orders,  giving  his  men  all  the  information  that  he 
has  of  the  enemy  and  his  own  troops;  state  the  duty 
(mission)  of  the  patrol  so  that  all  may  know  what  they 
are  going  to  accomplish,  and  he  will  follow  this  with  a 
statement  of  his  general  plan  for  carrying  it  out.  He 
will  designate  an  assembly  point  should  the  patrol  be 


PATROLLING 


257 


dispersed.     He  will  designate  a  second  in  command 
should  he  be  disabled. 

FORMATION 

It  is  impossible  to  lay  down  any  hard-and-fast  rule 
governing  the  formation  and  conduct  of  the  operations 
of  a  patrol.  Each  situation  will  have  to  be  worked  out 
by  itself.  The  patrol  should  assume  the  general  forma- 
tion of  a  column  of  troops  on  the  march ;  that  is,  it  will 


$       Vo^N 
Men 


o  0  o 


t 


5  Men  Going 
Across  Country 


O 


f 


6  Men  Goinrf 
Across  Country 


#  Patrol   Leader 
O  Leading  Mar\ 
Q  Get-away  Man 
O  Spare  Man 


SUGGESTED   FORMATIONS   FOR   PATROLS 


258        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

have  an  advance  guard,  a  main  body,  flankers  and  a  rear 
guard.  These  several  elements  may  each  be  repre- 
sented by  only  one  man. 

CONDUCT   OF  THE   PATROL 

In  communicating  with  each  other  for  ordinary  pur- 
poses the  members  of  the  patrol  use  signals  agreed  upon 
before  the  start.  For  this  purpose  each  man  must  con- 
stantly keep  within  sight  and  hearing  distance  of  the 
leader.  A  patrol  moves  cautiously,  taking  advantage 
of  all  available  cover,  seeking  in  every  way  to  see  with- 
out being  seen.  It  halts  frequently  to  listen  and  make 
careful  observations  of  its  surroundings.  Except  at 
night  a  patrol  should  not  move  on  roads.  Villages  and 
inhabited  places  should  not  as  a  rule  be  entered.  Dur- 
ing the  daytime  it  seeks  high  ground  from  which  it  can 
scan  the  country  and  at  night  it  seeks  a  position  from 
which  the  sky  line  can  be  observed. 

ENCOUNTERING  THE  ENEMY 

If  a  small  hostile  patrol  is  encountered  it  is  generally 
better  to  remain  in  concealment  and  let  it  pass  than  to 
attack.  The  noise  of  a  fight  may  be  heard  by  the  en- 
emy, the  presence  of  the  patrol  therefore  indicated,  and 
the  enemy  will  take  further  precautions  to  oppose  its 
operations.  If  the  patrol  is  suddenly  attacked  or  sur- 
prised by  a  superior  force,  the  patrol  should  at  once 
scatter  in  all  directions  and  the  members  make  their 
way  back  to  the  last  place  designated  as  a  meeting  place 


PATROLLING  259 

and  then  after  reuniting  continue  the  reconnaissance. 
When  a  patrol  fights  it  does  so  resolutely.  Courage 
and  coolness  may  bring  about  success  when  adverse  con- 
ditions are  encountered. 

RETURNING 

A  patrol  can  never  be  certain  that  the  enemy's  patrols 
are  not  operating  in  its  rear.  Hence  in  returning,  it  is 
necessary  to  observe  the  usual  precautions.  If  the  pa- 
trol has  eluded  the  enemy,  it  is  best  to  return  over  a 
route  other  than  that  over  which  the  start  was  made. 
If  a  patrol,  after  having  accomplished  its  mission,  is 
being  pursued,  it  is  well,  especially  when  near  its  own 
lines,  to  engage  the  pursuing  troops  so  as  to  give  warn- 
ing of  its  approach  to  the  outpost  line.  Under  the 
conditions  just  mentioned,  except  the  patrol  is  a  great 
distance  from  its  outpost  line,  it  may  be  necessary  as 
a  last  resort  to  have  the  patrol  scatter  and  each  man 
return  individually. 


CHAPTER  IV 

TARGET  PRACTICE 

Military  shooting  or  target  practice  is  very  different 
from  shotgun  shooting,  or  even  the  kind  of  shooting  re- 
quired of  a  large-game  hunter;  therefore  we  should 
begin  with  the  most  elementary  instruction  and  drills, 
if  proficiency  is  to  be  obtained.  Our  "Small  Arms 
Firing  Regulations"  says,  "The  sole  purpose  of  rifle 
training  for  the  soldier  is  to  make  of  him  a  good  shot 
under  war  conditions." 

Proficient  shots  are  made  off  the  range  and  not  on  it. 
By  this  we  mean  that  the  preliminary  instruction  you 
will  receive  before  you  go  on  the  range  will  be  of  more 
benefit  to  you  than  the  actual  firing  for  record.  Indeed, 
firing  on  the  range  will  only  test  your  ability  to  put  into 
use  the  many  points  covered  by  your  preliminary  in- 
struction. Therefore,  if  you  are  to  become  a  proficient 
shot,  maintain  your  interest  and  enthusiasm  at  its  highest 
pitch  during  the  preliminary  instruction. 

Your  preliminary  instructions  will  probably  become 
so  tedious  and  tiresome  that  you  will  lose  sight  of  their 
objects.  Each  preliminary  instruction  has  its  own  and 
different  purpose,  and  you  will  not  receive  the  maximum 
benefit  from  them  unless  you  realize  this. 

This  chapter  will  first  explain  briefly  the  purpose  of 

260 


TARGET  PRACTICE  261 

each  preliminary  drill,  and  then  give  the  essential  things 
to  be  remembered  when  actually  firing  on  the  range. 

PRELIMINARY    INSTRUCTION 

Your  preliminary  instructions  and  their  purposes  are 

as  follows: 

1.  Nomenclature  of  the  Rifle.     The  word  nomencla- 

t 

ture  means  the  vocabulary  of  names  or  technical  terms 
which  are  appropriate  to  any  particular  topic.  In  this 
case  the  topic  is  the  rifle.  This  instruction  will  be  a  few 
lectures  or  talks  by  your  company  officers  on  the  rifle. 
You  should  become  familiar  with  the  parts  of  the  rifle 
indicated  in  the  following  illustration: 

Safety  Lock. 
SmaH^T Stock  ,C\it  Off      *  v 


Rear  Sight  Leaf 
Codung  Piece  ^V^-^Stock FrontSight 

eel  ^^lk r  *'  "    '   "^Hl""  '  \f%  

-  i      _  _    "• — *__    -,|  ^  I  s<\  jj    Miayonet  Stud 

~~j0^^~       j  Dolt  Handle  Lower  Band         Stackiixg  Swivel 

1     |§^^^n8oer  / 
Jy^^  Trigger  Guard 

Toe 

2.  Sighting  Drills. 
Purpose. 

(a)  To  explain  the  different  kinds  of  sight. 

(b)  To  show  how  to  align  the  sights  properly  on 

the  bull's-eye. 

(c)  To  discover  and  demonstrate  errors  in  sighting. 

(d)  To  teach  uniformity  in  sighting. 


262 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


There  are  two  kinds  of  sights  on  the  rear  sight  leaf, 
the  open  and  peep  sight.  The  open  sight  is  the  semi- 
circular notch  a-b-c  shown  in  the  diagram  below;  the 
peep  sight  is  the  small  hole  "d"  just  below  the  open 
sight. 


a,  b,  c — open  sight 
d — peep  sight 


The  sighting  drills  will  visually  illustrate  the  follow- 
ing kind  of  sights. 

a — Normal  Sight.  This  is  the  sight  most  frequently 
used.  The  following  illustration  is  the  normal  sight 
when  the  open  sight  notch  is  used. 


The  figure 

i-k-l-m  is  the 

front  sight 

B-L-M-C  the  rear 

sight  notch. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


26b 


When  the  open  sight  is  used  the  above  diagram  shows 
the  correct  alignments  of  the  rear  sight  notch,  front 
sight  and  the  bull's-eye.  The  following  features 
should  be  noticed: 

1st.  The  front  sight  (i-k-l-m)  is  exactly  in  the 
center  of  the  rear  sight  notch  (B-L-M-C),  if  it  is  in 
the  right  or  left  part  of  this  notch  the  rifle  will  shoot  to 
the  right  or  left  of  the  point  aimed  at. 

2d.  There  is  a  thin  strip  of  white  seen  between  the 
top  of  the  front  sight  and  the  bull's-eye.  (The  Marine 
Corps  and  many  army  officers  do  not  see  this  strip  of 
white.  The  method  of  aiming  given  and  illustrated  in 
this  book  is  the  same  as  found  in  the  Firing  Regulations 
for  the  Army.) 

3d.  The  top  of  the  front  sight  should  just  touch  an 
imaginary  line  connecting  the  shoulder  at  C  with  that 
at  B.     (This  is  most  important.) 

4th.  The  aim  is  taken  at  the  bottom  of  the  bull's-eye 
and  not  at  the  top  or  center. 

b — Fine  Sight.  The  following  illustration  shows  a 
fine  sight  which  should  never  be  used: 


264 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


This  sight  causes  the  rifle  to  shoot  too  low  because 
not  enough  front  sight  is  seen.  Correspondingly,  if 
more  front  sight  is  seen  than  illustrated  in  the  normal 
sights,  the  rifle  shoots  high. 

c — Normal  Sight.  The  following  illustration  shows 
the  normal  sight  when  the  peep  sight  is  used. 


The  above  illustration  shows  the  correct  alignment  of 
the  peep  sight,  front  sight,  and  the  bull's-eye.  The  fol- 
lowing features  should  be  noticed: 

1st.  The  top  of  the  front  sight  and  not  the  bull's-eye 
is  focused  in  the  center  of  the  peep  sight. 

2d.  There  is  a  thin  strip  of  white  between  the  top 
of  the  front  sight  and  the  bottom  of  the  bull's-eye. 

3.  Position  and  Aiming  Drills. 

Purpose:  To  so  educate  the  muscles  of  the  arms 
and  body  that  the  gun,  during  the  act  of  aiming,  shall 
be  held  without  restraint  and  during  the  operation  of 


TARGET  PRACTICE  265 

firing  shall  not  be  deflected  from  the  target  by  any  con- 
vulsion or  improper  movement  of  the  trigger  ringer  or 
of  the  body,  arms  or  hands.  These  drills  must  be  taken 
daily,  if  they  are  to  be  of  the  maximum  benefit.  If  you 
are  enthusiastic  about  rifle  shooting,  and  these  drills 
are  not  give  to  you,  ask  your  company  commander  to 
show  them  to  you,  as  they  can  be  executed  to  advantage 
at  odd  times. 

4.  Deflection  and  Elevation  Correction  Drills. 

Purpose.  To  show  you  how  to  raise  or  lower  your 
rear  sight,  change  your  windage  to  the  right  or  left, 
and  note  the  effect  on  the  striking  point  of  the  bullet  in 
each  case.     In  general  terms  these  drills  teach  you: 

( 1 )  What  to  do  when  you  are  firing  too  high  or  low. 
(Elevation  Drill.) 

(2)  What  to  do  when  you  are  firing  to  the  right  or 
left  of  the  target.      (Deflection  Drill.) 

The  assumption  is  in  each  case  that  the  gun  is 
properly  aimed  the  instant  it  is  fired. 

Thoroughly  to  grasp  every  phase  of  the  Elevation  and 
Deflection  Drills,  it  is  best  that  you  become  familiarized 
with  the  dimensions  of  the  following  targets  and  the 
ranges  at  which  each  is  used.  It  is  not  intended  that 
you  shall  retain  all  these  figures  in  your  mind. 


266         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


SLOW  FIRE  TARGETS 


TARGET  A 


This  target  is  used  during  slow  fire  at  200  and  300 
yards. 


TARGET  B 


This  target  is  used  during  slow  fire  at  500  and  600 
yards. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


2G7 


RAPID  FIRE  TARGET 


This  target  is  always  used  with  the  battle  sight  at 
200,  300,  and  500  yards  rapid  fire.  Battle  sight  is  the 
position  of  the  rear  sight  when  the  leaf  is  laid  down, 
which  is  the  habitual  position  of  the  rear  sight  leaf  at 
drill.  It  is  an  open  sight,  and  corresponds  to  an  eleva- 
tion of  547  yards. 

WINDAGE 

The  rear  sight  is  set  on  a  movable  base  so  that  it  can 
be  moved  to  the  right  or  left  and  the  aiming  point 
shifted  accordingly  in  order  to  counteract  the  effect  of 
the  wind  on  the  bullet. 

General  Rule.  To  shift  the  striking  point  of  the 
bullet  to  the  left  move  the  rear  sight  to  the  left.  And, 
of  course,  the  reverse  holds  true  when  it  is  moved  to  the 
right. 

A  Specific  Rule.     One  point  of  windage  moves  the 


268        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

striking  point  of  the  bullet  4  inches  for  every  100  yards 
you  are  distant  from  the  target.  (One  point  of  wind- 
age at  200  yards  causes  the  bullet  to  strike  8  inches  to 
the  right  or  left  of  the  line  of  aim;  one  point  at  300 
yards  causes  a  12-inch  deflection  of  the  bullet;  one  point 
at  500  yards  a  20-inch  deflection,  and  so  on.) 

ELEVATION 

General  rule  for  changing  the  elevation  after  hitting 
the  target:  A  change  of  elevation  either  up  or  down, 
of  100  yards  on  your  rear  sight,  will  raise  or  lower  your 
bullet  in  inches  on  the  target  equal  to  the  square  of  your 
distance  in  yards  from  the  target.  I.e.,  a  change  of 
100  yards  in  elevation  on  the  rear  sight  leaf  while  firing 
at  the  200-yard  range  raises  or  lowers  the  striking  point 
of  the  bullet  at  the  target  4  inches.  A  similar  change 
while  firing  at  the  300-yard  range  raises  or  lowers  the 
striking  point  of  the  bullet  9  inches,  at  the  400-yard 
range  it  would  be  16  inches,  at  the  500-yard  range  25 
inches,  and  so  on. 

The  following  illustrations  are  self-explanatory  in 
regard  to  windage  and  elevation  changes  and  should  be 
diligently  studied  during  preliminary  instruction.  The 
effect  of  windage  changes  (given  in  points)  will  be 
found  at  the  bottom  of  each  target,  while  the  effect  of 
elevation  changes  (given  in  yards)  will  be  found  to  the 
left  of  each  target. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


269 


TARGET  A,  6'  x  4' 


Event. 

No 

Elev 

KG 

Pull 

X 

^             -600  YARDS 

•26      \        \          ^_^        J        1 
,_L     .     3      I       in'      •       3     .  .  1 

5 

0 

5 

o 

X 

I 

0 

2} 

o 

5 

o 

A 

o 

b 

o 

6 

o 

7 

c 

8 

o 

]9j 

o 

10 

o 

Wind 

,      ..         ....Oclock  ...Miles  MiRBGE 

Total  Scoi^e 

Direction  of  Sun..,  , 


TARGET  B,  6'x6' 

The  above  system  of  indicating  the  windage  and 
elevation  on  each  target  is  used  in  the  United  States 
Marine  Corps  score  book.  Each  man  at  Plattsburg,  in 
1916,  was  supplied  with  one  of  these  score  books.  If 
used  at  the  firing  point  they  greatly  simplify  sight  ad- 
justments, besides  containing  other  very  useful  informa- 
tion on  shooting. 


270        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

5.  Gallery  Practice.     Purpose. 

1.  To  note  errors  in  the  position  of  the  man  while 
he  is  in  the  act  of  firing  and  call  his  attention  to  them 
after  he  has  fired. 

2.  To  give  instruction  in  squeezing  the  trigger 
properly. 

3.  To  stimulate  and  maintain  interest. 

4.  Offers  a  check  on  what  the  man  has  absorbed 
from  the  other  preliminary  drills. 

Fire  just  as  much  on  the  gallery  range  as  your  com- 
pany commander  will  permit.  You  cannot  fire  too 
much.  Every  shot  you  fire  should  teach  you  a  lesson 
on  some  point  connected  with  the  art  of  shooting. 

SLOW   FIRE 

Following  satisfactory  gallery  practice  scores  the 
men  go  on  the  range  for  known  distance  practice.  Here 
the  army  rifle  is  fired  with  service  charges  at  known 
ranges;  first,  for  instruction,  if  time  permits,  and  then 
for  record.  To  obtain  satisfactory  results  the  flrer 
must  perform  correctly  five  essential  things,  namely: 

1.  Hold  the  rifle  on  the  mark. 

2.  Aim  properly. 

3.  Squeeze  the  trigger  properly. 

4.  Call  the  shot. 

5.  Make  the  proper  sight  adjustment. 
They  will  be  briefly  and  separately  discussed: 

1.  Holding.  Unless  the  rifle  is  held  steadily  the 
bullet  will  not  hit  the  desired  mark.     The  flrer  must  be 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


271 


able  to  hold  the  rifle  steadily  in  the  three  positions, 
kneeling,  sitting,  lying  down.  Holding  is  a  question  of 
the  proper  body  position,  use  of  the  sling,  and  practice. 
Body  Position.  The  position  of  the  firer  must  be 
comfortable.  You  may,  at  first,  feel  constrained  or 
cramped  in  the  different  positions  but  by  continued 
practice  the  muscles  and  joints  will  become  so  supple 
and  pliable  that  you  can  easily  assume  the  correct  posi- 
tion. Each  man  who  is  trying  for  a  high  score  should 
utilize  all  available  time  to  this  end.  The  following 
photographs  illustrate  the  correct  and  incorrect  posi- 
tions : 


r 

-i 

J 

t 

M. 

^ 

Mil    * 

y^fff 

oii. 

WZd 

No.  1.  Notice  the 
position  of  the  elbows. 
They  are  advanced  past 
the  knees  so  that  the  flat 
muscles  on  the  back  of 
the  arms,  above  the  el- 
bows, rest  against  the 
legs.  Notice  the  position 
of  the  right  thumb  and 
aiming  eye;  also  sling.  To  assume  this  position  cor- 
rectly, it  is  necessary  that  you  lean  well  forward. 
Avoid  the  tendency  of  getting  the  feet  too  far  apart. 


No.  1 
CORRECT  SITTING  POSITION 


272 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


No.  2. 
CORRECT  SITTING  POSITION 


No.  2.  Notice  the 
proper  manner  of 
working  the  bolt  dur- 
ing rapid  fire.  Keep 
your  gun  at  the  shoul- 
der while  loading. 
Turn  the  gun  to  right 
and  down  a  little. 
Don't  make  any  un- 
necessary motions. 

-  '1 


No.  1. 


No.  2. 


INCORRECT  SITTING  POSITION 

No.    1.     Left   elbow   is  No.  2.     This  shows  the 

resting  on  knee  cap.     No  common  error  of  lowering 

support    to    steady    right  the  gun  from  the  shoulder 

arm.     Eye   too    far   from  to    load    it    during    rapid 


rear  sight.  Lip  is  against 
stock.  (This  causes  sore 
lips.)  Thumb  around 
stock.  Sling  on  outside 
of  arm. 


fire. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 

No.  1.  Correct  kneeling 
position.  Notice  that  the 
back  of  the  left  arm  (not 
elbow)    is  resting  on  knee. 

Notice  that  the  firer  is 
sitting  well  down  on  the 
right  leg.     This  is  essential. 

CORRECT  KNEELING  POSITION 


273 


No.  1.  No.  2. 

INCORRECT  KNEELING  POSITION 


No.  1.  Thumb  is  around 
small  of  stock.  Eye  too 
far  from  rear  sight.  The 
gun  is  turned  (canted)  to 
the  right.  The  sharp 
point  of  the  elbow  is  rest- 
ing on  the  knee  which  has 
a  tendency  to  make  the 
position  an  unsteady  one. 


No.  2.  The  improper 
manner  of  loading  the  gun 
during  rapid  fire.  He  has 
lowered  the  gun  from  his 
shoulder  to  load  it,  which 
is  "a  time-killing"  propo- 
sition. 


274        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


^H 

co 

■4-J 

o3 

o 

CD 

pCJ 

• 

u 
<d 

,p 

<D 

,P 

P 
O 

T3 

<v 

•  (-H 

CD 

CD 

•  1— t 
H-> 

o 

<m-h 
O 

H-J 

o 

P 
Ph 

P 

£ 

P 

O 

•  i— t 

w-> 

hV 

CD 
Ph 
03 

CO 
CD 

O 

CO 

6 

CO 

O 

CD 
CD 

£ 

-t-3 
O 

- 

p 

o3 

CD 

fc 

p 
o 

CD 
-t-> 

CO 

p 

4jj 

•  r— 1 

o 

l-H 

"co 

o 

<D 

o3 
be 

H 
i— i 

_o 

03 

O 

Ph 

0) 

-t-> 

o 

b£ 
P 

H 

•  l-H 
H-J 

co 

£ 

o 

CD 

O 
PS 
Ph 

H 

B 

03 

^3 

H-J 

O 
D 

a 

Ph 
03 

O 

■4J 

-M 

w 

«4-H 

P 

CO 

co 
CD 

<H-H 

PS 
PS 

o 
u 

o 

CD 

CD 

O 

Ph 

^3 

CD 

H-J 

Ph 

<D 

4-J 

1 

^3 

o3 

CD 

Ph 

CO 

o 

-H 

_C 

■73 

CD 

P 

Ph 

.     Notice 
.     Notice    t 

p 
p 

""a; 

CD 
CD 

o 

03 

be 

03 

^P 
CD 
co 

CO 
<D 
Ph 

^4 

CD 

CD 

•  l-H 
+-> 

o 

• 

Ph 
<D 

• 

s 
p 
,p 
h>j 

-a 

r* 

CD 

Ph 

CO 

2 

Ph 

<D 

g3 

+3 

p 

p 

P 

3 

«4-H 
O 

• 

O 

rP 

<D 

i— < 

be 

P 

be 

co 

P 

o 

•  CH 

CD 

CD 

CD 

CD 

p*3 

,45 

-P 

J3 

Sh 

-t-" 

-*H> 

-4J 

H-> 

V2 

TARGET  PRACTICE 


275 


o 


CD 
O 
Oh 


~    6    2 

O    +3 
<3j    •>-< 


03 

be 

1-3 


CO 


o 

qj    •■— i 
Ph    £ 

O     -H 

Ph.22 

s 


03 


1'S 

03 

«3       O 


be 


O       «H-I 


o 
3 


<u 


W 
J? 
O 
03 
Oh      <M 

H 
O 

03 
03 

o 
u 


O 


o 


-5 

be 

*03 

<z> 


c 


-'.   -. _ 


<m 


o    S 


o3 


<D 


3 
O 


0) 

O     ^3 


<z> 

VI 

O 

- 

03 


-  VI 

03  -^ 

•22  jj|   5    .2 

o  •       s 


VI       l-Q 


-O 

o 

o 

o 

C/2 


+-> 

«H 

o 

-H 

be 

03 

« 

s 

03 

(73 
0) 
C/J 


s 

03 
a 

-o 


O      o3 


o 

jO 

1) 


O 

o 

H-> 


o 


PH 

£1)0 
°       fit     **"< 


276 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Sling.  Your  ability  to  hold  the  rifle  steadily  in  any 
required  position  will  be  greatly  increased  by  the  proper 
adjustment  and  use  of  the  sling.  Indeed,  you  cannot 
hope  to  hold  the  rifle  steadily  unless  the  sling  is  prop- 
erly used.  The  following  photographs  illustrate  the 
correct  way  to  get  into  the  sling. 


No.  1.  Notice  that  the  left  arm 
is  slipped  in  between  the  sling  and  the 
gun  from  the  left  side.  It  is  then  run 
through  the  sling  from  the  right  side 
of  same.  Notice  how  gun  is  held 
against  leg.  Notice  that  the  muzzle 
of  the  gun  is  pointing  up,  not  down. 
The  bolt  should  be  drawn  back  while 
you  get  into  the  sling.  This  is  to 
avoid  accidents.  Notice  that  the  sight 
leaf  is  down. 


No.  l. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


277 


No.  2. 


No.  2.  Notice  that  the  sling 
has  been  slipped  up  and  over  the 
large  muscles  of  the  upper  arm. 
Also  the  left  hand  after  being 
run  through  the  sling  is  grasp- 
ing the  gun  so  that  the  sling  is 
to  the  right. 

By  turning  back  now  to  the 
photographs  illustrating  the  cor- 
rect body  positions  you  will  see 
how  the  sling  is  used. 

2.  Aiming.  An  error  of  one 
one-hundredth  of  an  inch  in  the 
amount  of  front  sight  seen,  at  the  instant  the  gun  is 
fired,  will  cause  you  to  completely  miss  a  man  500  yards 
away.  Hence,  the  eye  must  be  trained  unless  the  firer 
has  at  all  times  a  mental  picture  of  how  the  sights  and 
the  bull's-eye  look  when  properly  aligned.  You  should 
acquire  this  mental  picture  during  your  aiming  exercises 
and  by  the  time  you  go  on  the  range  you  should  have 
the  eye  so  trained  that  you  will  focus  it  properly  on  your 
sights  and  the  target  without  mental  effort. 

3.  Trigger  Squeeze.  If  you  convulsively  jerk  the 
trigger  to  discharge  the  rifle,  you  disturb  your  hold  and 
aim  and  the  mark  is  missed;  this  is  the  recruit's  most 
common  error.  To  properly  squeeze  trigger  observe 
the  following  suggestions: 


278  THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

(a)  As  you  place  your  rifle  to  the  shoulder,  take  up 
the  loose  play  in  the  trigger  ( called  the  creep ) . 

(b)  When  the  gun  is  properly  aimed,  don't  endeavor 
at  that  particular  moment  to  fire  it  but  be  content  to 
apply  additional  pressure  to  the  trigger  and  then  hold 
this  pressure  until  the  gun  is  again  steady  and  properly 
aimed  when  a  little  more  pressure  is  added  and  so  on 
until  the  gun  is  discharged.  By  using  this  system,  the 
firer  does  not  know  the  exact  instant  the  gun  is  to  go  off 
and  the  common  faults,  namely,  flinching  and  jerking 
the  trigger  are  unconsciously  avoided. 

(c)  Fill  lungs  full,  that  is  take  a  deep  breath,  let  a 
little  out,  and  then  stop  breathing  to  fire. 

4.  Calling  the  Shot.  If  the  aiming  eye  is  open  when 
the  gun  is  discharged,  the  firer  should  know  at  what 
part  of  the  target  the  gun  was  aimed  at  that  instant,  and 
he  should  announce  this  fact  to  his  cOach  or  in  the 
absence  of  a  coach  make  a  mental  note  of  it.  If  the 
bullet  struck  the  target  at  the  point  where  the  gun  was 
aimed  the  instant  of  discharge,  no  sight  correction  is 
necessary;  on  the  other  hand,  if  the  bullet  did  not  strike 
the  target  at  the  point  where  the  gun  was  aimed  the 
instant  of  discharge,  the  sights  are  probably  improperly 
adjusted  and  should  be  changed  as  indicated  in  the 
following  paragraph  on  sight  adjustment. 

5.  Sight  Adjustment.  If,  after  firing  two  or  more 
shots,  you  find  that,  in  each  case,  there  is  a  constant 
error  between  where  the  bullet  hits  the  target  and  the 
place  where  you  called  the  shot,  your  sights  should  be 


TARGET  PRACTICE  279 

readjusted  in  accordance  with  your  preliminary  eleva- 
tion and  deflection  drills.  When  you  decide  to  change 
your  sight  adjustment  don't  be  timid  and  deal  in  half 
measures  but  apply  a  sufficient  correction  so  that  the 
rifle  will  hit  where  the  shot  is  called.  The  inexperienced 
man  has  a  tendency  to  change  his  sights  after  each  shot. 
Avoid  this  tendency. 

RAPID    FIRE 

In  rapid  fire  the  battle  sight  is  always  used ;  the  firing 
is  against  time  and  at  a  field  target  (Target  D),  and 
from  ranges  200,  300,  and  sometimes  500  yards. 

The  battle  sight  corresponds  to  an  elevation  of  547 
yards,  which  makes  it  necessary  for  the  firer  at  the  200 
and  300  yard  ranges  to  aim  at  a  point  about  2%  feet 
below  the  part  of  the  target  that  it  is  desired  to  hit. 
Prior  to  record  firing  each  man  should  determine  these 
aiming  points  by  slow  fire,  at  ranges  200  and  300  yards, 
using  the  battle  sight. 

There  is  one  golden  rule  that  must  be  followed  if  you 
are  to  get  a  good  score  at  rapid  fire:  You  must  use 
the  minimum  time  possible  in  loading  and  the  maximum 
time  possible  for  aiming  and  squeezing  the  trigger.  To 
be  more  specific,  this  means  work  your  bolt  quickly  but 
aim  and  squeeze  your  trigger  slowly. 

HINTS   ON    RAPID    FIRE 

1.  When  you  go  to  the  firing  point  get  two  clips  of 
cartridges,  one  to  be  used  at  the  command  load  and  the 
extra  one  is  placed  in  the  belt. 


280         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

2  See  that  your  cut-off  is  up. 

3.  When  the  target  first  appears  drop  quickly  into 
the  required  position  for  firing.  A  great  deal  of  time 
is  usually  lost  by  the  firer  squirming  around  trying  to 
get  into  a  comfortable  position. 

4.  Don't  hurry  your  .first  or  last  shot.  These  are 
the  two  shots  that  are  usually  bad. 

5.  If  your  second  clip  jams  or  breaks,  turn  the 
cut-off  up,  load  and  fire  each  cartridge  separately. 

6.  Leave  the  gun  at  your  shoulder  while  working  the 
bolt. 

7.  Be  careful  to  fire  on  your  own  target. 

8.  If  a  cartridge  fails  to  fire,  it  is  very  probably  be- 
cause the  bolt  is  not  all  the  way  down;  therefore  recock 
the  gun  (pull  the  firing  pin  back) ,  make  certain  the  bolt 
is  down,  and  fire  again. 

9.  As  soon  as  the  targets  disappear  cease  firing,  come 
to  Inspection  Arms,  examine  your  rifle  for  unfired 
cartridges. 

GENERAL   HINTS  AND    CAUTIONS 

1.  Don't  be  afraid  of  the  kick;  it  is  more  imaginary 
than  real  when  the  sling  is  properly  used,  your  shoulder 
properly  padded,  and  the  gun  properly  held. 

2.  Rest  your  cheek,  not  your  jaw  bone,  lightly  against 
the  small  of  the  stock. 

3.  Rest  your  right  thumb  along  the  right  side  of  the 
stock  and  not  on  top  of  it. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  281 

4.  Blacken  both  front  and  rear  sights,  adjust  and 
place  your  arm  in  the  sling,  and  if  possible  set  your 
sights  while  you  are  waiting  your  turn  to  go  to  the  firing 
point. 

5.  Approach  and  leave  the  firing  point  with  your  bolt 
drawn  back.     This  is  to  prevent  accidents. 

6.  When  not  actually  aiming,  have  your  bolt  drawn 
back. 

7.  Never  attempt  to  force  the  bolt  into  the  gun  in 
case  of  a  jam,  but  ask  a  coach  to  fix  it  for  you. 

8.  Don't  allow  the  muzzle  to  touch  the  ground. 

9.  Don't  rub  your  eyes  while  at  the  firing  point. 

10.  When  not  actually  aiming,  rest  the  eyes  by  shad- 
ing them  or  looking  at  something  green. 

11.  Clean  the  bore  of  your  rifle  before  and  after  fir- 
ing. After  firing  it  should  be  cleaned  daily,  until  a 
rag  run  through  it  will  not  be  soiled. 

12.  Clean  the  rifle  from  the  breech. 

13.  Zero  of  rifle.  Every  rifle,  owing  to  slight  in- 
equalities of  boring,  sights,  and  the  personal  errors  of 
the  firer,  shoots  differently.  When  you  have  ascertained 
its  (rifle)  and  your  own  peculiar  errors  and  you  know 
where  to  set  your  sights  to  counteract  these  constant 
errors,  you  have  determined  what  is  commonly  termed 
the  zero  of  your  rifle.  To  illustrate,  if  you  were  shoot- 
ing on  a  perfectly  calm  day  (which  is  essential)  at  the 
target  from  the  500-yard  range,  and  you  found  that  you 
required  one  half  a  point  left  windage  in  order  to  hit 


282         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

the  bull's-eye  when  no  wind  is  blowing,  the  zero  of  your 
rifle  for  that  range  would  be  one  half  a  point  left  wind- 
age. 

CARE   OF   THE   RIFLE 

Keep  the  metal  part  of  your  rifle  covered  with  a  thin 
coating  of  light  oil;  "3-in-l"  oil  is  ordinarily  used. 
This  is  especially  important  in  damp  weather. 

Always  clean  the  bore  from  the  breech.  This  avoids 
injuring  the  muzzle.  The  pull  through  (a  string  found 
in  the  oiler  and  thong  case)   is  only  used  in  the  field. 

After  the  rifle  is  fired  the  bore  is  covered  with  an  acid 
which,  if  left  in  the  bore,  will  eat  into  the  metal  and  pit 
it.  To  avoid  this,  swab  out  the  barrel  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible after  firing  with  Hoppe's  "Powder  Solvent,  Xo. 
9"  which  can  be  purchased  at  the  camp  stores.  If  this 
powder  solvent  is  not  available,  dissolve  some  soda  in 
water  and  use  it.  When  the  barrel  is  clean,  dry  it  out 
thoroughly  by  running  several  dry  rags  through  it. 
Xext  run  several  rags,  saturated  in  oil,  through  the 
barrel,  this  for  the  purpose  of  oiling  the  bore  and  pre- 
venting rust.  This  process  of  cleaning  should  be  re- 
peated for  at  least  three  successive  days  following  the 
firing  of  the  rifle. 

The  metal  fouling,  caused  by  the  pealing  off  in  the 
bore  of  the  jacket  of  the  bullet,  can  only  be  removed 
by  an  application  of  an  ammonia  solution  which  should 
not  be  used  by  an  inexperienced  man. 


TARGET  PRACTICE 


283 


MISCELLANEOUS    INFORMATION 

The  Bayonet.  The  bayonet  is  a  cutting  and  thrust- 
ing weapon  consisting  of  three  principal  parts,  viz.,  the 
blade,  the  guard,  and  the  grip.  The  weight  of  a 
bayonet  is  1  pound. 


'16' 


J   JGWUICL 


BLADE 


GfiOOK 


I 

1 

S.6-> —  -} 

fALSf  [DCC  I 


_^ CDC£ POorL.  ,~4 


GUARD 
/ 


Ztoo 


ElADC 
/ 


bAC* 


PO"rf 


Captain  B.  A.  Dixon,  retired,  has  compiled  the 
following  interesting  data  about  our  military  rifle  and 
ammunition : 

"Name.  United  States  Rifle  (commonly  known  as 
the  Springfield) . 

"Cost.     $1-1.4.0  without  the  bayonet. 

"Barrel.  24.006  inches  in  length.  The  muzzle  is 
rounded  to  protect  the  rifling.  Any  injury  here  would 
allow  gases  to  escape  around  the  sides  of  the  bullet  and 
destroy  its  accuracy. 

•  * 

"On  the  top  in  rear  of  the  front  sight  is  stamped  the 
Ordnance  escutcheon,  the  initials  of  the  place  of  manu- 
facture, and  the  month  and  year. 

"Caliber.     .30-thirtv  hundredths  of  an  inch.     Caliber 


284         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

is  the  interior  diameter  of  the  barrel  measured  between 
the  lands. 

"Grooves.  The  four  spiral  channels  within  the  bore 
of  the  rifle  sometimes  called  rifling.  They  are  .004 
inches  deep  and  are  three  times  as  wide  as  the  lands. 

" Lands.  The  four  raised  spaces  in  the  bore  of  the 
rifle  between  the  grooves.  These  lands  grip  the  bullet 
as  it  passes  through  the  bore  and  rotate  it  to  the  right 
about  the  longer  axis.  This  rotation  serves  to  prevent 
tumbling  and  keeps  the  bullet  accurately  on  its  course. 
This  spinning  of  the  bullet  also  causes  it  to  drift  slightly 
to  the  right  as  it  passes  through  the  air.  The  same 
effect  is  produced  by  throwing  a  baseball  with  a  twist. 

"Twist.  The  spiral  formed  by  the  grooves  in  the 
barrel  of  the  piece.  The  twist  is  uniform  and  to  the 
right,  one  turn  in  ten  inches. 

"Length.  The  rifle  without  bayonet  is  43.212  inches 
long.     With  bayonet  it  is  59.212  inches  long. 

"Manufacture.  The  United  States  Rifle  is  manu- 
factured by  the  Government  at  Springfield  Armory, 
Massachusetts,  and  Rock  Island  Arsenal,  Illinois. 

"Rear  Sight  Leaf.  Graduated  from  100  to  2850 
yards.  The  odd  range  is  on  the  right  branch  of  the 
leaf,  the  even  on  the  left.  Note  that  the  line  corre- 
sponding to  a  range  is  below  a  numeral. 

"Battle  sight  is  the  position  of  the  rear  sight  in  which 
the  leaf  is  laid  down.  The  slide  should  be  drawn  all 
the  way  back  to  secure  full  advantage  of  the  windage. 
It  corresponds  to  a  range  of  547  yards. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  285 

"Rounds.  The  rifle  will  hold  six  cartridges.  Five 
are  carried  in  the  magazine  and  one  in  the  chamber. 

"Stock.     Made  of  walnut  wood. 

"Oiler  and  Thong  Case.  Furnished  for  every  al- 
ternate rifle  and  is  carried  in  butt  of  the  stock.  In  one 
section  is  a  supply  of  oil,  in  the  other  a  thong  and  brush 
for  cleaning  the  bore.  In  cleaning  by  this  method  draw 
the  brush  or  rag  from  the  muzzle  toward  the  breech. 

"Weight.  8.69  pounds  without  bayonet.  Bayonet 
weighs  1  pound. 


"ammunition 


"Cost.    About  three  and  one-half  cents  per  cartridge. 

"Bullet.  Has  a  core  of  lead  and  tin  composition  in- 
closed in  a  jacket  of  cupro-nickel.  The  jacket  being 
tough  enables  the  lands  in  the  bore  to  grip  the  bullet 
without  rupturing  and  to  rotate  it  while  passing  through 
the  barrel.  A  lead  bullet  un jacketed  would  strip  and 
pass  through  without  rotating.  It  weighs  150  grains 
and  is  pointed  to  offer  less  resistance  to  the  air. 

"Case.  Made  of  brass.  The  government  ammuni- 
tion is  manufactured  at  Frankford  Arsenal,  Pennsyl- 
vania. 

"Powder.  Pyrocellulose.  The  grains  are  cylindri- 
cal, single,  perforated,  and  graphited.  Normal  charge 
is  47-50  grains.  Pressure  developed  in  the  chamber  is 
51,000  pounds  per  square  inch. 

"Penetration.  This  bullet  will  penetrate  the  follow- 
ing materials  to  depth  stated  at  range  of  100  yards: 


286        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Moist  sand,  14.02  inches;  loam,  17.46  inches;  oak,  31.18 
inches;  brick  wall,  5.5  inches;  steel  plate,  .4  inch.  Dry 
sand  is  the  best  stop.  The  bullet  will  penetrate  6.88 
inches  of  it  at  100  yards  and  13.12  inches  at  500  yards. 

"Range.  Maximum  range,  4891.6  yards,  about  2% 
miles)  with  the  muzzle  elevated  45  degrees.  The  time 
of  flight  38.058  seconds. 

"Velocity.  About  2700  feet  per  second  at  70  de- 
grees F. 

"Weight.  A  complete  cartridge  weighs  395.5  grains 
depending  on  amount  of  water.     It  is  waterproof." 

ESTIMATING    DISTANCE 

Suppose  you  are  out  hunting,  and  that  you  see  a  big 
buck  on  a  distant  hill.  Suppose  that  it  is  exactly  600 
yards  distant  from  you,  that  you  are  an  expert  shot,  and 
that  you  set  your  sights  at  400  yards  and  fire.  Will 
you  hit  the  deer  or  not?  You  must  know  how  to  guess 
accurately  the  distance  to  a  deer,  or  a  man,  or  anything 
else,  if  you  propose  to  have  any  reasonable  hope  of  hit- 
ting it. 

The  art  of  estimating  distances  with  the  eye  can  be 
improved  by  practice.  When  you  are  in  ranks,  observe 
continually  your  surroundings.  Call  attention  to  and 
make  estimates  of  the  distances  to  all  the  prominent  ob- 
jects in  view.  Others  near  you  will  become  interested, 
and  the  interest  will  soon  spread  to  the  entire  company. 
It  will  be  necessary  for  the  objects  to  be  pointed  out  to 
those  interested.  This  in  itself  is  a  difficult  thing  to  do. 
To  be  able  quickly  to  see  distant  objects  that  are  being 


TARGET  PRACTICE  287 

pointed  out  is  a  military  accomplishment  which  all 
soldiers  should  possess  and  which  comes  only  with  prac- 
tice. 

METHODS    OF   ESTIMATING   DISTANCES   BY    THE   EYE 

1.  Decide  that  the  object  cannot  be  more  than  a  cer- 
tain distance  away,  or  less  than  a  certain  distance.  Keep 
the  estimate  within  the  closest  possible  limits  and  take 
the  mean  of  the  two  estimates  as  the  range.  For  in- 
stance, that  deer  cannot  be  over  800  yards  away  and  not 
less  than  400  yards.  Your  estimated  distance  is  600 
yards. 

2.  Select  a  point  which  you  think  is  the  middle  point 
of  the  distance,  estimate  the  distance  to  this  middle  point, 
and  double  your  estimate  to  get  your  range.  Do  the 
same  thing  with  half  the  distance,  if  the  object  is  very 
far  away. 

3.  Estimate  the  distance  along  a  parallel  line,  such 
as  a  telephone  line  or  a  railroad  having  on  it  a  well- 
defined  length  with  which  you  are  familiar. 

4.  Take  the  mean  of  several  estimates  made  by  sev- 
eral well-instructed  men.  This  method  is  used  in  battle, 
but  is  not  applicable  to  instruction  or  during  tests. 

1.    Preliminary  Instruction 

To  estimate  distances  by  the  eve  with  accuracv,  it  is 
first  necessary  that  you  become  familiar  with  the  ap- 
pearance of  the  most  convenient  unit  of  length,  namely 
100  yards.  Stake  off  a  distance  of  100  yards.  Sub- 
divide this  100  yards  into  four  25-yard  divisions.     Pace 


288        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

off  the  entire  distance  several  times,  and  you  will  soon 
become  familiar  with  the  appearance  of  100  yards. 
Next,  take  a  distance  more  than  100  yards  and  compare 
it  mentally  with  your  unit  of  measure  (100  yards)  and 
make  your  estimate.  Verify  this  estimate  by  pacing  the 
distance.  Do  this  once  a  day  for  several  months,  and 
you  may  become  highly  skilled  in  the  art  of  estimating 
distances. 

2.     Preliminary  Instruction 

If  you  know  how  a  soldier,  or  group  of  soldiers,  looks 
at  the  different  ranges,  it  will  often  assist  you  in  quickly 
making  an  accurate  estimate  of  the  distance.  In  order 
to  acquire  skill  in  estimating  distances  by  this  method 
one  must  have  special  exercises  designated  to  demon- 
strate the  clearness  with  which  details  of  clothing,  move- 
ment of  the  limbs,  etc.,  can  be  observed  at  the  different 
ranges.  Have  a  squad  march  away  from  you  to  a  dis- 
tance of  1,200  yards.  Then  have  it  approach  you  and 
halt  every  100  yards.  Each  time  the  squad  halts  make 
a  mental  note  of  the  distance,  and  then  observe  care- 
fully its  appearance,  the  clearness  with  which  you  can 
see  the  clothing,  movements  of  the  limbs,  etc. 

APPEARANCE   OF  OBJECTS 

Become  familiar  with  the  effect  which  the  varying  con- 
ditions of  light,  background,  etc.,  have  upon  the  appar- 
ent distance  of  the  object.  Don't  be  content  to  memor- 
ize the  following  data,  but  go  after  the  underlying  rea- 
son in  each  case. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  289 

Objects  seem  nearer  than  they  actually  are: 

1.  When  the  object  is  seen  in  a  bright  light. 

2.  When  the  color  of  the  object  contrasts  sharply  with 
the  color  of  the  background. 

3.  When  looking  over  water,  snow,  or  a  uniform  sur- 
face like  a  wheat  field. 

4.  When  looking  from  a  height  downward. 

5.  In  clear  atmosphere  of  high  altitudes,  as  in  Arizona 
and  New  Mexico. 

Objects  seem  more  distant  than  they  actually  are: 

1.  When  looking  over  a  depression  in  the  ground 
( across  a  canyon ) . 

2.  When  there  is  a  poor  light  (very  cloudy  day)  or 
a  fog. 

3.  When  only  a  part  of  the  object  can  be  seen. 

4.  When  looking  from  low  ground  upward  toward 
higher  ground. 

ESTIMATING   DISTANCES    BY   SOUND 

Sound  travels  at  the  rate  of  about  366  yards  a  sec- 
ond. Therefore,  multiply  the  number  of  seconds  in- 
tervening between  the  flash  of  the  gun  and  the  report 
of  the  same  by  366,  and  the  product  will  be  the  distance 
in  yards  to  the  gun. 

RANGE-FINDING   INSTRUMENT 

Each  company  is  equipped  with  a  range-finding  in- 
strument. All  company  officers  and  sergeants  should 
be  proficient  in  using  it.     The  accuracy  of  this  instru- 


290         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

ment  will  greatly  depend  upon  the  skill  of  the  user,  and 
the  visibility  of  the  objective. 

TRIAL    SHOTS   OR   VOLLEYS 

"If  the  ground  is  so  dry  and  dusty  that  the  fall  of  the 
bullets  is  visible  through  a  glass  or  with  the  naked  eye, 
a  method  of  determining  the  distance  is  afforded  by 
using  a  number  of  trial  shots  or  volleys.  The  method 
of  using  trial  volleys  is  as  follows :  The  sights  are  raised 
for  the  estimated  range  and  one  volley  is  fired.  If  this 
appears  to  hit  but  little  short  of  the  mark,  an  increase  of 
elevation  of  100  yards  will  be  used  for  the  next  volley. 
When  the  object  is  enclosed  between  two  volleys,  a 
mean  of  the  elevation  will  be  adopted  as  the  correct 
range.  The  range  may  be  obtained  from  a  near-by  bat- 
tery or  machine  gun.  This  is  the  best  method  when 
available." — Small  Arms  Firing  Manual. 

ESTIMATING  DISTANCE   TEST 

This  test  is  usually  held  after  the  record  firing  on  the 
range  has  been  completed.  No  distance  used  in  this 
test  will  be  less  than  547  yards  (battle  sight  range)  or 
more  than  1200  yards,  which  is  considered  the  extreme 
range  for  effective  fire  of  individuals  or  a  small  com- 
mand. Should  a  soldier  fail  three  times  to  make  the 
necessary  percentage  in  these  tests,  his  rifle  qualification 
will  be  reduced  one  grade.  For  the  specific  conditions 
governing  this  test,  see  Small  Arms  Firing  Manual. 

RANGE    FINDERS 

Five  or  six  enlisted  men,  selected  by  the  company 


Ik4 


$ 


TARGET  PRACTICE  291 

commander  from  those  most  skilled,  will  be  designated  as 
"Range  Finders."  These  men  are  practised  in  estimat- 
ing distance  throughout  the  year.  Their  practice  will 
be  on  varied  ground  and  at  distances  up  to  2000  yards. 
These  men  assist  the  company  commander  when  the 
company  is  on  the  defensive,  in  estimating  the  distances 
to  the  prominent  objects  in  view  before  the  action  com- 
mences; and  at  other  times  when  the  company  com- 
mander needs  their  assistance. 


CHAPTER  V 

TENT  PITCHING 

On  the  hike  the  camp  will  be  laid  out  daily  in  advance 
by  a  staff  officer.  The  company  being  halted  and  in 
line,  the  company  commander  gives  the  order :  FORM 
FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  first  sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in  on  the  right 
of  the  company.  The  blank  files  in  the  squads  have  to 
be  filled  by  men  from  the  file  closers,  and  the  remaining 
guides  and  file  closers  form  on  the  left  flank  or  at  such 
places  as  may  be  designated  by  the  company  com- 
mander. The  company  commander  next  gives  the  or- 
der: l.  Take  interval,  2.  To  the  left,  3.  MARCH, 
4.  Company,  5.  HALT. 

At  the  second  command  (to  the  left)  the  rear  rank 
men  march  backward  four  steps  of  fifteen  inches  each 
and  then  halt. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  all  face  to  the  left  and 
the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off.  The  remaining 
men  step  off  in  succession,  each  following  the  preceding 
man  at  four  paces.  The  rear  rank  men  march  abreast 
of  their  file  leaders. 

The  company  commander  gives  the  command  HALT 
when  all  have  gained  their  intervals.  At  this  com- 
mand all  halt  and  face  to  the  front,  dressing  to  the  right. 

292 


TENT  PITCHING  293 

The  more  quickly  you  dress  and  establish  the  line  of 
tents,  the  more  quickly  you  will  be  relieved  of  those 
heavy  packs.  This  is  the  time  to  brace  up  and  give  the 
company  commander  your  support  by  giving  him  your 
attention.  If  you  cover  in  file  accurately  as  you  take 
interval  you  will  often  be  accurately  aligned  upon  halt- 


ing. 


The  next  command  is:  PITCH  TENTS.  At  this 
command  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to  the  right  with 
the  right  foot  (about  thirty  inches)  and  lays  his  rifle  on 
the  ground,  butt  to  the  rear  and  near  the  toe  of  the  right 
foot,  muzzle  to  the  front,  barrel  to  the  left.  He  then 
steps  back  to  his  original  position.  During  this  process 
of  "grounding"  the  rifle,  the  front  rank  man  must  keep 
his  left  foot  strictly  in  its  position.  Each  front  rank 
man  then  draws  his  bayonet  from  the  scabbard  and 
sticks  it  in  the  ground  by  the  outside  of  his  right  heel. 
Now  in  order  to  insure  the  bayonet  being  properly 
aligned,  thus  producing  a  straight  line  of  tents,  the 
company  officers  (first  and  second  lieutenants),  some- 
times are  required  to  align  the  line  of  bayonets  while  the 
men  are  unslinging  and  opening  their  equipment.  The 
equipment  is  then  unslung  and  laid  on  the  ground. 
The  packs  are  opened  and  the  shelter  half  and  pins 
removed  therefrom.  Each  man  spreads  his  shelter 
half,  small  triangle  to  the  rear,  on  the  ground  that  the 
tent  is  to  occupy,  the  rear-rank  man's  shelter  half  being 
on  the  right.  Then  the  front-  and  rear-rank  men  but- 
ton the  halves  together,  the  rear-rank  man's  half  on  top. 


294         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

The  guy  loops  at  each  end  of  the  lower  half  are  then 
passed  through  the  button  holes  provided  in  the  lower 
and  upper  halves ;  next  the  whipped  end  of  the  guy  rope 
is  passed  through  both  guy  loops  and  secured;  this  is 
done  at  both  ends  of  the  tent,  the  rear-rank  man  work- 
ing at  the  rear  and  the  front-rank  man  at  the  front. 

Each  front-rank  man  then  inserts  the  muzzle  of  his 
rifle  under  the  front  end  of  the  tent  and  holds  the  rifle 
upright,  sling  to  the  front,  heel  of  the  butt  on  the  ground 
beside  the  bayonet.  The  rear-rank  man  comes  to  the 
front  of  the  tent  and  pins  down  the  two  front  corners 
on  the  line  of  bayonets,  stretching  the  sides  of  the  tent 
taut.  He  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  loop  of  the  front  guy 
rope  and  drives  it  in  the  ground  at  such  a  distance  in 
front  of  the  rifle  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut.  Then  both 
men  proceeding  to  the  rear  of  the  tent,  each  pins  down  a 
corner,  stretching  the  sides  and  rear  of  the  tent  taut 
before  driving  the  pin  in.  The  rear-rank  man  next  in- 
serts an  intrenching  tool  or  a  bayonet,  in  its  scabbard, 
under  the  rear  end  of  the  tent,  the  front  rank  man  peg- 
ging down  the  end  of  the  guy  rope.  The  rest  of  the 
pins  are  then  driven  by  both  men,  the  rear-rank  man 
working  on  the  right. 

The  front  flaps  of  the  tent  are  not  fastened  down,  but 
thrown  back  on  the  tent. 

In  pitching  the  tent,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  the 
front-  and  rear-rank  men  work  together.  Team  work 
is  essential. 

When  the  camp  site  is  small,  it  is  necessary  that  each 


TENT  PITCHING 


295 


.Arrangement 


Teat 


\    EleveJtxoj? 


296 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


company  pitch  its  tents  in  two  lines  facing  each  other. 
The  following  illustration  shows  the  arrangement  of 
the  articles  of  the  equipment  when  they  are  laid  out  for 
inspection.  During  the  inspection,  each  man  stands  at 
attention  in  front  of  the  corner  pin  of  his  own  shelter 
half  on  a  line  with  the  front  guy  rope  pin,  unless  ordered 
to  the  contrary. 


*- Center  lirfe   of    tent 


Under 

do  the 


lit  Aid 
(•pen) 

Cbr\Taer» 
Cover  , 


Top    of 

meat  can 


fleet  Can 


Condiment  C«n 
^-foncho  under   Btankel 


ront  Ime.  of  fent 
Self  open 


Knifa/,  forK 
(tnd  Sj>00r\ 


ttaversacK 


Entrenching  tool 
left  in  place. 

for  clearness,  straps, etc.,  arc   omitted, 
5u$t>endcrs    Ftmo'tn  fastened    to   belt. 
AH  PocKets,  Covers, .ef^.,  dre    opened. 

PLAN 


CHAPTER  VI 

SIGNALS  AND  CODES 

1.  GENERAL  SERVICE  CODE.  (INTERNATIONAL  MORSE 
CODE. ) 

Used  for  visual  (except  semaphore)  and  sound  sig- 
naling, radio  telegraphy,  on  cables  using  siphon  re- 
corders, in  communication  with  the  Navy,  and  in  intra- 
fleld  artillery  buzzer  communication. 


A    .    — 

N    - 

B     — 

O    - 

C    —    .    —    . 

P     . 

D    —    .    . 

Q    - 

E     . 

R     . 

F     .    .    —    . 

S     . 

G    —    —    . 

T    - 

H 

U    . 

I     .    . 

V    . 

J     .    —    —    — 

W     . 

K    —     .    — 

X    - 

JLi     .     —     .     . 

Y    - 

M    —    — 

Z    - 

NUMERALS 

l     .    —    —    — 

—         3     . 

2     .     .     —    —     - 

-            4.     . 

207 

298         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

5 8    —    —    —    .. 

6  —     ...     .  9     —     —    —    — 

7  —    —     ...  o     —    —     —    — 


PUNCTUATION 


Period 

Comma 

Interrogation 

Hyphen  or  dash 

Parentheses  (before  and 
after  the  words) 

Quotation  mark  (beginning 
and  ending) 

Exclamation 

Apostrophe 

Semicolon 

Colon 

Bar  indicating  fraction 

Underline  (before  and  after 
the  word  or  words  it  is 
wished  to  underline) 

Double  dash  (between  pre- 
amble and  address,  be- 
tween address  and  body 
of  message,  between 
body  of  message  and 
signature,  and  imme- 
diately before  a  frac- 
tion) 
Cross 


SIGNALS  AND  CODES 


299 


Note. — Numerals  and  punctuations  must  be  spelled 
out  in  the  ardois,  as  they  require  more  than  four  ele- 
ments, which  is  the  limit  of  the  ardois  keyboard. 

The  position  is  with  the  flag  or  other  appliance  held 
vertically,  the  signalman  directly  facing  station  with 
which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  The  "dot"  is  to  the 
right  of  sender,  embracing  an  arc  of  90°,  starting  with 
the  vertical  and  returning  to  it.  The  "dash"  is  a  similar 
motion  to  left.  "Front"  is  downward  directly  in  front 
and  instantly  returned  to  vertical;  it  indicates  a  pause 
or  conclusion. 


fosrrroN 


dot. 


DASH 


FRONT 


CONVENTIONAL   FLAG   SIGNALS 

For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the 
reserve  or  commander  in  rear,  the  subjoined  signals 
(Signal  Corps  codes)  are  prescribed  and  should  be 
memorized.  In  transmission,  their  concealment  from 
the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of 
signal  flags,  the  head  dress  or  other  substitute  may  be 
used. 


300 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Letter  of 

If  signaled  from  the 

If  signaled  from  the 

Alphabet 

rear  to  the  firing  line 

firing  line  to  the  rear 

A  M 

Ammunition     going     for- 
ward 

Ammunition  required 

C  C  C 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  Am  about  to  charge  if  no 

times) 

instructions  to  the  con- 
trary 

C  F 

Cease  firing 

Cease  firing 

D  T 

Double  time  or  "rush" 

Double  time  or  "rush"  or 
hurry 

F 

Commence  firing 

Commence  firing 

F  L 

Artillery    fire    is    causing 

Artillery    fire    is   causing 

us  losses 

us  losses 

G 

Move  forward 

Preparing  to  move  for- 
ward 

H  H  H 

Halt 

Halt 

K 

Negative 

Negative 

L  T 

Left 

Left 

0 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.?) 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.?) 

(Ardois   and 

Interrogatory 

Interrogatory 

semaphore 

only) 

•      •      i              — —      •      ■ 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,etc?) 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.?) 

(All  methods 

Interrogatory 

Interrogatory 

but  ardois 

and  sema- 

phore) 

P 

Affirmative 

Affirmative 

R 

Acknowledgment 

Acknowledgment 

R  N 

Range 

Range 

R  T 

Right 

Right 

s  s  s 

Support  going  forward 

Support  needed 

T 

Target 

Target 

SIGNALS  AND  CODES 


301 


N 


a 
o 
o 

O 
Ph 


CO 

PS 
I 

o 


(0 


CO 


e> 


o 


a 


U 


302 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


ARM  SIGNALS 

The  following  arm  signals  are  prescribed.  In  mak- 
ing signals  either  arm  may  be  used.  Officers  who  re- 
ceive signals  on  the  firing  line  "repeat  back"  at  once  to 
prevent  misunderstanding. 

Forward,  MARCH.  Carry  the 
hand  to  the  shoulder;  straighten  and 
hold  the  arm  horizontally,  thrusting  it 
in  the  direction  of  march. 

This  signal  is  also  used  to  execute 
quick  time  from  double  time. 


HALT.  Carry  the  hand  to  the 
shoulder.  Thrust  the  hand  up- 
ward and  hold  the  arm  vertically. 

Double  time,  MARCH.  Carry 
the  hand  to  the  shoulder;  rapidly 
thrust  the  hand  upward  the  full 
extent  of  the  arm  several  times. 


Halt:  Arm  held  stationary. 
Double  Time:  Arm  moved 
up  and  down  several  times. 


SQuads 


Squads  right,  MARCH, 
Raise  the  arm  laterally  until 
horizontal;  carry  it  to  a  verti- 
cal position  above  the  head 
and  swing  it  several  times  be- 
tween the  vertical  and  hori- 
zontal positions. 


SIGNALS  AND  CODES 


303 


SQuads 
Left 


*r~* 


Squads  left,  MARCH. 
Raise  the  arm  laterally  until 
horizontal;  cany  it  downward 
to  the  side  and  swing  it  several 
times  between  the  downward 
and  horizontal  positions. 


T 


Squads  right  about, 
MARCH  (if  in  close  order) 
or,  To  the  rear,  MARCH 
(if  in  skirmish  line) .  Extend 
the  arm  vertically  above  the 
head;  carry  it  laterally  down- 
ward to  the  side,  and  swing  it 
several  times  between  the  ver- 
tical and  downward  positions. 

Change  direction  or 
Column  right  (left), 
MARCH.  The  hand  on 
the  side  toward  which  the 
change  of  direction  is  to 
be  made  is  carried  across 
the  body  to  the  opposite 
shoulder,  forearm  horizontal ;  then  swing  in  a  horizontal 
plane,  arm  extended,  pointing  in  the  new  direction. 


To  the 
rear 

SQuads 
Ri3ht  About 


Change  direction 


304 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


As  Skirmishers      Guide  Center 
return  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  times. 


As  Skirmishers 
Guide  Right 


As    skirmishers, 
MARCH.  Raise 

both  arms  laterally 
until  horizontal. 

As    skirmishers, 
guide  center, 

MARCH.  Raise 
both  arms  laterally 
until  horizontal ; 

swing  both  simul- 
taneously upward 
until     vertical,     and 


UP3* 


As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left),  MARCH. 
Raise  both  arms  laterally  until  horizontal ;  hold  the  arm 
on  the  side  of  the  guide  steadily  in  the  horizontal  posi- 
tion; swing  the  other  upward  until  vertical,  and  return 
it  to  the  horizontal;  repeat  several  times. 


SIGNALS  AND  CODES 


305 


..-*- 


*&■- 


\     vV  /'.  ■  V. 


ssemi 


To  announce  range    l\U 
Battle  sight 


Assemble,  MARCH. 
Raise  the  arm  vertically 
to  its  full  extent  and  de- 
scribe horizontal  circles. 


Hange  or  Change  Eleva- 
tion. To  announce  range, 
extend  the  arm  toward  the 
leaders  or  men  for  whom 
the  signal  is  intended,  fist 
closed;  by  keeping  the  fist 
closed  battle  sight  is  indi- 
cated : 


by  opening  and  closing  the  fist,  ex- 
pose thumb  and  fingers  to  a  number 

Ranrte  500        L  ,,,-,,.  i 

Or  increase  by  300  equal  to  the  hundreds  oi  yards; 


Add  50 


to  add  50  yards  describe  a  short  hori- 
zontal line  with  forefinger. 


306 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


Decrease 
by  500 


To  change  elevation,  indicate  the 
amount  of  increase  or  decrease  by  fin- 
gers as  above ;  point  upward  to  indicate 
increase  and  downward  to  indicate  de- 


crease. 


What  range  are 
you  using  or: 
What  is  the  range 


What  range  are  you  using?  or  What 
is  the  range?  Extend  the  arms  toward 
the  person  addressed,  one  hand  open, 
palm  to  the  front,  resting  on  the  other 
hand,  fist  closed. 


Are  you  ready?  or  I  am  ready.    Raise 
the  hand,  fingers  extended  and  joined, 

Are  you  ready  palm  toward  the  person  addressed. 

or:  I  am  ready 

Commence  firing.  Move 
the  arm  extended  in  full 
length,  hand  palm  down, 
several  times  through  a 
horizontal  arc  in  front  of 
the  body. 

Fire  faster.  Execute 
rapidly  the  signal  "Com- 
mence firing." 

Fire  slower.  Execute 
slowly  the  signal  "Com- 
mence firing." 


Commence  Firing 


SIGNALS  AND  CODES 


307 


^\&& 


Swing  the  cone  of  fire 
to  the  right,  or  left.  Ex- 
tend the  arm  in  full  length 
to  the  front,  palm  to  the 
right  (left)  ;  swing  the 
arm  to  right   (left),  and 

point  in  the  direction  of 
To  swing  cone  of  fire  to  right  ^  new  ^^ 

Fix  bayonet.     Simulate  the  movement  of  the  right 
hand  in  "Fix  bayonet." 

Suspend  firing.  Raise  and  hold 
the  forearm  steadily  in  a  horizontal 
position  in  front  of  the  forehead, 
palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

Cease  firing.     Raise  the  forearm 

Suspend  firing.    as  in  susPend  firing  and  swing  **  UP 
For  Cease  firing-  and  down  several  times  in  front  of 
Swin5  arm  up  and    the  face, 
down  several  titles* 


f    a^v 

Platoon 


Platoon.  Extend  the  arm  hori- 
zontally toward  the  platoon  leader ; 
describe  small  circles  with  the 
hand. 


So.uad 


Squad.  Extend  the  arm  horizon- 
tally toward  the  platoon  leader; 
swing  the  hand  up  and  down  from 

the  wrist. 

Rush.     Same  as  double  time. 


308         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Use  of  the  platoon  and  squad  signals.  The  signals 
platoon  and  squad  are  intended  primarily  for  communi- 
cation between  the  captain  and  his  platoon  leaders. 
The  signal  platoon  or  squad  indicates  that  the  platoon 
commander  is  to  cause  the  signal  which  follows  to  be 
executed  by  platoon  or  squad. 

You  will  observe  that  in  no  case  is  the  right  hand  or 
the  left  hand  specified.  The  officer  may  either  face 
the  company  or  have  his  back  toward  it. 


CHAPTER  VII 

FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED 

In  the  army,  as  in  civilian  life,  you  are  very  often  your 
brother's  keeper,  as  well  as  your  own.  Doctors  cannot 
accompany  a  scout,  a  patrol,  or  the  firing  line.  They 
are  seldom  present  when  a  man  falls  overboard.  When 
a  soldier  on  the  firing  line  is  wounded,  he  may  remain 
for  several  hours  where  he  falls.  He,  or  his  comrade, 
bandages  the  wound.  Suppose  you  are  wounded,  bitten 
by  a  snake,  etc.,  what  would  you  do?  You  may  have  to 
give  a  practical  answer  to  these  questions  at  some  time 
during  your  life. 

This  chapter  tells  you  what  to  do  and  what  not  to  do 
in  case  of  the  most  frequent  disabling  accidents  that  may 
befall  a  soldier  or  a  civilian.  Ask  your  mother,  father, 
older  brothers,  and  sisters  to  read  it.  Part  of  it  is  for 
them. 

FIRST-AID    PACKET 

Each  soldier  carries  on  his  belt  a  first-aid  packet. 
This  packet  contains  two  perfectly  pure  bandages  and 
a  couple  of  safety  pins.  It  should  be  air  tight.  Exam- 
ine yours  every  week  and  if  the  seal  is  defective,  ask  your 
captain  for  a  new  packet. 

309 


310        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

CAUTIONS 

1.  Act  quickly  but  quietly.  Be  calm  and  quiet. 
Don't  lose  your  head. 

2.  Make  the  injured  party  sit  or  lie  down. 

3.  See  the  injury  clearly  before  treating  it.  Send  for 
a  doctor  if  the  wound  is  serious. 

4.  Do  not  remove  more  clothing  than  is  necessary  to 
examine  the  injury.  Always  rip,  or,  if  you  cannot  rip, 
cut  the  clothes  from  the  injured  part.  Don't  pull  the 
clothes  off. 

5.  Give  alcoholic  stimulants  cautiously  and  slowly, 
and  only  when  the  patient  feels  weak  or  drowsy.  Hot 
coffee  or  tea  will  often  suffice  when  obtainable. 

6.  Keep  from  the  patient  all  persons  not  actually 
needed  to  assist  you. 

7.  Do  not  touch  a  wound  with  your  fingers.  If  the 
wound  is  dirty,  remove  the  dirt  as  well  as  possible,  with 
the  first-aid  bandage. 

8.  Don't  pour  into  the  wound  any  water  from  your 
canteen  for  the  purpose  of  washing  it  out  or  washing 
the  blood  from  around  the  wound.  Water  often  con- 
tains germs  and  the  skin  around  the  wound  may  be  dirty. 
If  water  is  poured  into  the  wound  it  carries  or  washes 
into  the  same  these  germs  and  dirt,  and  the  wound  will 
become  infected. 

9.  Heat  and  moisture  increases  the  activity  of  the 
germ  of  infection.  Therefore  keep  the  wound  cool  and 
dry. 

10.  If  the  blood  is  scarlet  in  color  and  appears  in 


FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED        311 

spurts,  send  at  once  for  a  doctor  and  then  take  the  neces- 
sary measures  (apply  a  tourniquet)  to  stop  the  flow  of 
blood. 

11.  If  the  patient  loses  consciousness,  it  will  probably 
be  because  insufficient  blood  is  reaching  the  brain. 
Lower  your  patient's  head  and  give  all  your  attention  to 
stopping  the  bleeding. 

BULLET    WOUND 

If  you  receive  a  bullet  wound,  don't  get  excited  or  lose 
your  head.  A  bullet  wound  in  the  muscle  or  soft  parts 
of  the  body  causes  little  pain  and,  if  properly  dressed, 
heals  in  about  two  to  three  weeks.  Protect  the  openings 
where  the  bullet  entered  and  came  out  with  the  bandages 
found  in  the  first-aid  packet.  Don't  touch  the  wound 
with  your  fingers.  Remove  sufficient  clothing  to  see 
the  wounds.  Then,  and  not  before,  open  the  first-aid 
packet  and  carefully  unfold  (open)  the  compress  (pad 
found  in  the  middle  of  each  bandage),  and  place  it  over 
the  wound  and  wrap  the  ends  of  the  bandage  fairly  tight 
around  the  limb  and  fasten  with  the  safety  pin.  If  one 
compress  is  not  large  enough  to  cover  the  entire  wound, 
use  the  second  bandage.  This  bandaging  will  stop  or- 
dinary bleeding.  Such  a  dressing  may  be  all  that  is 
needed  for  several  days.  It  is  better  to  leave  a  wound 
undressed  than  to  dress  it  carelessly  or  ignorantly,  so 
that  the  dressing  must  be  removed. 

STOPPING    BLEEDING 

If  the  blood  is  dark  blue  and  the  stream  is  continuous, 


312         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


a  vein  has  been  punctured  which,  in  itself,  is  not  ordi- 
narily dangerous.  The  bandaging  of  such  a  wound  will 
usually  stop  the  flow  of  blood.  Bandage  firmly.  Re- 
member all  wounds  bleed  a  little,  but  that,  as  a  rule,  this 
bleeding  will  stop  in  a  few  minutes  if  the  patient  remains 
quiet. 

If  the  blood  is  bright  red  and  appears  in  spurts,  an 
artery  has  been  punctured,  and  the  flow  of  blood  must 
be  stopped  or  the  patient  will  bleed  to  death.  To  do 
this,  apply  a  pressure  to  the  artery  at  some  point  between 
the  wound  and  the  heart.  Press  the  artery  against  the 
bone.  This  can  usually  be  done  for  a  short  time  with 
the  fingers.  However  it  will  usually  be  necessary  to 
use  an  improvised  tourniquet.  Tie  the  bandage  of  the 
first-aid  packet  around  the  limb  so  that  the  compress 
(pad)  will  press  the  artery  against  the  bone.  Slip 
under  the  compress  and  over  the  artery  a  small  stone. 
Pass  a  stick  under  the  bandage  and  turn  the  stick  around 

slowly  until  the  slack  is 
taken  up  and  the  bleeding 
stops.  Then  tie  the  stick 
as  shown  in  the  illustra- 
tion. 

After  the  tourniquet 
has  been  in  place  for  an 
hour,  loosen  it  and  if  no 
blood  flows  allow  it  to 
remain  loose.     If  it  again 


FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED       313 

bleeds  tighten  it  quickly  and  loosen  again  at  the  end  of 
an  hour. 

The  following  illustrations  show  the  usual  places 
where  tourniquets  are  applied  or  where  pressure  can  be 
applied  to  the  arteries  with  the  thumb : 


"• 


WOUND  IN  SHOULDER 


WOUND  IN  ARM 


WOUND  IN  HEAD 


WOUND  IN  LEG 


BROKEN    BONE     ( FRACTURE) 

The  next  injury  you  must  know  is  a  broken  bone. 


314 


THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 


You  will  usually  know  when  an  arm  or  leg  bone  is  broken 
by  the  way  the  arm  or  leg  is  held,  for  the  wounded  man 
loses  control  over  the  limb.  Suppose  your  comrade 
breaks  his  leg  or  arm.  What  would  you  do  ?  Straighten 
the  limb  gently,  pulling  upon  the  end  of  it  quietly  and 
firmly  so  that  the  two  ends  of  the  broken  bone  will  not 
overlap.  Next,  retain  the  limb  in  its  straightened  po- 
sition by  such  splints  and  other  material  as  the  boot  of  a 
carbine,  a  piece  of  board,  a  piece  of  tin  gutter.  Pad 
the  material  you  use.  Tie  it  to  the  broken  limb  as  shown 
in  the  following  illustrations.  Never  place  a  bandage 
over  the  fracture.     See  Illustrations. 


BROKEN1  ARM 


BROKEN  LEG 


BROKEN  LEG 


DROWNING 


Being  under  water  for  over  four  or  five  minutes  is 


FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED        315 


generally  fatal,  but,  unless  you  know  the  body  has  been 
submerged  a  long  time,  make  an  attempt  to  restore  life. 
Don't  get  disheartened  and  give  up,  if  you  see  no  signs 
of  life  after  a  few  minutes'  work.  Work  on  the  body 
for  at  least  an  hour. 

Your  comrade's  lifeless  body  has  just  been  pulled  out 
of  the  water.     What  do  you  do  ?     You  are  alone. 

1.  Don't  waste  time  in  removing  his  clothes. 

2.  Reach  your  finger  in  his  mouth  and  straighten  out 
his  tongue. 

3.  Lay  him  on  his  stomach ;  then  straddle  him ;  reach 
both  arms  under  his  stomach ;  raise  his  hips  two  feet  from 
the  ground  and  jostle  him.  This  drains  the  water  from 
the  stomach  and  lungs. 

4.  Lay  him  on  his  stomach;  turn  his  head  to  one 
side  so  his  nose  and  mouth  do  not  touch  the  ground; 


PRESSURE  EXERTED 


extend  his   arms  beyond  his  head    (see   illustration)  ; 


316        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

locate  his  lowest  (12th)  rib;  place  hand,  finger,  and 
thumb  closed  (see  illustration)  on  body  so  that  the  little 
finger  curls  over  the  12th  rib;  hold  your  arms  and 
wrists  straight  and  lean  forward  slowly  so  the  weight  of 
the  upper  part  of  your  body  will  be  brought  to  bear 
gradually  upon  your  comrade's  ribs  (see  illustration) ; 

let  this  pressure  continue  for  about  three  seconds;  then 
remove  it  suddenly  by  removing  the  hands.  Apply  this 
pressure  at  the  rate  of  from  12  to  15  times  a  minute. 


PRESSURE  RELAXED 


5.  Do  not  attempt  to  give  him  any  kind  of  liquids 
while  he  is  unconscious. 

6.  Apply  warm  blankets  as  soon  as  possible. 

7.  Never  say  "He  is  dead" — Work  on  his  body  for  at 
least  an  hour. 


FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED.       317 

SUNSTROKE (THE   SKIN   IS   HOT) 

A  sunstroke  is  accompanied  by  the  following  symp- 
toms: headache,  dizziness,  sense  of  oppression,  nausea, 
colored  vision,  and  often  the  patient  becomes  insensible. 
The  muscles  are  relaxed,  face  flushed,  skin  hot,  pulse 
rapid,  and  the  temperature  rises.  The  breathing  is 
labored. 

Treatment:  Reduce  the  temperature  as  rapidly  as 
possible,  with  ice  or  cold  water;  get  the  patient  in  the 
shade.     Loosen  clothing. 

HEAT  EXHAUSTION (THE   SKIN    IS   COOL) 

Symptoms:  Nausea,  a  staggering  gait,  pulse  is 
weak,  and  the  patient  may  quickly  become  unconscious. 
The  skin  is  cool.     This  condition  is  dangerous. 

Treatment:  Rub  the  limbs  vigorously.  Give  stim- 
ulants ;  apply  heat. 

BURNS 

Do  not  pull  the  clothing  from  the  burnt  part,  but  rip 
or  cut  it  off.  Do  not  break  the  blisters  or  prick  them 
even  if  large. 

Treatment:  Protect  it  quickly  with  a  mixture  of 
equal  parts  of  linseed  or  olive  oil  and  water. 

FREEZING   AND    FROSTBITE 

Symptom:  The  part  frozen  appears  white  or  bluish 
and  is  cold. 


318        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

Treatment:  Raise  the  temperature  of  the  frozen 
member  slowly  by  rubbing  it  with  snow  or  ice  and  water, 
in  a  cool  place.     Don't  go  near  a  fire. 

FAINTING 

Symptom:  Loss  of  consciousness.  It  is  usually  the 
result  of  severe  bleeding  or  exhaustion  from  fatigue. 
This  condition  is  rarely  dangerous. 

Treatment:  Lay  the  patient  on  his  back,  head  a  little 
lower  than  rest  of  body,  arms  by  side,  feet  extended. 
Rub  the  limbs.  Sprinkle  water  on  the  face  and  give 
stimulants  if  necessary. 


POISONING 

Treatment :  Send  for  a  doctor  at  once.  Empty  the 
stomach  and  bowels.  Give  two  tablespoons  full  of  mus- 
tard and  warm  water  or  a  tablespoon  full  of  salt  in  a 
glass  of  water  to  produce  vomiting.  Then  give  a  pur- 
gative. Tickle  throat  with  finger  or  feather  in  case  mus- 
tard or  salt  are  not  procurable.  After  the  poison  has 
been  evacuated,  give  stimulants  and  apply  heat  and  rub- 
bing externally. 

SNAKE    BITE 

In  snake  bites  the  poison  acts  quickly. 
Treatment:     Apply  a  tourniquet  between  the  wound 
and  the  heart  so  as  to  stop  the  circulation  and  prevent 


FIRST  AID  TO  THE  INJURED        319 

the  system  from  absorbing  the  poison.  Get  out  your 
knife  and  make  a  couple  of  cross  cuts  through  the  wound 
so  it  will  bleed  freely.  Then  suck  the  poison  from  the 
wound  and  spit  the  poison  out.  If  your  lips  are  lacer- 
ated there  is  danger  in  this  method  but  it  is  your  duty  to 
take  this  chance  in  order  to  save  your  comrade's  life. 
After  sucking  out  the  wound,  heat  your  knife  and  burn 
it  out. 

STOMACH    WOUNDS 

Send  for  a  doctor.  Lie  perfectly  quiet.  Don't  lose 
your  head  and  don't  attempt  to  crawl  to  help  or  to  stir 
around.  Place  a  clean  piece  of  cloth  over  the  wound 
and  keep  it  constantly  wet  with  a  solution  of  salt  water. 
If  the  wound  is  in  the  stomach,  it  is  better  to  lie  perfectly 
quiet  on  the  battle  field  for  a  day  or  two  until  found  than 
to  crawl  to  assistance. 

CHAFING 

Treatment:  Keep  parts  dry,  use  talcum  powder,  and 
keep  parts  separated  by  a  layer  of  absorbent  cotton. 

EXTINGUISHING    BURNING    CLOTHES 

Treatment:  Lie  down  on  the  floor  and  roll  up  as 
tightly  as  possible  in  a  rug  blanket,  etc.,  leaving  only 
the  head  out.  If  nothing  can  be  obtained  in  which  to 
wrap  yourself,  lie  down  and  roll  over  slowly  and  at  the 
same  time  beat  out  the  fire  with  your  hands.     Flames 


320        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

shoot  upward.     In  order  to  get  them  away  from  the 
head,  lie  down.     Don't  run,  it  only  fans  the  flames. 

If  another  person's  clothing  catches  fire,  throw  him 
to  the  ground  and  smother  the  fire  as  just  described. 


GAS 

Most  of  the  gas  used  on  the  battlefield  to-day  is 
deadly.  When  a  gas  shell  explodes  there  are  two  kinds 
of  men:  Quick  men  and  Dead  men.  The  quick  men 
put  on  their  gas  masks,  which  contain  chemicals  that 
neutralize  the  poisonous  air. 

Treatment:  When  a  man  is  slightly  gassed  don't 
allow  him  to  move  around  or  to  remove  his  mask.  Have 
him  lie  down  and  rest.  Loosen  his  clothes  around  his 
neck  and  chest  so  he  can  breathe  freely.  Keep  him 
warm.  When  the  gas  has  been  removed  from  the 
trench,  take  off  his  mask  and  give  spirits  of  ammonia. 


APPENDIX 

TABLES  OF  ORGANIZATION 

(For    Reference    Only) 

INFANTRY  COMPANY 

Commissioned  Officers 

Captain    1 

1st  Lieutenant 1 

2d  Lieutenant 1 

Total    ~3 

Enlisted  Strength 

1st  Sergeant 1 

Mess  Sergeant   1 

Supply  Sergeant    1 

Sergeants     8 

Corporals    .  ., 17 

Cooks     3 

Buglers    2 

Mechanics    2 

Privates,   1st  class 28 

Privates     87 

Total    150 

INFANTRY  BATTALION 
Four  companies  of  infantry.      (There  are  three  battalions  in   a 
regiment  of  infantry.) 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS,  1911 

FOR    USE    WITH    THE 

UNITED    STATES    RIFLE,    MODEL    1917    (ENFIELD). 

For  troops  armed  with  the  United  States  rifle,  Model  1917  (Enfield),  the 
alternative  paragraphs  published  herewith   will  govern. 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

HUGH    L.   SCOTT, 

Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official  : 

H.  P.  McCAIN,  The  Adjutant  General. 

The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece: 

First.  The  jiiece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the  chamber  or 
the  magazine  except  when  specially  odered.  When  so  loaded,  or  supposed 
to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  carried  locked;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock 
turned  to  the  "Safe."  At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the 
trigger  pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  aii  formed  under  arms,  pieces  are  immedi- 
ately inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  INSPECTION,  2.  ARMS,  3. 
ORDER   {Right  shoulder,  port),    4.    ARMS. 

A   similar  inspection  is  made   immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine  they  are  removed 
and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet  exercise^  on  guard,  or 
for  combat. 

Fourth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  order  arms.  Fall  out,  rest, 
and  at  case  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On  resuming  attention  the 
position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Fifth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  piece  is  brought 
to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  MARCH,  the  three  motions  cor- 
responding with  the  first  three  steps.  Movements  may  be  executed  at 
the  trail  by  prefacing  the  preparatory  command  with  the  words  at  trail: 
as  1.  AT  TRAIL,  FORWARD,  2.  MARCH.  The  trail  is  taken  at  the 
command  MARCH. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking  interval 
or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the  order,  raise  the  piece 
to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and»  resume  the  order  on  halting. 

Sixth.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The  execution  of 
the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Seventh.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when  without 
arms. 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.   UNFIX,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt:     Execute  parade  rest; 

322 


APPENDIX  823 

grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with  the  right  hand,  pressing  the 
spring  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand;  raise  the  bayonet  until  the 
handle  is  about  12  inches  above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece;  drop  the  point  to 
the  left,  back  of  the  hand  toward  the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard, 
return  the  bayonet,  the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body; 
regrasp  tin-  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack:  Take  the  bayonet 
from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to  the  scabbard  in  the  most 
convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed  in  the  most 
expeditious  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece  returned  to  the  original 
position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness  and  regularity, 
but    not    in    cadence. 

Being  at  inspection  arms;  1.  ORDER   (Right  shoulder,  port),  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command  press  the  follower  down  with  the  fingers  of 
the  left  hand,  then  push  the  bolt  forward  just  enough  to  engage  the  fol- 
lower, raise  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At  the  command 
ARMS,  complete  the  movement  ordered. 


TO  LOAD 

Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  WITH  DUMMY  {Blank  or 
ball)   CARTRIDGES,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  loa<l  each  front  rank  man  or  skirmisher  faces  half  right 
and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  1  foot,  to  such  position  as 
will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and  steadiness  of  the  body;  raises  or 
lowers  the  piece  and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb 
extended  along  the  stock  and  tin-  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast.  With 
the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes  a  loaded  clip  and 
inserts  the  ends  in  the  clip  slots,  places  the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of 
the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers  extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting 
on  the  magazine  floor  plate;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by 
pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  without  removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the  boli 
home,  turning  down  the  handle;  turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  ".Safe"  and 
Carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each  rear  rank  man  moves 
to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar  position  opposite  the  interval  to  the 
right  of  his  front  rank  man,  muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front 
rank,  and    loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held  as  nearly 
as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if  kneeling, 
the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting,  the  elbows  are  supported 
by  the  knees.  If  lying  down,  the  left  hand  steadies  and  supports  the 
piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle 
off  the  ground. 


324         THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying  down)  are 
designated  as  that  of  load. 

For  purposes  of  simulated  firing,  1.  SIMULATE,  2.  LOAD,  raise  the 
bolt  handle  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  draw  the  bolt  back  until  the 
cocking  piece  engages,  then  close  the  bolt,  and  turn  the  bolt  handle  down. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing;  after  a  few 
lessons  dummy  cartridges  are  used,     Later,  blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 


TO   UNLOAD 

Unload:  Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
the  bolt  alternately  backward  and  forward  until  ail  the  cartridges  are 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is  closed  by 
pressing  the  follower  down  with  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  to  engage 
it  under  the  bolt,  and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home.  The  trigger  is  pulled. 
The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  belt  and 
the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

To  continue  the  firing:     1.  AIM,  2.  SQUAD,  3.  FIRE. 

Each  command  is  executed  as  previously  explained.  Load  is  executed 
by  drawing  back  and  thrusting  home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving 
the  safety  lock  at  the  "Ready." 

Cease  firing:  Firing  stops;  pieces  are  loaded  and  locked;  the  sights  are 
laid  down  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order.  Cease  firing  is  used  for 
long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of  position  or  to  steady  the  men. 

COMPANY  INSPECTION 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:     1.  OPEN  BANKS,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  front  rank  executes  right  dress;  the  rear 
rank  and  the  file  closers  march  backward  4  steps,  halt,  and  execute  right 
dress;  the  lieutenants  pass  around  their  respective  flanks  and  take  post, 
facing  to  the  front,  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  their  respective  pla- 
toons. The  captain  aligns  the  front  rank,  rear  rank,  and  file  closers,  takes 
post  3  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide,  facing  to  the  left,  and  commands: 

3.  FRONT,   4.  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION. 

At  the  second  command  the  lieutenants  carry  saber;  the  captain  returns 
saber  and  inspects  them,  after  which  they  face  about,  order  saber,  and 
stand  at  ease;  upon  the  completion  of  the  inspection  they  carry  saber,  face 
about,  and  order  saber.  The  captain  may  direct  the  lieutenants  to  accom- 
pany or  assist  him,  in  which  case  they  return  saber  and,  at  the  close  of  the 
inspection,  resume  their  posts  in  front  of  the  company,  draw  and  carry 
saber. 

Having  inspected  the  lieutenants,  the  captain  proceeds  to  the  right  of 
the  company.  Each  man,  as  the  captain  approaches  him,  executes  inspec- 
tion arms. 

The  captain  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right  hand  just  below 
the  lower  band,  the  man  dropping  his  hands;  the  captain  inspects  the  piece, 
and,  with  the  hand  and  piece  in  the  same  position  as  in  receiving  it,  hands 


APPENDIX  325 

it  back  to  the  man,  who  takes  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  and 
executes  order  arms. 

As  the  captain  returns  the  piece  the  next  man  executes  inspection  arms, 
and  so  on  through  the  company. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each  man  executes  orrf<  r 
arms  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to  the  next  man. 

The  inspection  is  from  right  to  left  in  front,  and  from  left  to  right  in 
rear  of  each  rank  and  of  the  line  of  file  closers. 

When  approached  by  the  captain  the  first  sergeant  executes  inspection 
saber.  Enlisted  men  armed  with  the  pistol  execute  inspection  pistol  by 
drawing  the  pistol  from  the  holster  and  holding  it  diagonally  across  the 
body,  barrel  up,  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  neck,,  muzzle  pointing  up  and 
to  the  left.  The  pistol  is  returned  to  the  holster  as  soon  as  the  captain 
passes. 

Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  the  captain  takes  post  facing  to  the 
left  in  front  of  the  right  guide  and  on  line  with  the  lieutenants  and  com- 
mands:    1.  CLOSE  RANKS,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  lieutenants  resume  their  posts  in  line;  the 
rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches,  each  man  covering  his  file  leader;  the  file 
closers  close  to  2  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 


INFORMATION     FOR     SCHOOLS     AND 

COLLEGES  ARMED  WITH  RIFLES, 

MODEL   1898. 

War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 

Washington,  December  2,  1911. 

The  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  have  been  prepared  for  the  use  of 
troops  armed  with  the  United  States  magazine  rifle,  model  1903.  For  the 
guidance  of  organizations  armed  with  the  United  States  magazine  rifle, 
model  1898,  the  following  alternative  paragraphs  are  published  and  will 
be  considered  as  substitute  paragraphs  for  the  corresponding  paragraphs 
in  the  text. 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

RULES   GOVERNING  THE   CARRYING   OF   THE    PIECE. 

Third.    The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  down,  except  when  using  the  magazine. 

Being  at  order  arms:     1.  Unfix,  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt:  Take  the  position  of 
parade  rest,  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with  the  right  hand, 
press  the  spring  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand,  raise  the  bayonet 
until  the  handle  is  about  6  inches  above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece,  drop  the 
point  to  the  left,  back  of  hand  toward  the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scab- 
bard, return  the  bayonet,  the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  body; 
regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack:  Take  the  bayonet 
from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to  the  scabbard  in  the  most 
convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed  in  the  most 
expeditious  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece  returned  to  the  original 
position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness  and  regularity, 
but  not  in  cadence. 

Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command,  take  the  position  of  port  arms  (TWO).  With 
the  right  hand  open  the  magazine  gate,  turn  the  bolt  handle  up,  draw  the 
bolt  back  and  glance  at  the  magazine  and  chamber.  Having  found  them 
empty,  or  having  emptied  them,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order   (Bight  shoulder,  port),  2.  ARMS. 

326 


APPENDIX  327 

At  the  preparatory  command,  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the  handle 
down,  close  the  magazine  gate,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms. 
At  the  command  arms,  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

Pieces  being  loaded  and  in  the  position  of  load,  to  execute  other  move- 
ments with  the  pieces  loaded:  1.  Lock,  2.  PIECES. 

At  the  command  Pieces  turn  the  safety  lock  fully  to  the  right. 

The  safety  lock  is  said  to  be  at  the  "ready"  when  turned  to  the  left, 
and  at  the  "safe"  when  turned  to  the  right. 

The  cut-off  is  said  to  be  "on"  when  turned  up  and  "off"  when  turned 
down. 

Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  With  dummy  (blank  or  ball) 
cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skirmisher  faces  half  right 
and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  one  foot,  to  such  position 
as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and  steadiness  of  the  body;  raises 
or  lowers  the  piece  and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast.  "With 
the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes  a  cartridge  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  and  places  it  in  the  receiver;  places 
palm  of  the  hand  against  the  back  of  the  bolt  handle;  thrusts  the  bolt 
home  with  a  quick  motion,  turning  down  the  handle,  and  carries  the  hand 
to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each  rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front, 
takes  a  similar  position  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front-rank 
man,  muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held  as  nearly 
as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if  kneeling  the 
left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting  the  elbows  are  supported  by  the 
knees.  If  lying  down  the  left  hand  steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the 
balance,  the  toe  of  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying  down)  are 
designated  as  that  of  load. 

FILL  MAGAZINE. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  if  not  already  there,  open  the  gate  of  the 
magazine  with  the  right  thumb,  take  five  cartridges  from  the  box  or  belt, 
and  place  them,  with  the  bullets  to  the  front,  in  the  magazine,  turning  the 
barrel  slightly  to  the  left  to  facilitate  the  insertion  of  the  cartridges;  close 
the  gate  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

To  load  from  the  magazine  the  command  From  magazinr  will  be  given 
preceding  that  of  LOAD;  the  cut-off  will  be  turned  up  on  coming  to  the 
position  of  load. 

To  resume  loading  from  the  belt  the  command  From  belt  will  be  given 
preceding  the  command  LOAD;  the  cut-off  will  be  turned  down  on  coming 
to  the  position  of  load. 

The  commands  from  magazine  and  from  belt,  indicating  the  change  in 
the  manner  of  loading,  will  not  be  repeated  in  subsequent  commands. 


328        THE  PLATTSBURG  MANUAL 

The  words  from  belt  apply  to  cartridge  box  as  well  as  belt. 

In  loading  from  the  magazine  care  should  be  taken  to  push  the  bolt 
fully  forward  and  turn  the  handle  down  before  drawing  the  bolt  back,  as 
otherwise  the  extractor  will  not  catch  the  cartridge  in  the  chamber,  and 
jamming  will  occur  with  the  cartridge  following. 

To  fire  from  the  magazine,  the  command  MAGAZINE  FIRE  may  be 
given  at  any  time.  The  cut-off  is  turned  up  and  an  increased  rate  of  fire 
is  executed.  After  the  magazine  is  exhausted  the  cut-off  is  turned  down 
and  the  firing  continued,  loading  from  the  belt. 

Magazine  fire  is  employed  only  when,  in  the  opinion  of  the  platoon  leader 
or  company  commander,  the  maximum  rate  of  fire  becomes  necessary. 

UNLOAD. 

All  take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  cut-off  up,  if  not  alreday  there, 
turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  left,  and  alternately  open  and  close  the  chamber 
until  all  the  cartridges  are  ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected 
the  chamber  is  closed  and  the  trigger  pulled.  The  cartridges  are  then 
picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  box  or  belt,  and  the  piece  brought 
to  the  order. 

CLIP  FIRE. 

Turn  the  cut-off  up:  fire  at  will  (reloading  from  the  magazine)  until 
the  cartridges  in  the  piece  are  exhausted;  turn  the  cut-off  down;  fill  maga- 
zine; reload  and  take  the  position  of  susj)end  firing. 

CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the  position  of 
load,  the  cut-off  turned  down  if  firing  from  magazine,  the  cartridge  is 
drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is  ejected,  the  trigger  is  pulled,  sights  are  laid 
down,  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of  position 
or  to  steady  the  men. 


INDEX 


About  face,  S4 

Advance,  company,  121,  123 

during  attack,  148,  245,  246 

methods  of,  12G-129 

rear  guard  during,  231 

under  cover,  245 
Advance  cavalry,  228 
Advance  guard,  142  221 

communication  with,  229,  229 

distance  from  main  body  of,  224 

distribution  of,  226 

duties   of,  143,  223,  224 

strength  of,  224 

supports  to,  226,  227 
Age  limits  for  reserve  officers,  169, 

170 
Aiming  rifle,  277 
Air  planes,  military  value  of,  213 
Alignments,  66,  67 

in    company   movements,    88,    106, 
112 

in  skirmish   drill,   119 
Ammunition,  191 

data  on  U.  S.  Army,  285,  286 
Appointments     to     officers'     reserve 

corps,  169,  170,  175,  176 
Arm  signals,  302-308 
Arms,  manual  of,  40-62 
Arms  of  the  service,  cooperation  of, 

182 
Army  departments,  173,  323,  324 
Army  organization  tables,  321-324 
Army  slang,  19,  20 
Articles  of  War,  179 
Artillery,  183,  232,  322,  323 

organization  of,  322,  323 
Assembling,  position  of  guides  and 

file-closers  in,  111 
Assembly  of  company,  88,  120,  125 

of  platoons,   120.  121 

of  squad,  75 
At  ease,  32,  33 

march,  106 


Attack,  advantages  of,  145.  242,  243 

deployment  for,  244 

enveloping,  243,  244 

fire  superiority  in,  148,  207,  246 

frontal,  243 

initiative  in,  145,  206 

night,  185,  186 

patrols  in,  244,  252 

plan  of,  147 

progress    of,    147,    148,    149,    207, 
246,  247 

rules  for,  208,  209 

turning  movement  in,  243,  244 
Attention,  29 

from  route  step,  106 

under  arms,  40 

Back  step,  37 

Backward  march,  37 

Bandaging,  first-aid,  310-313 

Barbwire,  use  of,  151,  186 

Base  squad  in  extended  order  drills, 

112-119 
Battle-field  conditions,  130.  131,  207 
Bayonet,  283 

importance  of,  190 
Bed-making    on    practice    marches, 

161 
Billeting,  215 
Bivouac,  215 
Blanket  roll,  167,  168 
Bleeding,  treatment  for,  311-313 
Blisters,  treatment  for,  163 
Bombs,  184,  185 

Broken  bone,  treatment  for,  313,  314 
Bullet  wound,  treatment  for,  311 
Burning  clothes,  extinguishing,  319, 

320 
Burns,  treatment  for,  317 

Camp,  arrival  at,  11-13 
conduct  in,  13-15 
equipment  in,  11 


329 


330 


INDEX 


Camp— Contin  ued 

inspection  of,  296 

guard  duty  in,  192-194 

habits  in,  15,  16,  17 

security  in,  137-139 

mail  regulations  in,  10 

sanitation,  164,  165 
Camping   ground,  selection  of,  215, 

216 
Camping  on  practice  marches,   161, 

292 
Camps,  Federal  training,  10 
Cantonment,  215 

Captain,  responsibility  of,  110,  133 
Cavalry,  183,  184 

advance,  226,  212 

ammunition  for,  191 
Cavalry     division,     composition     of, 
211 

squadron,  organization  of,  323 

troop,  organization  of,  321,  322 
Chafing,  treatment  for,  319 
Change  step,  39 
Charge  during  attack,  247 
Clip  fire,  211 
Close  order  drills,  63,  88 
Clothing,  11 
Coast  artilery,  178 
Colors,  saluting,  195 
Column,   diminishing  front   of,   108, 
109 

of  platoons,   change   of   direction 
for,  102,  103 

formation  from  column  of  squads, 
105,    106 

from  line  of,  100-102 

of  route,  106 

of  squads,  change  of  direction  for, 
94,  103 

formation    from   line    of,    93,   94, 
102,  103 
Combat  patrols,  244,  252 

train,   191 
Commands,  28 

in  company  skirmish  drill,  114 

to   company,   86,   96-100 
Communicating  trenches,  188 
Company,  advance  of,  121-129 


Company— Continued 

alignment  in,  88,  106,  112 

assembly  of,  88,  120 

dismissing  the,  111,  112 

dressing,  92,  97,  99,  112 

facing,  105 

file  closers  in,  108 

file  formation  in,  108,  109 

formation  into  columns,  100-102 

front  into  line,  99,  100,  106 

guide  in,  106,  107,  108 

in  line,  from  line  of  platoons,  105, 
106 

inspection  arms  in,  88,  89 

march  at  ease,  106 
to  rear,  105 

movement  on  fixed  pivot  in,  89-93 
on  moving  pivot  in,  93-96 
intervals  in,  93 

platoons    in,    110 

position  of  men  in,  87 

roll  call  in,  87 

route  step,  106 

skirmish  drills  in,  114-120 

squads  in,  86 
Conduct,  rules  of,  13-15 
Cooperation  of  arms  of  the  service, 

182 
Corporals,  duties  on  firing  line  of, 
134,  135 

in  company  movement,  96,  97,  99, 
100 

in  spirmish  drill,  77,  78,  115-117 
Cossack  posts,   141,  235 
Counter  attack,  248,  253 
Counting  off,  64,  86 
Cover,  advance  under,  245 

detachments,  duties  of,  221,  222 
strength  of,  223 

trenches,  188 
Day  patrol,  236,  237 
Defense,  advantages  of,  150,  249 

fire  superiority  in,  252 

orders  for,  251 

passive  and  active,  149,  247,  248 

position   for,  150,  249,  250 

preparations  for,  150-152,  250-252 

use  of  obstacles  in,  186 


INDEX 


331 


Deflection,  in  rifle  drill,  265,  267,  268 
Deployment  for  attack,  244 

rules  for,  118-120 
Diminishing  the  front  of  column  of 

squads,  108,  109 
Discipline,  value  of,  17,  63,  216,  217 
Distances,  taking,  64,  111 
Division  commander,  212 
Divisional  cavalry,  211 
Double  time  march,  36 
Dress,  17,  18 
Drills,  close  order,  63,  88 

extended  order,  112 

rifle,  261-269 

value  of,  17,  63,  180 
Drowning,  treatment  for,  314-316 
Duties  of  advance  and  rear  guards, 
143 

of  captain  in  battle,  133 

of  corporals  in  battle,  134,  135 

of  platoon  leaders  in  battle,  134 

of  reserve  officers,  171 

Elevation,  in  rifle  drill,  265,  268,  269 
Emergency  ration,  192 
Equipment  for  first-aid,  309 

inspection  of,  295,  296 

on  arrival  at  camp,  11 

on  practice  marches,  166-168 
Estimating  distance,  286-291 
Estimating   the   situation,   146,   203, 

204 
Examination   to   enter   Officers'   Re- 
serve Corps,  170,  172 
Exercises,  preparatory,  23,  27 
Extended  order  drills,  112 
Eyes   front,  33 

right,  33 

Facing,  company,  105 

on  skirmish  line,  120 
Facings,  34 

Fainting,  treatment  for,  318 
Fall  in,  33 
Fall  out,  32 

Feet,  care  of  the,  14,  162 
Federal  training  camps,  10 


Field  artillery,  organization  of. 
323 

exercises,  127 

orders,  147,  196-199,  204-206 

ration,  192 

train,  191 
File,  in  squad,  63 

formation   from  column,  108,  109 
File-closer,  sergeant  as,  111 

in  close  order,  88 

position  in  column  of,  102,  107 

position  in  company  of,  92,  108 

position    in    company    facing    of, 
105 

regulation  of  intervals  by,  111 
Filipino  ration,  192 
Fire  attack,  127-129,  246 

at  will,  211 

control,  13-1 

direction,  132-134 

discipline,  135 

kinds  of,  211 

superiority  in  attack,  246 
in  defense,  252 

trenches,  188 
Firing,  conditions  for  effective,  131, 
^132,  134,  207 

positions  for,  271-275 

line,  advance  of,  148,  245,  246 

practice,  advice  on,  271-282 
First-aid  packet,  309 
Fix  bayonet,  from  order,  58 
Flag  signals,  299-301 
Flank  guard,  221 

march,   38 
Following  corporal,  77,  78,  115,  116, 

117,  119 
Forward  march,  35 
Fracture,  treatment  for,  313,  314 
Freezing    and    frost-bite,    treatment 
for,  317,  318 

Gallery  practice,  155,  270,  328 
Garrison  ration,  192 
Guard  duty,  192-194 
Guide,    distance    regulation    by,    92, 
111 
duties  of,  106,  107 


332 


INDEX 


Guide — Continued 
in  column  formation,  107 
in  company  assembly,  88,  111 
in  company  facing,  105 
in  company  pivot  movements,  91- 

94,  101 
in  line  or  column  formation,  101, 

106 
in  skirmish  drill,  114-116 
in  squad  movements,  107,  108 
of  deployed  line,  107 
Guides,    execution     of    manual    of 
arms  by,  111 
officers  as,  106,  110,  111 

Habits,  15,  16,  17 

Half  step  march,  36,  37 

Halt,    38 

during   practice   marches,   160 
in  company  movement,  97,  99 

Hand  grenades,  184,  185 
salute,  31,  32 

Hardships  of  practice  marches,  159 

Hasty  cover  trenches,  188 

Heat  exhaustion,  treatment  for,  317 

Independent  cavalry,  212 
Infantry,  182 

ammunition  for,  191 

battalion,  organization   of,  323 

company,  organization  of,  321 

division,  composition  of,  211 
Information  concerning  enemy,  146, 

207,  209,  210,  254 
Initiative,  value  of,  145,  206 
Injuries,  first-aid  treatment  for,  310, 

311 
Inspection  arms,  from  order,  59 

in  company,  88,  89 
Inspection  of  camp  equipment,  296 

of  outpost,  239,  240 

of  patrol,  256 
Instruction  to  officers,  172,  173,  176 
Intelligence  Section,  210 
Intervals,  in  company  movements,  93 

in  skirmish  line,  78,  79 

in  squad,  63,  65,  7%  SO 

taking,  111 
Intrenchments,  187,  251 


Kneeling,  80,  81 
position  for  firing,  273 

Left  shoulder  arms,  from  port,  51, 

53 
Lieutenant,  appointment  from  Offi- 
cers' Reserve  of,  176 
assignments  of,  110 
Light   artillery  battalion,   organiza- 
tion of,  323 
Line  formation  to  front,  from  col- 
umn, company,  99,  100 
to   right,   from  column,  company, 
96-9 
Line  of  observation,  140,  236 
of  out  guards,  140 
of     platoons,     from     column     of 
squads,  103 
from  line,  103,  104 
of   resistance,   140 
of  reserves,  138,  140 
List  of  Reserve  officers,  176,  177 
Loading  and  firing  in  squad,  81,  82, 

83 
Lying  down,  80 

Machine  guns,  184,  229,  232 

Mail,  in  camp,  10 

Manoeuver  maps,   190 

Manual  of  arms,  40,  62 

Maps,  military  use  of,  189,  1P0,  210 

March  to  rear,  company,  105 

Marches,   conditions   for   successful, 
213-215 

Marches,  practice,  159 

see  also,  Practice  marches 
Marching  rules,  160 
Marchings,  35-39 

in  squad,  68,  77 
Mark  time,  36 

Meeting  engagements,  189,  187 
Military  correspondence,  180-182 

information,     collection     of,     146, 
207,  209,  210,  213,  254 

maps,  189,  190,  210 
Military  problems,   199-202 

training  in  colleges,  173-176 


INDEX 


:r.is 


Mission,  146 
Mobile   Army,  177,  178 
Movements  in  column,  in  company, 
102-105 
in  line,  in  company,  96-100 
on  pivot,  in  company,  89-96 
Musicians,    position    in    column    of, 
111 

Napoleon    as    military    leader,    199, 

201,  206 
Nervousness  in  firing,  153,  157 
.Night  operations,  185,  186 

patrol,  236 
Non-commissioned  officers,  106,  110, 

111,  179 

Observation,  line  of,  140,  236 
Oblique  march,  76,  77 
Obstacles,  removal  of,  for  defense, 
151 
use  of,  in  defense,  186 
Officers,  advice  to,  216-218 

grades   and  commands   of,  179 
Officers'  Reserve  Corps,  see  also  Re- 
serve officers, 
Officers'    Reserve    Corps,    eligibility 
for,  169-172,  175,  176 
pay  in,  171,  174,  176 
purpose  of,  169 
sections   of,  72,  173 
Order  arms,  from  inspection,  59 
from  port,  45 
from  present,  45 
from  right  shoulder,  50 
from  trail,  55 
Out  guards,  precautions  for,  240 
line  of,  140,  234,  235 
posting  of,  240 
Outpost,  composition  of,  232 

distance  from  main  body  of,  233 
distribution  of  troops  of,  233-237 
formation  of,  138,  237-240 
importance  of,  137,  221 
inspection  of,  239,  240 
placing  of,  138,  141,  234,  239 
relieving  the,  241 


Outpost — Continued 

strength  of,  140,  231 

supports  to,  138,  140,  234 

orders,  238 

reserves,  234 

sentinels,  235,  236,  237,  239 

sketches,  190 
Outposts,    inter-communication    be- 
tween, 237 

Packs  on  practice  marches,  162,  167 
Parade   rest,   30 

from  order,  54 
Patrol,  228,  229 
combat,  244,  252 
duties  of,  237,  240,  254 
formation  for,  257,  258 
instructions  to,  255,  256 
meeting  enemy,  258,  259 
posting  of,  240 
preparation  for,  256,  257 
return  of,  259 
strength  of,  255 
cautions,  258,  250 
commander  of,  255 
Pay  in  Officers'  Reserve  Corps,  171, 

174,  176 
Picket  sentinel,  240 
Pickets,  141,  235 

posting  of,  240 
Platoon    columns,    advance  by,    122, 
124 
leaders,   duties   on   firing  line   of, 
134 
Platoons,  assembly  of,  120,  121 
commands  to,  96-100 
squads  in,  110 
Poisoning,  treatment  for,  318 
Port  arms,  from  left  shoulder,  54 
from  order,  43,  44 
from  present,  45 
from  right  shoulder,  50 
Positions  for  rifle  practice,  271-275 
Practice  marches,  camping  on,  161, 
164,  165,  292 
care  of  feet  on,  162-164 
equipment  for,  166-168 
hardships  of,  159,  160 


334 


INDEX 


Practice  marches — Continued 
value  of,  159 
water  drinking  on,  163 
Present  arms,  from  order,  41,  42 
from  port,  45 
from  right  shoulder,  51 
Prone  position  for  firing,  274,  275 
Property  for  Reserve  officers,  192 

Quick    time   march,   36 

Range  finders,  151,  289,  290,  291 
Rapid   fire   practice,    157,   158,   279, 
280,  328,  329 

target,  267 
Ration,   191,   192 
Reading    list    for    Reserve    officers, 

195,  196 
Rear,  march  to  the,  39 
Rear  guard,  142,  221 

composition  of,  229,  230 

distance  from  main  force  of,  230 

distribution  of,  230 

duties  of,  143,  229 

strength  of,  229 

of  advancing  force,  231 
Reconnaissance,  228,  229,  254,  213 
Reconnoitering    patrols,    duties    of, 

210,  254 
Relations  between  officers  and  men, 

216-218 
Reserve    officers,    see    also    Officers' 

Reserve  Corps, 
Reserve    officers,    active    service    of, 
171 

appointment  of,  169,  170,  172,  175, 
176 

department  report  on,  176,  177 

instruction  to,  172,  173-175 

pay  of,  171,  174,  176 

promotion  of,  171 

property  of,  192 

reading  list  for,  195,  196 

Training  Camps,  173-175 
Reserve  ration,  192 
Reserves,  during  advance,  142 

line  of,  138,  140 

placing  of,  239 

to  support  party,  227,  228 


Resistance,  line  of,  140 
Rests,  32,  33,  54 

during  marches,  160,  161 
Rifle,  care  of,  20,  282 

control  of,  135 

data  on  U.  S.  Army,  283-285 

drills,  261-269 

holding,  270,  271 

knowledge  of,  153,  154 

nomenclature   of,   261 

recoil  of,  156,  157 

rules  for  carrying,  60-62 

salute,  from  order,  57 

from  right  shoulder,  55,  56 
from  trail,  57 

sights,  154-156,  261-264 

sling  of,  276 

practice,  271-282 
Right  dress,  66,  67 

face,  34 

step  march,  37 

turn  in  company  movement,  97,  99 
Right    shoulder    arms,    from    order, 
46-49 
from  port,  50 
from  present,  51 
Road  sketches,  190 
Roll  call  in  company,  89 
Route  step,  company,  106 

Salutes,  31,  32,  56 
Saluting,  18,  19,  194,  195 

at  retreat,  194,  195 

colors,  195 
Security,  during  advance,  141 

in  camp,  137-139 

on  march,  221-223 
Semaphore  signals,  301 
Sentinel  posts,  235,  236 
Sentinels,  duties  of,  193,  194 

posting  of,  240 
Sentry  squads,  141,  235 
Sergeants    in    company    movements, 

88,  89,  111 
Shelter,  for  troops  on  march,  215 

tents,  292 
Shoes,  walking,  16,  21,  22,  164 
Shot,  calling,  278 
Side  step,  37 


INDEX 


335 


Sighting,  261-264,  278,  279 
Signal  Corps  code,  299-301 
Signals,  arm,  302-308 
flag,  299-301 

general  service  code  for,  297,  298 
semaphore,  301 
Sitting  position  for  firing,  271,  272 
Skirmish  drill,  base  squad  in,  112-119 
guide  in,  114-116 
in  squad,  78-83 
line,  advance  of,  126,  127 
from  column,  116-118 
from  company  line,  114-116 
on  oblique,  120 
to  the  flank,  120 
to  the  rear,  120 
Skirmishes  in  advance,  124 
Slow  fire  practice,  270,  271,  328,  329 

targets,  266 
Small  pox  inoculation,  11 
Snake  bite,  treatment  for,  318,  319 
Squad,  alignment  of,  66,  67 
formation  of,  64 
assembly  of,  75 
deploy  of,  63 
dismissal  of,  59,  60 
distance  in,  64 
halt,  69 

number  of  men  in,  110 
right,  68 
right  about,  70 
right  turn,  71,  73 
skirmish  drill  in,  78-83 
blanket  roll,  168 
columns,  124 
file,  63 

intervals,  63,   65,   79,  80 
leaders  in  company  movements,  88 
marchings,  68-77 
Squads,  in  column  movements,  102- 
105 
in  company,  86 
commands  to,  96-100 
Stack  arms,  84 
Steps,  35-39 
Stomach  wounds,  treatment  for,  319 


Strategical  maps,  190 

reconnaissance,  213 
Strategy,  212 

Sunstroke,  treatment  for,  317 
Supports,  posting  of,  239 

during  advance,  142 

in  attack,  149 

to  advance  guard,  226,  227 

to  outposts,  138,  140,  234 
Surplus  kit  bag,  167 

Tactical  reconnaissance,  213 

Tactics,  212 

Take  arms,  85 

Taking  intervals  and  distances,  111 

Target  practice,  156,  157,  328,  329 

Team  work  in  firing,  133 

Tent  pitching,  161,  293,  294 

Tents,  shelter,  292 

Term  of  service  for  Reserve  officers, 
170,  171,  175 

Tourniquet,  use  of,  312,  313,  318 

Trail  arms,  from  order,  55 

Training  camps,  Federal,  10 
Corps  for  officers,  173-175 

Transportation,  191 

Travel  ration,  192 

Trenches,  151,  187-189,  251 
occupation  of,  251,  253 

Trigger  squeeze,  277,  278 

Turn  on  fixed  pivot  from  line,  com- 
pany, 89-93 
on  moving  pivot  to  change  direc- 
tion, company,  93-96 

Turning   movement   in    attack,   243, 
244 

Typhoid  inoculation,  10,  11 

Unfix  bayonet,  from  order,  58 
Uniforms,  17,  18 

U.   S.   Army,   ammunition,  data  on, 
285,  286 
organization  tables  for,  321-323 

rifle,  data  on,  283-285 
land    forces,   177,   178 
military   departments,   9,   10,    180, 
181,  323,  324,  325 


336  INDEX 

Volley  fire,  211  War  game  maps,  190 

Whistle  signals,  121 
Walking,  importance  of,  21,  22  Windage,  267,  269 

War  strength  tables,  326,  32T  Withdrawal  from  action,  187,  253 

Water  drinking  on  practice  marches,      Wounds,    first-aid     treatment     for 
162  310,  311,  319 


a  jl.        DATE  DUE                      | 

r* 

■         ■ 

1AP 

w75 

ram  jun 

1     1975 

JAN 

4  1386 

-iw    1    n      1Qftt\ 

KECD  N 

OV  1  0   ww 

RFf'f)  Mi 

ID   o  1    irtn 

t>  &  J-    \JO 

j 

AUG  0  6 

GAYLORD 

PRINTED   IN  USA. 

") 


'/  II 1 


3  '970  00624 ""Sf 


I 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACII 

ilii I  ill  mi  in  mill  in  ||  mi  |M|i||||| 


A  A      000  205  388    2 


STRATFORD  &GRE£N 

BOOKSELLERS 

642-644  SO.HAIM  ST. 

LOS     ANGELES 


